Home

43-TV-25-11 TrendManager Suite User Manual

1. A Date Details Sat 30 Jun 2007 15 04 55 AbSat 30 Jun 2007 15 02 30 AbSat 30 Jun 2007 15 02 30 AA Sat 30 Jun 2007 15 02 09 AbbSat 30 Jun 2007 15 02 04 AbbSat 30 Jun 2007 15 02 04 AbbSat 30 Jun 2007 15 02 04 AbbSat 30 Jun 2007 15 02 04 AbbSat 30 Jun 2007 15 02 04 AbbSat 30 Jun 2007 15 02 04 A Sat 30 Jun 2007 15 01 50 AbbSat 30 Jun 2007 15 01 30 AbSat 30 Jun 2007 15 01 30 AbSat 30 Jun 2007 15 01 18 AbSat 30 Jun 2007 15 01 18 AbSat 30 Jun 2007 15 01 18 AbSat 30 Jun 2007 15 01 18 AbSat 30 Jun 2007 15 01 18 AbSat 30 Jun 2007 15 01 18 AbSat 30 Jun 2007 15 00 39 AbSat 30 Jun 2007 15 00 39 AbbSat 30 Jun 2007 14 59 54 AbSat 30 Jun 2007 14 59 36 A Sat 30 Jun 2007 14 58 49 AbSat 30 Jun 2007 14 58 48 AbSat 30 Jun 2007 14 58 48 Ab Sat 30 Jun 2007 14 58 48 Ab Sat 30 Jun 2007 14 58 48 Ab Sat 30 Jun 2007 14 58 48 A Sat 30 Jun 2007 14 58 30 Setup Changed Chart control Pause A Waitrose Aborted wrong batch P4 Alm 1 Out of alarm 3487 lt Alarm 1 configured for Pen 4 Off gt Chart control Resume IC cheese D pork joint carrots i177 S Waitrose P4 Alm 1 Into Alarm 3487 lt Alarm 1 configured for Pen 4On gt Chart control Pause A Tesco Aborted Chart control Resume C cream JI leg of lamb onions If 56 S Tesco Chart control Pause E Tesco Stopped R Tesco Resumed P Tesco Paused P4 Alm 1 Out of alarm 3486 lt Alarm 1 configured for Pen 4 Off gt C cream
2. sign to activate expand e Listed under the Database Servers are a list of Servers e Listed under each Server are the Databases Listed under each Database are the devices rit This is the Database Server icon a This is the Database icon The bottom window has three actions Client connections Database logging and Diagnos tics When a device is selected from the top window details of the device s activity is displayed here Device logging to a database will display details in the Database logging tab Realtime data will display in the Client connections tab The Diagnostics tab can be activated by going to Administration Preferences and ticking the Show Diagnostics box this will display proper ties and vales of a selected device 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 43 TV 25 11 Honeywell Database Size Management Although there is no fixed maximum size for a recorder database we recommend that they be limited to some practical limit rather than just letting it increase in size unchecked Large databases will impact the performance of your PC the larger the database the slower the per formance of your PC will be eventually the PC would stop as the hard drive is filled up An other concern should be the protection of your database and archiving of the data in the event of a hard drive failure Larger databases increase the time and effort required to back up the data and increase the risk of unintended data los
3. The Pen Scale lists pens which are available for a particular Analogue input The Pen Scale is linked to the scale information set up in the Pens tab The Pen Scale can be changed manually by entering top and bottom pen ranges Pen Scale is only available if a pen or pens use this analogue directly Eg if P1 A10 and P10 A10 are set up for P1 and P10 s math expressions respectively they will appear here and the user will be able to set up the pen scales from here as well as in the pen scales page The Pen scale title will change to Pen Scale Log when a Log scale has been specified The logarith mic values will be displayed in scientific notation eg 1 0E4 represents 10 to the power of 4 Note Logarithmic scales cannot be reversed so if the top value on the scale is less than the bottom value the limits will be switched Scale Mapping Diagram FIGURE 6 12 Gu e ae Scale Scale Pen Scale jaw P1s 1 TE sf 40 00 E 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 135 136 Honeywell If the type of analogue input is a Thermocouple use the Range drop down menu to select the type of Thermocouple and the unit of measurement Tick the box if up scale burn out is required The Refer ence Junction measures the temperature at a designated point Internal Automatic Uses the cold junction sensor in the recorder as a variable reference temperature External 0 xC Assumes the cold junction is held at 0 C to provid
4. 138 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Alternatively many Causes can be setup to have the same Effect Up to 32 separate Events can be setup with up to 20 Causes or Effects in each Event shown in Figure 6 16 FIGURE 6 16 Setup Window Minitrend V5 Name M Enabled Em7 MV Show wamings Check all events Analogues Cause Effect Into Aam lt 1 gt Clear Relay lt 1 gt Digital Inputs high lt 1 gt Logging lt Start gt Manual Mark On Chart Pens Retransmit Add Set Remove Add Set Remove Related Settings Marker Setup Counter Setup Email Setup example shown is fora Minitrend V5 configuration For listings of Events Cause and Effects see See Appendix D Events on page 291 For displaying Events on a graph see Graphing Events on page 223 Event Marker Setup Event Markers are messages posted onto the recorders screen when an Event occurs There are 20 event markers that can be customised each marker can have up to 80 characters with embedded parameter tags lt gt allowing real time recorder data to be inserted into the text The Event Marker is truncated to display only 40 characters on the graph the full 80 characters will be displayed in the message screen Select the marker number from the Message box 20 markers are available for use markers 10 to 20 are set up with pre defined control characters that can be edited and added to
5. X axis zooming Take the cursor to the bottom of the graph into the Time bar area for X axis zooming The cursor becomes a magnifying glass so a left click will zoom in increase size or right click will zoom out decrease size Another way of zooming in is to select a section of the scale by placing the cursor on the Time bar using the left mouse key holding and dragging to the left or right over the desired area Two vertical lines will appear to enable the user to select a portion of the graphed data Right click to cancel a zoom on the time bar For specific help click on any part of the graph and press the F1 key on your keyboard to display the related help files The Time bars below show zooming in increasing the scale in the X axis min From this 2006 Thu Mar 23 14 reading in minutes gt to this D 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 sec oe i 2006 Thu Mar 23 14 01 reading in seconds gt Point markers foe on Point markers show the actual logged data points along the trace and are dependent on the logging rate set e g if the logging rate is set to one per sec ond then the point markers on the graph will log data every second Point markers can be added to a graph by going to the Switches panel Figure 9 3 on page 216 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 219 Honeywell Pen Scales The pen scales can show the full scale as originally set eg 0 to 150 or can auto fit the data so far to show the
6. 2014 Honeywell International Inc
7. 62 Honeywell Credits tab Displays a list of available firmware options All options are shown as enabled for a new recorder setup When this set up is sent to the recorder only the firmware options enabled on the recorder will be active You cannot add or remove firmware credit options in TrendManager Software Suite When importing a setup from a recorder this screen will display the firmware credit options that are active in the recorder General Pens Groups Batch Credits Printer Error Alert i Options Credits _ Enabied_ Scripting 6 Y 3 Events 6 Y H Pens Fast Scan 5 Totals 4 Custom Sern 4 Y AMS2750 Process 5 A Maintenance 2 Printing 2 Y AMS2750 TUS 10 x Screens Batch 5 x Counters 3 Modbus Master 10 Y E Recording Remote View 3 Email 3 Y Pwd Net Sync 5 Y e Transfer Secure WSD 3 x Extra Pens 12 24 Hardware Lock 2 x Hardware Password CFR NA Y Total Credits 73 200 NA Reports Cancel Notes Password CFR ESS Extended Security System This will only appear in the list on the recorder if this feature is enabled in the recorder It cannot be enabled by the firmware credit system contact Honeywell for details Scripting Fast Scanning and Custom Screens are not available for the eZtrend Printer tab The Printer function is a firmware option that is selectable from the Factory menu in the record er The screens on the recorder that currently can be printed are all St
8. Aggregate FTP Multitrend SX6 FTP Imported DatatPen 11 FTP Multitrend SX6 FTP Imported DatatPen 95 Interpolative Used for retrieving interpolated values Average Average data over the resample interval Minimum Minimum value in the resample interval Maximum Maximum value in the resample interval 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 255 256 5 Clicking Read Processed will close the Read Processed Dialog All the aggregate values are dis played in right side view as shown below FIGURE 10 22 Aggregate Values 0 MatrikonOPC HDA Explorer lolx File Server Function View Help Honeywell HeitendViewHistonen eaa el TS Sal SLSR 4FTP Multitrend SX6 FTP Imported DatatPen 11 3FTP Multitrend SX64FTP Imported DatatPen 95 2011 01 12 14 49 07 000 2011 01 12 14 49 17 000 2011 01 12 14 49 27 000 2011 01 12 14 49 37 000 2011 01 12 14 49 47 000 2011 01 12 14 49 57 000 2011 01 12 14 50 07 000 2011 01 12 14 50 17 000 2011 01 12 14 50 27 000 2011 01 12 14 50 37 000 2011 01 12 14 50 47 000 2011 01 12 14 50 57 000 2011 01 12 14 51 07 000 2011 01 12 14 51 17 000 2011 01 12 14 51 27 000 2011 01 12 14 51 37 000 2011 01 12 14 51 47 000 2011 01 12 14 51 57 000 2011 01 12 14 52 07 000 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good
9. B Backlight Event Effect ooo cccccsccsscsscsscsssssessesseeseees 103 Barcodes fOr Batch u esccccsssssssssssesesssisesesesieseeee 143 Batch Event Causes lt 2 cssiccssitsiscSsidiscas avsassttvateinscdiecesseeerceee 98 Event Effect oooccccccc ccc cccsccsscsscsscsscssessessesseees 104 Batch button coeceeceeccccccccccccscssssssesessssssesssesessssssesseveees 50 Batch Event icons e 223 Batch Markers on the Recorder 143 Batch Mode ciiccecceececcceccssssesvsssessvsssessssssseseeseenes 43 167 Barcodes for Batch oeer 143 Event Markers oi cccccccccccccccsccsccsesssssssessssessseseseees 142 Markers on the Recorder o s 143 Batch Mode X Series veecececccsccesscscssssssseesesseseses 59 Batch Properties General X Series 59 Batch Properties Group X Series 61 Batch Report Tool a ctc carltadinerntirnncinine 313 Generate Report oes eseeseeeeeeeeeneeeees 315 Batch set Up Siete diet a eins 160 Batch Settings X Series cecccccccccsssessssecsseseees 119 Batch Viewer sssr 165 Batch Graphing viececssscsccssscssssssissssessessesnsneseee 226 Boolean Expressions Maths ccccsccccscee 270 Brightness Control sssrin 106 Browse a Recorder sssaaa 150 Button Bar seeceeernennenen n 49 C Cause and Effect X Series eccicccssssessssssssssees 293 Change Chart Speed Event Effects oo cccccsccsscsscsscsssssessessesseees 105 Chart Control Event BG CCt x cccsscsccsseseessnsseyocpoiyscevsdseeoieoseedeac
10. bes Md bus Slave ccvicccccvsssicccsectectectssteyscvesveceaconsseesnesacsee Setup Event Causes X Series Recorders Add New Device oie ececccccccescescescessesecsscsecsscssssstesees Alarm Digital IO Card Positions oo 54 Batch Properties General Batch Properties Group Batch Settings 0c 2 csscsceseicneiasatssesoersesousnescutdses Concurrent Batch Mode Extia PEDS reatie aee ee Hardware Setup Peer SeryiCeS ormieresi Ei e Recommended Card Positions oo cece SLU cscs cdvs lead E O E Alarm Digital IO ooon Alarms Setup oe Analogue In wee Analogue Out Batch Mode nananana Communications Credit Options Error Alert siccscssvsscsiecseas avian evrcaieenstaecsionse Eyen TP OCIS orre et sraa N Events Field LO nnan EA Tete plo eess aes FIP pomier Acs st civics A chi detrei eats Groups EMME APISALION 4 coscississavieexransiatistensnivsvaesciens LOB QING ccs svessessecedeivaciedssaiauy sav eassaaiesaciaensbidaces Maths for Pens PONS csan i ERER Pens SUMMATY sisisssroissssisiinssnin eresse Printer Pulse TN sisits coed tivistinaevaiiseteiai eek ieee RAV Scales SNTP DORR soniai a A E safest dah ta E Totals aiarar RERE Web preninte E Setup Window General eai e T ERG 58 X axis Zooming iiss 219 XYZ Y axis Zooming is 219 VAONA AN ssncridtossunyeiavecsientaiaincionisponscdien 219 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Sales and Service For application assistanc
11. e The server machine must have the same user account configured as the client machine that is currently trying to run the TrendServer Pro software The password for the user account must be the same on both machines 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 33 Honeywell Installation or Migration of TrendView Historian Prerequisites Ensure that TrendManager Suite is installed in your machine To Install Migrate TrendViewer Historian e Log in with Administrative privileges e Launch Setup exe The TrendView Historian InstallShield Wizard appears e Click Next and accept the terms of License Agreement of TrendManager Suite Software to proceed further e Click Next The Choose Destination Location window appears displaying informa tion about the default destination folder If you want to change the default destina tion folder click Browse to specify a different destination folder e Click Next The Edit Data window appears to enter the code and organization as sup plied with each specific version of software The code can be found inside the DVD case for TrendView Historian e Click Next The below User Account Information Window appears then follow the on screen instructions User Account Information Enter the Windows User Account details to use Historian TMS will use this windows user account to enable the communications across machines In case you want to use a Domain user account please enter as Domain name
12. ecssssesssssesssssssseesssssssesssssseseees 104 Media Life Calculations X Series 58 Memory maps and Function Codes 297 Migration of TrendManager Suite 0 0 0 20 Modbus Master Modbus Communications Modbus Function Codes X Series 298 Modbus Master Comms X Series 87 Modbus Memory Map rrssvccccssvsssessvvveeesvvvseeeee 297 Modbus Profile TOO cesses 44 301 302 Modbus RS485 ss 89 Modbus Slave X Series occccscsscssesssssesssssrsiessssien 89 326 Honeywell N Network Admin viccecccccccccscssssesssssseesessesssssseesessssesees Network Admin Comms Network Settings Comms Server w cceececcccccsccescescsssessescessesseseeseeseeess 197 O OPC Client Access to Trendview OPC Historian Server OPC Clients ss OPC Interface OPC Server sssri Output Card sssrini Output Card X Series P Passwords sscisscssiccssscsisssssscstiebssscstersisctvbdesestedisaessetis Change Password seses Password Access Table c0000 Password Control ccccccecsssseseeseeees Password User Manager PCMCIA Interface Card Peer Services X Series iecccccccccscssseseesseseees Peer to Peer o Peer to Peer Comms Pen Report Information Pen Report Information Pen Scales cecercccccecccccscesssesssecssessseesseeeses Arranging Scales siersssisiiisiissinersissiseaiieiesii Pen Setup AV ATI nenanem nnn FUZZY LOGGING cnco inrait TOS CIT peaini a ieia Maths for Pens
13. option in the Time adjustment settings All pens on the compared graph are arranged in STRIP mode The Golden Batch Comparison is shown at the bottom of the graph The Dev parameter on the graph provides the deviated value if source batch with respect to golden ref erence pen data at a given time The following list provides the current Graph functionalities that are restricted on comparison graph Drag and drop of pens from historical real time recorders Delete pens from the graph Move re size change pen scale limits zoom in zoom out of pen scales Add batch start and batch end events Upper Tolerance Z 120 00 120 00 i I j if 1 68 00 f 68 00 42 00 10 00 t 2 2 gt he 9 0 1 4 6 pe A 4 J 2014 Thu Sep 25 10 00 ji Left click Zoomin 3 i x i Right click Zoom out Pink Purple Green Pens fromthe selected Batch for comparison amp their deviated values Blue Golden reference Lower Tolerance Dotted Blue Positive and Negative deviations 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 175 176 Honeywell Generate Report A batch comparison report can be generated which includes information such as Pen values Golden Pen value Deviations and Graph NOTE The PDF report is limited to a finite size This sets a restriction on the batch report The report can be generated to a limited duration based on the number of pens configured and the log rat
14. 130 40 51196 Tometay 13 tes 5913067 Sameday 3a 2013 mi0 aeta ra F 914730 eTumetay z m1230 40 G14728 wToemtay s106 49 GLMGT aTummtay 2032 4 93 suma ez 2st GLATIE wToemtey 2021 4 02 sar 40 511106 eTonmtay No Alarm Messages available No System Messages available No Security Messages available User Messages From Tuesday November 22 2011 4 01 13 PN 000Tuesday November 22 2011 4 03 24 Pm 000 Tine Magesge 36 03 13 Start CEPI Revinwad Dy Checked By 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 321 Honeywell Massage Start logging on Pen Croup Cl User ID L Lot Number LNI Description Di Comma i End GHP1 Stopped Sample Batch data Graph Gated Start Date 11 22 11 1601 1 Baich Eni Date 11 22 11 16 00 24 100 90 80 70 Pen vale 60 50 40 t t t t t t t t t t t t 5 5 gt S S Ss Ss 8 S Time feat reat Pend Fena Penga Pou a Pou fort am Pend Pen 10 322 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Index Honeywell A Access OPC DA HDA Server ss 38 Add a folder sented ccc aeas et 154 Add a Remote Server eesecccsssssssssssssissssisssssiees 183 Add new Database dais iesinniireuseioiniedk 152 Add New Device sss 123 Add New Device X Series ccccssssescceescses 53 Add New Graph cin ctiinsiotisicisrsitin
15. 42 6 Select the profile and click on Next Specify the profiles for which this rule applies New Inbound Rule Profile Steps Rule Type Protocol and Ports Action Profile Name Honeywell When does this rule apply Domain Applies when a computer is connected to its corporate domain Private Applies when a computer is connected to a private network loc Public Applies when a computer is connected to a public network loci 7 Specify name and description for the port rule and click on Finish New Inbound Rule Profile Steps Rule Type Protocol and Ports Specify the profiles for which this rule applies When does this rule apply Domain Applies when a computer is connected to its corporate domair Private Applies when a computer is connected to a private network lo Public Applies when a computer is connected to a public network loc 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell 8 Make sure File and Printer sharing allowed Windows Firewall with Advanced Security File Action View Help e af E3 Inbound Rules E3 Outbound Rules By Connection Security Rules 5 Monitoring Name Grou File and Printer Sharing Echo Request ICMPv6 I File a File and Printer Sharing Echo Request ICMPv6 I File a File and Printer Sharing Echo Request ICMPv6 I File a File and Printer Sharing Echo Request ICMPv6 I Fi
16. 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Databases Add a Database Go to Database list in the Recorders slide out pane e Click on Add New Database in the recorders list and the Dialog box will appear e Enter name and description then click OK The same name may not be used on the same database server FIGURE 7 2 Add New Database Databases Recorders x manen Dprabase rl Databases Add New Recorder E 0666 Recorder 0001 Temp Profile 0001 Log test 0118 Events test Realtime 0109 Rogers Recor E 0000 Digital VO Te G 0016 Series Device Import Change the current Database e Go to the Database list in the Recorders slide out pane e Click on the desired database This will be the current database until another is selected 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 151 152 Honeywell Add an Archive Database e Click on Server button and select Archive Database Server from the list Go to the database list in the Recorders slide out pane e Click on the Add New Database a Browse for Folder Dialog appears e Provide the database path where Archive Database backed up database is located Make sure after backing up the database the folder name should be modified to a name different from tmp5db or TMP5DB And then click ok the database will get added to the databases Note to backup the database you need to use Database Management Tool Refer to Database Management
17. 9 009 9 009 G6 Set a SP et a SP Er n b Graph data E lA 30 000 00 000 pone Ba E ascoof 5 o0 Pte pei 40 000 B 5 o oas 5 20 000 Pen Data 16 15 009 amp 5_ 9 009 Source p Viewer k 4 P7 Set time 7 graph span o Batg Save ee graph q Trash can SaS Ds 52 HE 6 8 0 min f d 2006 Thu Mar 23 ii P06 Thu Mar 23 14 00 ordra M 2l drop Press A a 7 delete a Events Scale auto Arrange Traces Time amp date bar display display and select switches button For specific help click on any part of the graph and press the F1 key on your keyboard to display the related help files Pen type option is added to switches panel Check and UnCheck of PenType will show the pen type legend on the scale or not show the pen type legend on the scale 216 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Graphing different types of scale data Multitrend SX 821711 Pen 1 Historical FTP Multitrend SX 821711 Pen 1 Time Adjuste FIGURE 9 4 Realtime data Historical data Logged data scales and Time adjustment pen Realtime data is displayed as a scale with an orange strip down the left side of the scale realtime data comes directly over the comms connection via the comms server Realtime data scales will show a legend on pen scale i e RealTime Historic data scales are sky blue this is data that has been received via comms and stored in a database Historic data scales w
18. D leg of lamb onions If 56 S Tesco P4 Alm 1 Into Alarm 3486 lt Alarm 1 configured for Pen 4On gt rnd t lt C s Select All Copy To Clipboard Print Selection The Filter option when switched On will activate the Settings button Date Time will activate a drop down menu to select a time span Event Type will activate a drop down menu listing all types of Events Use the Filter option to display only the events that are required to avoid a long list of unnecessary information The Find buttons Up and Down are for use with the Find text entry box at the bottom of the window Enter text in the box and select to search Up or Down the list using the Next button The Find text entry box is for locating text that would have been entered as a Event Marker Enter the text you want to search for in the Find text entry box The search will start on the top line downwards Select whether to search Up or Down the list then press the Find button Click in any area on the screen and press F1 on the keyboard to display the related help files 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue29 December 2014 UK Batch Mode FIGURE 7 8 Batch Mode 4pen diff span rate 2 pen diff logg rate 2 pen diff units sine 2 pen all same sine 2 pen all same one pen diff unit 3 Find all x lt a Wed 24Sep 2014 18 24 01 Wed 24 Sep 2014 16 23 13 Wed 24 Sep 2014 18 04 54 Wed 24 Sep 2014 17 28 18 Wed 24 Sep 2014
19. NOTE Some Modbus masters may require an offset of 1 for example instead of entering 1800 enter 1801 Totalisers Totaliser values in engineering units 4 byte IEEE floats using 2 Modbus registers per reading Input Text message This facility allows a text message to be passed to the recorder to be annotated on the chart and added to the message log The maximum length of the message is 32 bytes of ASCII characters which need not be null terminated It operates by utilising modbus function code 16 0x10 Preset Multiple registers and the unique address 0x0004 in the modbus global register map Table A 1 The modbus message format follows that shown in section 3 7 of the document cited The Start Address will be 00 04 and the Byte Count of the number of bytes in the following text message As 2 modbus registers are used to pass an address to function 16 the Number of Addresses has to be back calculated from the required Byte Count to give the lowest integer such that Number of Addresses 2 Byte Count For example if Byte Count 4 then Number of Addresses 2 but if Byte Count 5 Number of Addresses 3 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 297 Honeywell Page numbers refer to document Modbus Serial Communications User manual 51 52 25 66Q April 2007 As an example to send the 5 character message Start to a slave address 02 the complete message would be Slave Function Start Start No No Byte A
20. iii verifying the results obtained from the use of the Licensed Software and iv taking appropriate measures to prevent loss of data Honeywell does not warrant that the quality or performance of the Licensed Software will meet Licensee s requirements or that Licensee will be able to achieve any particular results from use or modification of the Licensed Software or that the Licensed Software will operate free from error 9 2 Warranty Disclaimer EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY SET FORTH IN THIS SECTION 9 HONEYWELL AND ITS LICENSORS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS IMPLIED AND STATUTORY INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TITLE AND NON INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY HONEYWELL ITS DEALERS DISTRIBUTORS AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES SHALL IN ANY WAY INCREASE THE SCOPE OF THIS WARRANTY Some jurisdictions do not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or how long an implied warranty may last so the above limitations may not apply to Licensee This warranty gives Licensee specific legal rights and Licensee may have other rights that vary from juris diction to jurisdiction 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell 10 INFRINGEMENT INDEMNITY Honeywell will defend any suit against Licensee to the extent based on a claim that the Licensed Software as delivered by Honeywell infringes a valid United States patent
21. logon reveals the Audit Manager option The Administrator can specify which actions get logged to the Audit trail Audit Manager Tue Oct 03 09 43 48 0660 2006 Tue Oct 03 09 42 51 8260 2006 Tue Oct 03 03 42 27 3710 2006 Tue Oct 03 09 42 05 4470 2006 Tue Oct 03 03 42 04 2280 2006 Tue Oct 03 03 42 03 8060 2006 Tue Oct 03 09 42 02 5410 2006 Tue Oct 03 03 32 23 0970 2006 Tue Oct 03 09 31 31 1670 2006 Mon Sep 25 10 01 41 6470 2006 Mon Sep 25 10 00 45 3250 2006 Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default FIGURE 7 13 Audit Manager Audit Manager Recorder uploaded 160 221 36 108 FTP data imported Andy s 160 221 36 108 Recorder uploaded 255 1 134 249 Database changed Junes 2 Database changed June FTP Database changed Saved Data Database changed Andy FTP Recorder uploaded 255 1 134 249 Database changed Junes 2 Recorder printed Local Server Initial Database Henry Recorder printed Local Server Initial Database Henry Delete Log Print V Activity Logging Active Specify events to log The audit log file is currently taking up 0 7 K bytes of disk space The Audit manager provides an Audit trail from when a User logs on showing the time and date to what actions the user performs within the software including changes to e Graphing adding deleting copying printing moving exporting etc e Recorder setup hardware added or deleted
22. 2010 09 15 19 53 28 5 2010 09 15 20 35 58 5 2010 09 15 21 18 28 5 2010 09 15 22 00 58 5 2010 09 15 22 27 48 5 2010 09 15 22 27 58 5 2010 09 15 23 10 28 5 2010 09 15 23 49 08 5 2010 09 15 23 49 36 7 2010 09 15 23 56 46 7 2010 09 15 23 56 56 7 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Steps to read attribute Honeywell 1 Please follow the first 11 steps given in Retrieve Historical data to add items Pens 2 Right click on the pen name and select Read Attribute It will open Read Attribute Dialog FIGURE 10 16 Selecting Read Attribute MatrikonOPC HDA Explorer i File Server Function Yiew Help Hei TrendView Histoian O dega a SUPERS s SS IHFTPtMultitrend SX6 FTP mported DatafPen 11 tFTPtMuttitrend 4 E Localhost s Hci TrendVview Historian im ttFTPHMultitrend SX6 FTP Imported DatatPen 11 2 4 FTP Multitrend SX6tFTP Imported Data 2011 01 12 14 49 07 000 2011 01 12 14 49 17 000 2011 01 12 14 49 27 000 2011 01 12 14 49 37 000 2011 01 12 14 49 47 000 2011 01 12 14 49 57 000 2
23. 94 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Peer to Peer tab The Peer services communication function sets up the recorder so it can be recognised on a network containing X Series and GRrecorders This means that multiple recorders will be able to discover other recorders on the same local network in order to share data between them For example basic unit information such as firmware version recorder name and network identity This will be used mainly with the Trend Server software to allow discovery of recorders in order to transfer data via FTP or Mod bus Enabled tick to enable Set Number Default to set 1 this should not have to be changed unless a lot of record ers are being used on the same network Start Port Default port number 8955 End Port Default port number 8970 The port numbers have been specially selected for this type of network communications It is recommended that the ports are not changed unless specifically requested by your IT net work administrator If this is changed on the recorder it must also be changed on all other recorders TrendServer and Comms Server Events Counters See Counters on page 105 See Preset Markers on page 105 See Time Sync on page 106 Events tab Events is a firmware option that can be activated using the credit system in the recorder Events are certain conditions or operations which can be set up and logged according to the ti
24. GLBV1 A2 GLBV2 XOR Returns a true or false result from testing if one or other but not both tests are true e g IF A1 GLBV1 A2 GLBV2 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Functions for Scripts Scripting is not available on the eZtrend 43 TV 25 11 Scripts evaluate at whatever the Analogue sample rate is set to There is 500 character limit for scripting Table 13 13 Functions for Scripts Syntax Description Else else Steps into brackets to run Must always finish with a return else return y Elseif elseif x Carries out a conditional test and if true steps into brackets to run Must always finish with a return elseif x gt 4 return y First run FIRSTRUN Returns true if the script is being run for the first time otherwise returns false If if x Carries out a conditional test and if true steps into brackets to run If false steps to next test without operating the contents of the brackets Next step will be either elseif or else Must always finish with a return If x gt 5 return y Set Changed SETUPCHAN Returns true if the setup has been changed other GED wise returns false Time Changed TIMECHANG Returns true if the time has been changed other ED wise returns false GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 279 Full Maths Honeywell Full Maths functions provides a simple and intuitive method for t
25. Honeywell period is default set to 5 Minutes This is because user has not selected specific time and or log rate in the settings dialog Settings Button Whenever user click on Settings control from batch view following dialog will be shown Batch View for Initial Database BATCH 1 0000027 Mon 21 Nov 2011 11 29 05 Mon 21 Nov 2011 11 29 30 Batch 2 Mon 21 Nov 2011 11 28 32 Mon 21 Nov 2011 11 29 18 Batch 2 Mon 21 Nov 2011 11 22 03 Mon 21 Nov 2011 11 23 44 GRP1 Tue 22 Nov 2011 16 01 13 Tue 22 Nov 2011 16 03 24 TMS Batch Report Settings 11 19 21 06 Report Settings Sample period J rns Hrs Mins Secs Batch Start time 16 01 13 11 22 2011 Batch End time 16 03 24 11 22 2011 Batch Report Scale All Select All Copy To Clipboard Print Selection The batch report setting dialog mainly contains following settings 1 Sample period This is batch report sample period By default it is set to 5 Minutes User can set batch report sample period from 1 sec to 60 hours There is no co relation between Batch report sample period and individual pen sample period If some pens have sample period lesser or more than the batch sample period then data for the respective pen will get padded will appended before padded data 316 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell If user has selected faster log rate than the minimum allowed log rate application will pop up the following mess
26. It allows a specified percentage value of the full scale to be added on to the alarm level The Symmetrical option is only available for Honeywell V5 recorders This divides the hysteresis value equally on either side of the alarm If the Hysteresis value was 10 and the symmetrical option is enabled then the logged reading would trigger at 5 of the full scale value below the alarm level For the alarm condition to end the alarm would have to rise to over 5 of the full scale value above the alarm level Damping With this enabled an alarm level must be breached for a specific period of time before an alarm is trig gered Enable this function and enter a time limit here in hours minutes and seconds with a maximum time of 12 hours GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 133 Honeywell Analogue General tab Analogues Choose the Analogue button and then select an Analogue input number from the list eg Ana 1 In this tab click in the Enable box to activate and assign a label to identify the input Also under the Analogue General tab is a Damping setup which by default is set to disabled This will average the incoming signal over a specific period of time from 1 to 15 seconds thus creating a damping effect Enter the Time factor or width of the pulse to be rejected this can be set from 1 to 15 seconds Set the Transient Filter to ignore a specified type of pulse This is used to filter out any electrical inter ference from externa
27. Max Mins Reset Chart Control Clear All Mes sages Delayed Event Script Timers Play Sounds Display Alert Batch and Reports e Mark on Chart Is an effect if a pen goes into an alarm state a mark will be placed on a chart and will display for example Pen 2 Alm 1 Into Alarm 37 Select Marker Type as Preset to display a list of all available markers that have been previously added to the recorder To add Preset Markers go to Preset Markers on page 105 Select the Marker Type as User Defined to add pen information using Embedded Process Variable Embedded Process Values Adding Embedded Process Values in a Mark on Chart means you can display other informa tion such as pen information Toltalisers Digitals See full list in Table 6 6 on page 101 Table 6 4 Variable Description V Value T Tag Z Zero range S Span range U Unit Text time v Time in HH MM SS format 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Table 6 4 Variable Description date v Date in DD MM YY format td v Time and Date in HH MM SS and DD MM YY format name v recorder name id v recorder ID serial v serial number Table 6 5 Adding Embedded Process Values Text Entry Function Examples P1 V will embed the current Value of P1 lt lt 16 233 gt gt P1 T will embed the current Tag of P1 l
28. RPC RPC Endpoint Mapper Security Accounts Manager a Server Shell Hardware Detection sA Superfetch G System Event Notification Ser Task Scheduler TCP IP NetBIOS Helper 4 Themes bod TMS nmunications Service User Profile Service S VMware Tools Service Description Manages power poli Loads files to memor The RPCSS service is Resolves RPC interfa The startup of this se Supports file print a Provides notification Maintains and impro Monitors system eve Enables a user to con Provides support for Provides user experie This service is respon Provides support for Manages audio for i Manages audio devic In the above window you will see that Communications Service started For real time data logging the communication server uses a local machine date and time Make sure you have set the correct date time and time zone settings on this machine After completing post installation checks TrendServer Pro can be configured for data acquisition Please refer to Comms Server Logging on page 205 for Logging Configuration on page 206 Steps Please refer to Importing via FTP or Secure Communications Interface on page 157 for Schedule Setup on page 160 Steps 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell TrendManager Suite User Groups after Installation During TrendManager Suite installation it
29. Select a template from the list To set up templates for multiline text see Email tab on page 90 Screen Change or Backlight On Off Select Screen Change as an effect to change the screen when triggered by a cause Eg Pen 1 goes into Alarm and the screen changes from a chart to a DPM screen where Alarm markers are visible Or choose to have the Backlight select On or Off When the Event is triggered the effect is to turn the backlight to what state has been selected On or Off Print Screen As an Effect this will print the current process screen when triggered by a Cause Eg Cause Digital turns on Effect Print Screen To set up network printer infor mation see Network Admin tab on page 94 Counters Counters can be used as an Effect of an Event to count an occurence or to reset different types of counters A User Counter must be set up first before it can be used as a part of an Event See Counters on page 105 Enabled Tick to enable Event Type Counters Event Action Increment will add by whatever value is entered in Increment By Reset will restart the counter to whatever number is entered in Reset To ee Sub Type only available when Reset is selected as the Event Action Select to reset User Pulse Events Digital Inputs Relay Outputs or Alarm counters Selecting any of these Sub Types will activate the corresponding menu item s so you can then specify the number of the Sub Type
30. Shutdown Server About Versions Preferences Customize Select Shutdown Server and the following message box would pop up r Communications ServiceUI Shutdown of this server will terminate all communications to clients Realtime and OPC and any database logging Are you sure you want to shutdown Yes 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 211 Honeywell Select Yes and the following events will happen If the Communication Service UI is open with Non Admin privileges the following message will appear Select OK and the Communication Service UI will be closed but the TrendServer software will still be running ve 1 TMS Communications Service is not installed or Failed to open the N service If the Communication Service UI is open with Administrative privileges the following message will appear Select OK and the Communication Service UI will be closed and TrendServer software is also successfully stopped r Communications ServiceUI o TMS Communications Service successfully stopped Select No and no actions will be taken 212 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Chapter 9 Graphing in the TrendManager Suite Graphing The TrendManager Suite allows the user to prepare data imported from Honeywell recorders as a graph All the areas listed below are covered in the TrendManager Suite Help Cli
31. Time 1 00 1 10 1 20 1 30 1 40 1 50 2 00 2 10 2 20 2 30 2 40 2 50 3 00 fon eee HHH hhh hH rave t 4 HAH Example of a schedule interval event started at 17 minutes past the hour Figure 6 3 shows if a 10 minutes schedule is required to align with a whole hour and the con figuration is committed at 17 minutes past the recorder will wait until 20 past before starting the schedule interval As starting at 20 past with 10 minute increments will ensure alignment with a whole hour e Count Only available when Interval Specific Days or Month End are selected as a Sub Type This is how often you want this to occur The recorder will carry on with this sched ule for the amount entered in the count Eg If 24 is entered into the count the scheduled event will occur at the specified time for 24 hours A count of zero will carry on indefinitely Days of the Week Only available when Specific Days is selected as a Sub Type Select the days of the week when this scheduled event is to occur e Time of Day Only available when Specific Days is selected as a Sub Type Select the Time Of Day when this scheduled event is to occur When the Event cause is finished click on the Done button Now go to set up the Effect of the Event 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 99 100 Honeywell User Counters User Counters are quite simply counters that are set up by the user User Counters can be u
32. Trash Can button Drag items such as recorders pens or graphs over the Trash icon and let T go to delete Note there is no undo facility Trash Batch button The Batch button will open the Batch View window This will display the Oo Batch data for all the recorders in the currently selected database Batch Not available on TrendViewer System button The System button only present on TrendServer produces the System Control pane giving three options First is the Password click anywhere on the icon or the text This will generate the Password control message box Click on the Status icon or text to generate the System Status message box Select the E mail icon to produce the E mail settings window Server button e This is the central control area for the remote connections only available with TrendServer Click on this button to reveal the Server Slide out Servers pane This is a list of servers available click on Add New Server to gener ate the Add New Database Server message box Click on Database to pro duce the Server Database List This list displays the databases available on the current server After installation of TrendServer the server tab will dispaly both Local server and Archive Database Server by default Select Archive Database server and click on Data base to add a archive database 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Chapter 5 Help in the TrendManager Suite Help Files
33. W Week M Month nn is the pen number from 1 to 96 e g of some embedded variables PRPTOTLM1 v Total for last complete month for pen 1 PRPMAXCD23 v Max so far for current day for pen 23 PRPMATCD23 v Time max was recorded for current day for P23 PRPSTMCD23 v Start time of report for current day for pen 23 Recorder configuration complete When all setups are complete press OK a prompt to save will only appear if changes have been made in the setup window For Peer communications and Batch settings see Peer Services on page 119 and Batch Set tings on page 119 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 117 Honeywell Printing Setups Select the recorder button on the left and right click on the recorder containing the setup required to be printed Select the Print button and choose the setup required and press OK From the Select Print Option box select Print Setup To print an QOQ report see Appendix H QOQ Protocol Document on page 309 e Go through each tab and select the boxes required to produce a printout of the setup e Click Done when each tab is finished and Print when all tabs are completed General Communications Pens Analogue In Analogue Out Alarm Dig 10 Pulse_4 gt Print Options Hardware Credits Screen Printer Charts Recording Groups TimeSync Batch AMS2750 Print All Print Selection Clear All Done NB Full recorder configura
34. a specific period of time before an alarm is triggered Damping works going into alarm only e Damping Time Set the amount of Damping Time in seconds 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 85 Honeywell e Reflash Toggles On and Off Activate this to re enable an active alarm that has been acknowledged Set the Reflash Time e Reflash Time Only enabled when Reflash is active Set the time period after the alarm has been acknowledged for the alarm to reflash if it is still in an alarm state Up to 144 integral soft alarm set points are available for the eZtrend 192 for the Minitrend and 576 for the Multitrend and DR Graphic recorder 6 per pen RAV This will display the Rolling Average for this pen The recorder takes an average of the number of sam ples entered Enable the RAV function e Number of Samples For example a 1 hour rolling average made up of 1 minute averages it would be 60 seconds per sample with 60 samples and you can increase the time span accordingly so 1440 samples at 60 seconds per sample would give you a 24 hour rolling average made of 1 minute averages e Sample Interval or how often a reading is taken in seconds e Prefill works as follows if you setup a 60 sample rolling average a 10 second samples that will create a 10 minute rolling average with each sample being accumulated as an average from the current recorder processing rate 10Hz say so each 10 second sample is added to a
35. click Batch The Batch View for Initial Database window appears 2 Select a batch from the list and click Nominate The Nominate Golden Batch window appears Nominate Golden Batch Specify Golden Batch Details Golden Batch Name Golden Batch Description Golden Batch Options Select a Pen Pen 17 7 Average of all Pens Max Min of all Pens 3 Provide details for the following parameters e Golden Batch Name Enter a name for the batch e Golden Batch Description Enter the description e Golden Batch Options e Select a Pen Nominates a single batch as Golden Batch Average of all Pens Averages the values of the Pens associated with the selected batch Max Min of all Pens Considers the maximum and minimum value of all pens asso ciate with the selected batch 4 Click Save The Golden Graphs can be viewed on a different window See View the Golden Batch List on page 172 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 171 Honeywell View the Golden Batch List se this option to view the complete list of Golden Batches that are avail able in the selected database View all Golden Batches To view the Golden Batch list 1 Click View under Golden Batch The Batch List window appears This window provides the available Batches and allows you to perform the following tasks Golden Batch List oam seo s ouma p a ee h e a Batch Name Description Source Batch Star
36. e Importing data setups e System changes adding or deleting Databases or Servers e Adding deleting or copying Recorders and Folders e Setting changes E mail LogOn Off Passwords Events Log for Comms Status window Configure logging Adding Removing Comms Server Honeywell V5 recorders only In order to log User s actions the Activity Logging Active box should be checked The print button prints a document of all the currently loaded 100 or less actions Delete log will remove all of the Audit trail 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 187 Honeywell Specify which events to log The Specify events to log button produces the Audit settings page which enables the administrator to determine which actions to log Double click to reveal the contents of each heading click on each item to select or deselect Each ticked item will be logged to the Audit Manager FIGURE 7 14 Audit Settings Audit Settings Tick the items below to log to the audit file DD Folders Ey Recorders Databases J Servers HJ Disk Import Data N FTP Import Data HJ Disk Import Setup C FTP Settings Settings Communications 188 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Trend Server Pro with OPC Server 43 TV 25 11 The OPC Server option provides the same functions as TrendServer Pro but includes the added function of an integrated OPC Server to make it easier to interface third party HMI software packag
37. select the Change button This will allow the user to browse the network to locate the desired file Alternatively a setup or data can be imported by selecting From Network FTP See Importing via FTP or Secure Communi cations Interface on page 157 Auto graph the data is active by default this will automatically display the data that has been imported on to a graph Make a log file in the program directory The make log file in the program directory option is useful if a disk won t import properly due to corruption If used a file named log txt will be written to the program directory detailing exactly what was imported and when Any errors encountered will also be listed here The log file can be viewed using Notepad The final check adds further details to the log file Imported data from the same recorder over different periods of time will be detected and loaded into the same database the graph will display as a continuous trend FF Import Importing from TrendViewer This will produce the graph data dialog which will import only data from an external storage device GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 155 156 Honeywell Importing Data from other Honeywell devices The TrendManager Software Suite has a built in Data Conversion Tool that will accurately reproduce data from these supported Honeywell devices VRX recorder range e HC900 control systems e UMC800 control systems e DPR100 180 250 recorder range e
38. sssssessesseseseseessesesenn Scales en e AS 1e Ee E R a E O a P O E EAE Pen Setup X Series sss Alarms Setup LOGGING Giicsisa lalate an heats Maths for Pens oo ccecccececccessescesseecsssseescsseeseeseees Pen Summary Pens Summary X Series Play Sound Event Effect oo cccccccesssseeeseseneeeeseeneneeeeseseeeeees 104 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Point Markers n 219 Port Comms ceecccceccscescssescsscssesessectssvssssesessncesenssessseens 94 Port Comms seserinis 128 Post installation checks for using TrendServer PIO meee Post Trigger Time Set Preset Markers sisir Pre Trigger Acquiring 110 Alarm Rate ses Configuration oo eeeesenesesteseseseeseneenens Event processing cececesessseesesecesesececeeeseeeseseeeseeeeees EXPOrt oresiiciortn ss Graphed Data Importing ike Logging Type esses Overlapped Pens Post Trigger Time Pre Trigger Data Pre Trigger Time Set Restart sisccvssssssteatienesessrsecs Set Time Print Screen Ev nt Effect ceisis ssctsssctistorass ccousvenrscnseaea a 103 Printer Comms X Series vieccecccscsccccscsscssseseeeees 62 Printing Graphs sessioonis 235 Printing Setups sisri 118 147 Pulse In X Series coecceececcccccecssescsssssssessssssessessessseeses 68 R RAV X Series secissssccscsstesecseestisstesssssscbeavcsaceasincsctsviese 86 Realtime Chart Controls cccccccccccscccccscescesseeseeees
39. system where the log in password expires and requires you to change it periodi cally you will need to update the logon password in the recorders when you are forced to change your PC password e User Address Your Network Email Address or this could be a generic name used to identify the recorder No spaces e Recipients Enter up to 12 email addresses of the destination you want the email to be sent to e Templates These are user defined templates containing email text If you require stand ard text to be sent out in an email then set them up here and give it a template name These templates can be used with the events function to send an email as an effect of an occurrence See Events Counters on page 95 e Subject add a subject heading up to 50 characters this will appear as the heading for your email Message Body Default to Empty Email Click in here to open the Email text box Type into the message body text box up to 80 characters per line and up to 100 lines of text can be entered including Embedded Process Values This will include specific pen data to your email The template can be used as a part of the event function to email infor mation to a recipient using maybe using a Schedule also set up in the Events menu See Events Counters on page 95 SNTP tab Simple Network Time Protocol is a protocol for synchronising the clock on the recorder with a Net work Server Server Enable Tick to ena
40. twice To change the properties of an existing user select the user from the User Man ager and click on properties See Password UserName access table on page 186 administrator SSCS The User Templates allow access permissions to pre set commonly used configurations Select a template and click on Apply Use the Advanced access permission for set Password Re enter Password ting up a user to a specific profile not supported by I the templates Double click on an area to reveal the categories available for access Boxes will be User Template marked to show which categories can be Administrator Administrative Use v accessed for each particular template Tick any extra boxes as required Press OK when all cate Advanced access permissions gories have been selected and the users required password access is complete L Folders nA 3 Ed Recorders When the Administrator is logged off the password Databases system is in the Default state The Administrator J Servers and the Power User have access to the same areas apart from the Administrator can setup and manage the password accounts and has access to the Audit Manager The Administrator is the only one who can disable __ Cancel the password system User Properties Description If the password gets lost contact Honeywell for help Contact number and address is in the Help file under Contact information 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK
41. used for setting the Communications Service and processes to run under it To run Communications Service under a different account or on expiry of password use the Security Configuration Utility which is part of the TrendManager Suite installation For more details refer to the Security Configuration Utility on page 36 NOTE For TrendManager Pro only The user account entered in the above window is used for setting Database process to run under it To run the Database process under a different account or on account of expiry of password use the Security Configuration Utility which is a part of the TrendManager Suite installation For more details refer to the Security Configuration Utility on page 36 e Click Next The Start Copying Files window appears for reviewing the settings before starting the copy of files e Users should be part of TMSApplictaionAccessGroup to access TrendManager Suite The TMS Admin Console window will allow to add new users Click on the Add Users button to add new users Click on Skip to continue with installation 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 23 Honeywell TMS Admin Console Installation has detected an older configuration and data for existing TMS users and fequires user migration You need to backup existing configuration and data of each user To start click on Start Migration or click Continue to perform it later To access TMS users nee
42. x1 y1 Outside outside x y Z Returns x if outside of y amp z otherwise returns 0 Over over x y Returns x if it s larger than y otherwise returns 0 Under under x y Returns x if it s less than y otherwise returns 0 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Table 13 10 Timers Timers Syntax Description Tget tget x Returns the elapsed time of timer x since start Tpause tpause x Pauses the timer x Treset treset x Resets the timer x Trun trun x y Starts the timer x in y mode Mode 1 reset to 0 and run Mode 0 resume from previous value Timers must return a value All timer commands must have BLKV1 the variable e g BLKV1 tpause 1 Value returned is the same as tget 1 Timers count in seconds Maximum of 20 timers available Table 13 11 Accessors Syntax Description Ai Ai x Get the value of Analogue Input number x Alamct Almct x y Get the current alarm count for Pen x Alarm y the alarm number as identified in alarm mes sages Alamrt Almrt x y Get the current alarm number for Pen x Alarm y Alamsl Almcl x y Z Get the current alarm level set Pen x 1 96 Alarm y 1 6 New level to set z Eg P3 almsl 1 1 A3 will set Pen 1 alarm1 and shoe A3 pn P3 Alamst Almst x y Get the current alarm state for Pen x Alarm y I active 0 inactive Di Di x Get the state of Digital input nu
43. 1 Logarithm to base 10 LOG Function LOG Logarithmic value LOG10 of Input 1 Pi LOG A1 Operator U displayed on Pen 1 P1 A lI ithm LN i a Natural logarithmic value loge of Input 2 displayed on Pen 1 P1 LN A2 Low value Function Pen 1 displays whichever is the lowest LO LO value out of Input 1 and Input 3 Note the inputs being compared are separated by P1 LO A1 A3 a comma HI High sae E Pen 1 displays the highest value out of P HIIA1 A Input 1 and Input 3 1 1 3 Root Operator f ROOT The third root value of Input 1 displayed m B on Pen 1 P1 A1 3 Power Operator A POWER B The value of Input 2 to the power of 3 or P1 A253 B cubed displayed on Pen 1 7 Modulus The value of Input 2 A2 is divided by 20 MODULUS x and the remainder ONLY is displayed on P1 A2 20 Operator 70 B Pen 1 The signal will be within 0 19 If the analogue input A1 is greater than OVER Over 10 then P1 will return the value of A1 gt Returns 0 if less than 10 1 OVER A1 10 If the analogue input A1 is less than 10 UNDER Under P1 will return the value of A1 Returns 0 if greater than 10 P1 UN DER A1 1 0 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 265 Honeywell PE P1 will equal 1 when x stays within the INSIDE Inside range ranges of y and 2 P1 will return 0 if P1 IN
44. 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell 4 Click on Start Export it will calculate export volume and shows Export Report Window having information about CSV file properties and they are Number of Traces Approximate Number of Lines and Export Sample Period Export Report saa CSV File Properties Number of Traces Approximate Number of Lines Export Sample Period Secs 1 0 __ cancel 5 Click on Export button it will start exporting by showing export progress and time remaining approx to complete it a Export Data to Spreadsheet Export pen readings in Comma Separated Variable CSW format The File name will be in the format of Prefix csv where the user is asked for the prefix Event data shall be exported alongside the pen data Time D ate in normal format The data shall be exported using a user defined sample period This may produce large amounts of data Data selected for export is from Thursday January 05 2006 9 40 00 000 AM To Wednesday January 18 2006 12 40 00 000 AM Recorder Minitrend GR ID 0001 Serial Number 999103 Pen Pen 4 Units Recorder Minitrend GR ID 0001 Serial Number 999103 Pen Pen 3 Units Recorder Minitrend GR ID 0001 Serial Number 999103 Pen Pen 2 Units Recorder Minitrend GR ID 0001 Serial Number 999103 Pen Pen 1 Units NN NW cpr T r Export Progress 9 05 C
45. 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell e Multiple Pens This allows you to select which pens to run a report on including Totaliser pens e Pen Group Allows you to select which group of pens to run a report on All Pens This will run a report on all the currently enabled pens Group only available when Pen Group is selected for Selection Type Select the Pen Group you wish to run a report on from the available groups list To have groups of pens available in this list individual pens must be allocated to a group see Group in the Pens tab on page 58 Use Group to produce an AMS2750 summary report Current Pen Value Select whether to include the Current Pen Values of enabled pens in your report Averages Select this to include the Average values of each selected pen All pens or group of pens depending what has been chosen in the Selection Type option The report can give you the pen Average value for every Hour Day Week Month the Current average pen value or Do Not Include Average values Max Mins Select this to include the Maximum and Minimum values of each selected pen All pens or Group of pens depending what has been chosen in the Selection Type option The report can give you the pen Max Min value for every Hour Day Week Month the Current max min pen value or Do Not Include Max Min values Pens only available when either Curent Pen Value or Max Mins is set to Included Select which pens this rep
46. 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 29 Steps to create a new user File Action View Help Honeywell a Please go to Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Computer Management b Select Local Users and Groups c Right click on Users and Select New User Below New User dialog appears d Provide User Name and Password The new user will get created e 2G ha HA amp Computer Management Local a System Tools Q Task Scheduler Event Viewer a Shared Folders 4 amp Local Users and Groups Users H Groups Performance gay Device Manager Storage E Services and Applications Name Full Name Description New User User name Full name Description Password Confirm password J User must change password at next logon User cannot change password Password never expires Account is disabled g The Administrator Non Administrator users who are not part of TMSServiceAccess Group or TMSApplicationAccessGroup will be able to use the TrendManager Suite application if they are already configured with required settings like Windows privileges folder access permissions and DCOM access permissions similar to the configured set tings during TrendManager Suite application installation h During uninstallation the TMSServiceAccessGroup and TMSApplicationAccess Group are not deleted 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Troubleshooting
47. 259 Appendix A Maths Expressions for Honeywell V5 recorders 43 TV 25 11 GLO 263 Operator Precedente ssssscsssrssrsersersecsecsecsessesssssescescessessesseseesscssessessessessessessessensens 268 CONSTANES ansees E Tan EEEE E E AEE EE EEE EE E 270 Boolean EXPreSSi nS 2 ccccvescxeseccscssescies risisti ad EEEE ENE 270 Maths and Fail Safe Issue 29 December 2014 UK vii Honeywell Appendix B Maths Expressions for X amp GR Series Recorders Full Maths amp Script Processing ccsscsssssscssscsecsscsssscssessessesssessesssonseessees Maths Variable and Function Tables PULL Maths Asra eitn E A A actus tacstosse cuaded RE Script Function Application Examples Maths Error Messa g s s sesei E a a eaea aS Appendix C Fuzzy Logging 287 Appendix D Events 291 Ca s and Effect rinnan niei bese i e n i iia 291 Cause and Effect X and GR Series ssssssssssssessssscsesessessesssscecssssseessssessesessssssseseaes 293 Appendix E Ethernet amp E mail 295 Ethernet s ccrscssrssssrsesersesersessrsecsrsecssscssrsessssecsnsccsssesersesensesessesensesensesessesenees 295 E Mail E E E N O A A A E E 296 General operation of the e mail system sssssessssssesessessssessescsecessessscsssesssssesesessssens 296 Appendix F Function Codes and Memory Maps 297 X amp GR Series Modbus Memory Map Supplement ssscssosssssssessnereee 297 TOUAUISCTS piere on E EE ves dese AE tests soasnsozecsreetaa eaten
48. 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Table 13 8 Maths Function Table Maths Functions Syntax Description Floating point Absolute fabs x Returns the Floating Point Absolute value of x Floor floor x Round down x to the nearest whole number Get Screen Number GETS x returns the current screen number where x in the screen number this can be used to detect what screen is being displayed Global Alarm Status ATOTt x ATOT O will return the total number of alarms that are currently enabled in the recorder ATOTT 1 will return the total number of alarms in Alarm state in the recorder E g P1 ATOT 1 ATOT 0 100 would set P1 to give alarm state percentage for the recorder Ln In x Returns the Natural Log of x Log log x Returns the Base 10 Log of x Modulus X Y Returns the value of x with a modulus of y Multiply Returns the result of the multiplication Power pow x y Returns the value of x raised to the power y Can also be represented by Power x y Returns the value of x raised to the power y Reciprocal recip x Returns the reciprocal of x i e 1 x Root root x y Returns the y root of x Round round x Rounds x to the nearest whole number Set clear a digital output SETD x y This feature allows a digital output to be set or cleared from a script using the function SETD x y where x is the digital output 1 to 49 where 49 is the power relay and y is
49. 302 Report Generation Tool This is a separate software package it is not part of TrendManager Suite and uses its own install process and codes PC software that uses a TUS data file generated by either Multitrend SX or MultiTrend GR and DR Graphicrecorders to generate a temperature uniformity survey report It pro duces a report that documents the uniformity performance of a furnace based on the AMS2750 specification Trendview Historian PC software that extracts data from TrendManager Suite databases and communicates with various OPC HDA Clients e g Matrikon to analyze the Historical data of recorder A separate unlock code is required to activate this software TrendManager Suite installation is mandatory when using Trendview Historian Start Up The TrendManager Suite has been installed on the Hard drive of your computer in pro gram files unless during set up you have changed the destination folder To re start the software click on Start go to Programs and select TrendManager Suite then select either TrendServer Pro TrendManager Pro or TrendViewer according to which type of software option has been purchased A shortcut for your desktop is automati cally created Comms Server Start up The Comms server can only be opened using Start Menu of your PC follow the path shown in Comms Server Start up on page 193 Select Communications Server then once opened it will appear as an icon in the system task
50. 4 04 and fail safe is On with no alarm triggered the relay will be energised and P1 will return 1 P1 04 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Appendix B Maths Expressions for X amp GR Series Recorders Full Maths amp Script Processing The X Series and GR recorders are supplied with Basic Maths functions Add Sub tract Divide and Multiply There are two further options that can be added Full Maths and an extremely powerful Scripting processing module Scripting delivers an additional level of enhanced capabilities with multi line script processing Full and Scripting Maths must be activated in the recorder as a Firmware credit option Scripting is not available on the eZtrend When a recorder setup is loaded into the TrendManager software the Maths capabilities will be transferred with the setup If you are creating a new recorder in TrendManager software to be transferred to a recorder the Maths capabilities will be available but will only become active if the recorder has the same Maths functions enabled This document provides the Maths Variable and Function table and examples of the capa bilities from the simple to the complex to assist the user in understanding the concepts and potential of these features Important Note Full Maths and Script functions are Options and must be enable using the Credit System Be sure to enable these options or they will not be available See Credits tab o
51. 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Batch Start time 16 01 13 11 22 2011 Batch End time 16 03 24 11 22 2011 Batch Report Scale Original Min Max Custom New Span 50 Note The Batch report utility will work only with administrator access users 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 319 320 Sample Batch Report Below is a sample batch report Batch Status Additional Comment Pen Overview Date is in MM D0 T Batch Report trend SX 8 Honeywell Ba ch Report Sample 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell 49 9146738 493 924738 Pan 1 Pan 4 Dan amp Ran Den 7 35 000000 5 49 914738 49 911396 49 913067 49 914738 Pan 9 49 914738 Pan 1 Pen Den 5 Pen Pen 7 Pen G 35 00000 x 49 914738 49 9113 49 913067 49 914738 49 913067 Pan 9 49 914738 Pan 1 Pan 4 Pon 5 Pon Pon 7 Pan A 35 000000 gt 49 914730 49 911196 49 913067 49 914736 49 913067 Pan 9 49 914738 Pan 1 Pan 2 Pan Pan Pen 7 Pan a 35 000000 45 000000 el 49 914738 le 49 923067 49 914736 49 913067 Pan 9 Pan 10 49 914738 49 914718 Pan 1 Pan 2 Pun 4 Pan fen 7 Pan a 35 000000 45 000000 coD0c0 49 914738 49 913067 49 914738 493 313067 Dan 9 Pan 10 49 914738 49 914738 Pan 1 Pan 2 i Pan 4 n Pon Pen 7 Pen G 35 000900 45 000000 000000 49 914736 43 913067 49 914736 49 913067 Pan 9 Pan 10 49 914738 43 921396
52. 55 Serial No Screens 100089 z Recording m Media Life Calculations These values are based on the current devices pen logging setup cone Fuzzy logging is considered to be half the logging rate of a continuous pen at the same logging rate Hardware Select memory save x Approximate time to fill 64MB 5 days 14hours 27 mins 40 secs Reports me B aE 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 57 Honeywell General button The General button contains the following tabs e General tab Check and edit the recorder information here Name Description ID and Serial Number The Media Life Calculations will work out the amount of time it will take to fill the USB key Compact Flash or SD card in the recorder Select the size of the card and calculations will be based on the current set up eg how many pens are logging e Pens Displays information for each pen available in the recorder Including which pens are enabled logging type rate method and units of measure e Groups Displays groups of pens that can be renamed here e Batch Enable the batch information that is required before running a batch e Credits Displays all the Firmware options available in the recorder s credit system e Printer This tab is used to set up the printer configuration e Error Alert Setup and customise the Alert box information Pens tab Displays the details of each available pen on the recorder From le
53. 7 Analogue Input 1 subtracted from Analogue 2 displayed on Pen 1 P1 A2 A1 A Negate Operator U The sign of the value Analogue Input 1is E reversed A reading of 6 would be P1 A1 displayed as 6 and vice versa a The value of Analogue Input 2 multiplied P1 A2 by two Divide Operator B Analogue Input 1 divided by Analogue l P1 A1 A3 Input 3 Square Root zi Function SQRT Pen 1 displaying the square root of P1 SQRT A3 A4 SQRT o or perator U Input 3 added to Input 4 p A3 A 1 A3 A4 Square Function SQ P1 A sa Operator U The oe sh pi oo and SQ 3 isplayed on Pen P1 A3 Round Function The value of Analogue Input 2 divided ROUND ROUND by four and rounded to the nearest whole P1 ROUNDJ A2 4 number Reciprocal Operator The reciprocal of the value of Analogue RECIPROCAL U Input 2 is displayed on Pen 1 An P1 m A2 alternative way of writing this expression i would be 1 A2 264 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Absolute Function The result of Input 4 subtracted from Input 1 is always considered as positive P1 ABS A1 A4 A ABS Operator amp U If A1 2 and A4 3 5 the value or displayed on Pen 1 would be 1 5 not 1 5 P1 amp A1 A4 Pen 1 displays the Total of Pen 2 divided Assigns the Totalised by 10 T value of a Pen NB Do not omit the divider 10 P1 T 2 10 even if it is
54. Action Mark Chart Hot Buttons x4 Batch Start Stop an Pause chart controls TUS Start Stop a Temperature Uniformity Survey AMS2750 Timer Set TC Timers or Alert Timers as a warning or when expired When selecting Totalisers and Alarms etc ensure they are enabled and configured in the Pens tab Table 17 Effect X and GR Series Recorders Method Description Mark On Chart Cause a mark on chart Logging Start Control logging starts Logging Stop Start Totaliser Control logging stops Start totaliser Stop Totaliser Stop totaliser Reset Totaliser Reset totaliser back to min value or 0 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 293 294 Honeywell Table 17 Effect X and GR Series Recorders Method Reset and Start Totaliser Description Reset totaliser back to min value or 0 and Starts the Totaliser Digital Outputs Activate a Digital Output On or Off Alarm Acknowledge Acknowledges an Alarm single or pen group Email Sends an Email to recipients Screen Change Change the recorders screen or turn backlight On Off Available in the recorder only Print Screen Prints current process screen Counters Count an event occurance Incl User Pulse Events Digital Inputs Pulse Outputs Alarms Max Mins Reset Reset all Max Min values Multiple All or Pen groups Chart Control Pause Stop Resume Clear
55. Alarm or Out Alarm are selected as a Cause the alarm selection dialog box will appear display ing all the available alarms 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 137 Honeywell If an Event is selected to be an Effect the Select events to trigger box will appear In Figure 6 14 Event 2 has been selected with a delay time of 240 seconds as an Effect of Event 1 FIGURE 6 14 E Select events to trigger Enter a delay time for the event triggering 240 Seconds Select from the list on the left which events to trigger Available Events Events to trigger A Event 3 A Event 2 A Event 4 A Event5 A Event6 Add All Remove All Cancel example shown is fora Minitrend V5 configuration Event 2 does not require a Cause to be set as it will be forced to activate from being an Effect of Event 1 See Figure 6 13 on page 137 Event 2 has been set up to Stop Logging after a time period of 240 seconds and Mark the chart General Name Enabled End Batch M Show wamings Check all events Cause Effect Logging lt Stop gt 1 Mark Chart lt Marker 11 gt Retransmit a3 Digitals Transfer Hardware Related Settings Marker Set Counter Set Email Set ena larker Setup unter Setup ail Setup FIGURE 6 15 example shown is for a Minitrend V5 configuration NB Use the Check all events box to verify the setup will work correctly A warning message may appear to check the entries are correct
56. Con figuration Wizard 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 123 124 Honeywell Slot C is for the Communications card choose either Ethernet RS485 Trendbus or RS232 The associated comms box will show further options for the type on communication selected Slot D is for the alarm card this is an option card so check to see if this is included in your recorder If so select Alarm and remember to set the number of channels in the associated box VPens or Virtual pens are available with each type of recorder These virtual pens are used mainly for displaying maths functions and the totaliser A virtual pen can also be setup as an identical copy of a pen if the data from one pen is required to be written to two drives Only one pen can write to one drive Additional pens can be purchased upon request Finally confirm if your recorder has a PC Card fitted PCMCIA see PCMCIA Interface Card on page 124 PCMCIA Interface Card Minitrend V5 This is a memory card interface or hard drive purchased as an option It can be any size from an 8 MByte flash card to a 1 GByte hard drive This picture shows the Minitrend V5 with a PC card fitted in the bottom slot below the disk drive If there is no card fitted there will be a blanking plate fitted over the slot FIGURE 6 5 PCMCIA card slot PC card 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 43 TV 25 11 Honeywell Hardware Configuration Wizard for the Multitrend Pl
57. Ethernet port 9 0 0 9 ws HTTP FIP setup MeiServer 7 Enatie IP Address This is to distinguish between the various devices connected to the internet when commu nicating using TCP IP The address is a 32 bit value normally displayed with four numbers separated by a full stop or period e g 195 26 34 186 See your IT systems administrator for setting up IP addresses Subnet Mask This acts like a filter when identifying an IP address Specify the Mask that is used to determine the network address form the IP address default is 255 255 255 0 Set this value according to the system or network to which the recorder or PC belongs Default Gateway The Default Gateway is a configuration parameter transmitted to each network device Set the value according to the system or network to which the recorder or PC belongs Mail Server The Mail Server can only be selected if the E mail option is available on the recorder Enter the IP Address of the device to which the mail is to be sent see See Event Email setup on page 145 and Email tab on page 90 IP Resolution Uses different types of protocol to translate the IP Address default is FIXED Realtime The drop down menu lists the protocol options for the retrieval of data via the Ethernet con nection Choose either None Trendbus Modbus TCP IP Modbus X Modbus X differs from the stan dard Modbus only by the 4 byte floating point order being reversed for application compati
58. Event e All other Batch Control Events can be used in Add User Event Use C to add ina Comment I for User ID D to add in a Description etc e The Events will show in the Event bar with their corresponding icon To save the graph close it click yes to save and rename if you wish To create a separate batch graph from this right click on the recorder the graph was cre ated from in the recorders list and select the batch button from the tool bar Or you can select the Batch button from the main tool bar for all the recorders Find your batch in the list and double click or drag the batch onto the graph area Addi tional batch information can be added at this stage by right clicking in the Event bar To view the event information for this batch graph select the batch required in the Batch tab and select the Show Hide Events Creating a batch from old data by right clicking in the Events bar Event Batch iew Events Batch E old Data New Batch E oo1 mooz moos E o04 E oos moo E007 moos moog E o10 mo Tal DD CAET ELEA A ER SOE EA FOET SA OET A SLE A DAE BELDA UD SE Pa Pey RPS RL T un P RLS eet AR I Thu 03 Mar 2005 06 06 40 6 24 hu Mar 03 06 00 amp Thu 03 Mar 2005 06 07 57 amp Thu 03 Mar 2005 06 11 54 Hl Thu 03 Mar 2005 06 15 45 OD Thu 03 Mar 2005 06 17 55 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Name Start Time End T
59. Indemnity section for any suit against Honeywell based upon a claim of infringement resulting from a b c d e or f above In the event that the Licensed Software is held in any such suit to infringe such a right and its use is enjoined or if in the opinion of Honeywell the Licensed Software is likely to become the subject of such a claim Honeywell at its own election and expense will either i procure for Licensee the right to con tinue using the Licensed Software or ii modify or replace the Licensed Software so that it becomes non infringing while giving substantially equivalent performance In the event that i or ii above are not in Honeywell s sole determination obtainable using reasonable commer cial efforts then Honeywell may terminate this Agreement and refund the amount Licensee paid Honeywell under this Agreement for the Licensed Software which is the subject of such claim less a reasonable charge for Licensee s past beneficial use based on depreciation of the Licensed Software on a straight line basis over a period of five 5 years from the Effective Date THIS SECTION STATES LICENSEE S SOLE RECOURSE AND EXCLUSIVE REM EDY AND HONEYWELL S ENTIRE LIABILITY FOR ANY CLAIM OF INFRINGEMENT 11 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY HONEYWELL AND ITS LICENSORS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL SPECIAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTIT
60. Pan 1 2 Pan 4 Fan Pan 7 Pan G 35 000000 5 49 914730 49 923067 49 914738 49 913067 Pan 9 Fan 10 49 014738 49 924738 Pan 1 Pan 2 Pan amp Pan Pon 7 Pen 6 35 000000 43 000000 0 c 49 914738 49 913067 49 914736 49 913067 Pan 9 Pan 10 49 914735 49 94736 Pan 1 Pen 2 Dan 4 bs Pan Pon 7 35 000000 45 000000 000000 49 914738 49 913067 49 914738 Pan 9 Fan 10 49 914738 49 94738 Pan 1 Ran 2 i Pan 4 5 Pea 7 Pan a 35 000000 45 000000 000000 49 914738 49 911395 A 49 914736 49 913067 Pan 9 Pan 10 49 914738 49 924738 Pan 1 Pan 2 Pun 4 Pan 5 Pan Pen 7 Pan 35 000000 45 000000 tea lt 49 914738 49 911396 49 913067 49 914738 49 913067 Pon 9 49 914738 Pan 1 Pun 4 Pan Pen 7 Pen a 35 000000 gt 49 914738 49 913067 49 914738 49 913067 Pan 9 49 914738 Pan 4 Pan Pen 7 Pan G 000000 49 914738 of 49 923067 49 914736 49 913067 43 921396 Fan 2 i ten 4 Don amp Pan den 7 Peo 35 000000 45 000000 000000 49 914730 49 611396 49 913067 49 914738 45 913067 Pan 9 Pan 10 49 914738 49 924738 System Max Mins Information Pen Maz iz Pen 25 001000 eTumettzy Soweaber 22 2913 4 02 13 71 190 26 000000 eTesetay Sowwnber 22 102 13 m0100 45 000000 eTumettsy Bevesbar 22 2011 4 01 13 9N 190 46 000100 eTusatsy Sirrmmber 22 02 13 10 200 304 000000 eTunecsy Merewnber 22 2021 4 01 13 e192 104 002000 Paneday Soventer 22 4 m 190 43 014730 Tunetay 22 2011 4 01 23 a280 m 3 7 m te S110 dunedsy ETET
61. Phoenix AZ 85027 5139 Honeywell and Licensee The right to use the Licensed Software is granted only on the condition that Licensee agrees to the following terms IF LICENSEE DOES NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT THEN HONEYWELL AND ITS LICENSORS ARE UNWILLING TO LICENSE THE LICENSED SOFTWARE TO LICENSEE IN WHICH CASE LICENSEE MAY RETURN THE PACKAGE WITHIN THIRTY 30 DAYS AFTER SHIPMENT TO THE ENTITY FROM WHICH THE LICENSE WAS PURCHASED AND THE AMOUNT LICENSEE PAID FOR THE LICENSED SOFTWARE WILL BE REFUNDED 1 DEFINITIONS 1 1 Authorized User means an individual Licensee employee or independent contractor authorized by Licensee to access and use the Software provided by Honeywell subject to the terms of this Agreement 1 2 Confidential Information means i the Licensed Software ii the technology ideas know how documentation processes algorithms and trade secrets embodied in the Licensed Software iii any software keys related to the Software and iv any other infor mation whether disclosed orally or in written or magnetic media that is identified if oral or marked if written as confidential proprietary or with a similar designation at the time of such disclosure Confidential Information shall not include any information that is a pub lished or otherwise available to the public other than by breach of this Agreement by Licen see b rightfully received by Licensee from a third par
62. Pro It is present in the TrendManager Suite installation folder i e for Honeywell variant itis located at C Program Files TrendManager Suite TMSSecurityCfg exe Before launching Security Configuration Utility follow the below instructions 1 Ensure that you have Administrative privileges 2 Ensure that TrendManager Suite application is not running and also services are stopped To shut down the services please refer to Shutdown Server 3 Check for the VirtualStore folder for the given user and take back up of it For more details refer to the virtualstorebackup 4 Check for user account under which Communications Service is running It can be done by going to Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Services and will see below screen where you can see the user account under Log On As 2 Services File Action View Help 9 HlG ais Bm gt au mp Gy Services Local a e TMS Communications Service Name Description Statu AR G Power Manages power poli Starte 2a ae Service A Print Spooler Loads files to memor Starte S Remote Procedure Call RPC The RPCSS service is Starte Gh RPC Endpoint Mapper Resolves RPC interfa Starte S Security Accounts Manager The startup of this se Starte G Server Supports file print a Starte 4 Shell Hardware Detection Provides notification Starte SA Superfetch Maintains and impro Starte G System Event Notification Ser Monitors sy
63. Register type Input Registers Input Registers Number of channel groups Channel group number Group First channels register address Number of channels in group Channel number Channel Channel s register address Channel name Color Scale type 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Getting started The Modbus Profile Tool can be used to edit existing Modbus profiles or create new Modbus profiles It can also be used to export Modbus profiles from one system so that they can be imported into another system It is generally aimed at enabling the setup of Modbus communications with non Honeywell devices that support floating point input registers in their Modbus memory map It can also be used to adjust any of the standard Honeywell Modbus Profiles The three main courses of action available are 1 Create a new profile If there is no recorder setup available in TrendManager Software Suite then the Modbus profile will have no content and a new one must be created 2 Modify an existing profile If a recorder setup already exists in the TrendManager Soft ware Suite it will automatically create a Modbus profile that will be available using this tool If this is the case go to Use an Existing Modbus Profile on page 307 3 Import export an existing profile that can be transferred between systems See Transferring Modbus profiles between systems on page 308 Create a new Modbus profi
64. Series recorders And from SD Card and USB key on the GR Series recorders TrendManager Pro A stand alone package which allows the user to fully configure recorders as well as archive graph print and export data Total recorder control and simulation within an integrated secure data base TrendServer Pro A fully network aware package which allows data viewing archiving and communication with other recorders The number of recorders that can be networked for communica tions is limited by the specification of the PC that is acquiring the data and the capabili ties of the network itself All software in the TrendManager Suite has a comprehensive on line help system with context sensitive help built in Just hit the F1 key to call up the specific help file rel evant to where you are in the software application Recorder types X Series recorders include eZtrend QXe Minitrend QX and Multitrend SX recorders GR Series of recorders consist of the eZtrend GR Minitrend GR Multi trend GR and DR Graphic recorders 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 3 Honeywell Database Management Tool Data archive tools are included as standard as well as the ability to E mail graph print and export data Database Management Tool software is available as a separate soft ware application that comes with TrendServer software Communication Service The TrendServer Pro software has an integral Communications Server that manages the c
65. Tool on page 4 for further details A X mark in the Databases pane indicates that there are no databases assed to the Archive Database Server Servers x Databases lt Add New Database ARREA There are no databases Ald New Server to show in this view Browse for Folder gt Pick a Directory do copy 4 o Databases ab tmp5db a js tmp5db1 DaATOOO1 DaTOO02 _ DATOOO3 d Ddrive pp DRV di Email FILES Modifying Recorder setup Database choice dialog box appears when importing from a recorder or saving an edited setup If an existing recorder has been found in the database which has the same ID number and a different serial number or the same serial number and a different ID number the user will be asked whether to save into this recorder s database area or to make a new device If there are many similar recorders the user is asked to create a new one or select a destination from a list All the areas listed below are covered in the TrendManager Software Suite Help Click in any area on the screen and press F1 on the keyboard to display the related help files 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Server access table Honeywell Server access Server access Servers Databases Recorders Pens pen 1 2 o rec 1 Ren Initial pen 3 Database pen 4 rec 2 perl pen 2 rec 1 pens pen6 TrendManager Loca
66. TrendManager Suite This Help system has been created in a generic format for use with various applications Take a moment to look at the first page few pages of the help system to identify which type of software and recorder you have Help in TrendManager Suite can be used in various ways The help button takes you to the TrendManager Suite Help Index This consists of Help e How to do things e Parts of the program e Technical papers Place the cursor over the desired heading TrendManager Suite changes the appear ance of the cursor to a finger pointing hand Click on any of these headings in the help menu to activate the list Context sensitive help files The method of entry through using the Help button will access the general help file For specific help relating to a particular feature of the software application click in the area on the screen and press F1 on the keyboard How to do things This section is divided into two categories General Things and Graphing Things Select the desired help option by passing the cursor over the top it will turn into a hand Click on the required option to reveal detailed instruction on your chosen task Follow the instructions shown and press X in the top right corner to close Parts of the program Click on this to reveal the Application Areas split into the following categories Button Bar Message Boxes Graphing and General Place the cursor over the help topic desired and
67. UDC Controller Range 10260 and 11280 Actuators e DR4300 DR4500 Truline UDC DPR100 Actuators communicate in modbus only and cannot give data for import The data is imported from the device media using the TrendManager Pro Software Suite Import function into the database Select the Import button from the main tool bar and the External import box will appear as normal Select the data option and select From Directory as the source location Use the Change button to browse your PC or network to locate the data When the correct location has been selected press the Yes button to import The User Acknowledgement box will appear to proceed this must be acknowledged Select to import data to a New or Existing device For an Existing device the Importing Controller box will display the existing devices in the TMP data bases Select the device you wish to import the data to and click on Next This will start the data import ing If the data is for a New device a list of device types will appear select one and go to Next Enter a device name and description and click on OK Next choose the format type for the importing data The two different formats are X Series GR Series recommended This has the benefit of flexible pen scale lim its that can be changed at any time in the X Series release of TrendServer Data imported in this format cannot be loaded into a version 5 release of TrendServer Version 5 Pen scale limits will be
68. User name User Account Information Domain Name User Name WIN7ENTRITSTMSUser Password Note The password must comply with the local security password policy The user name and password should be same on all machines when prompted by the installation Cancel lt is preferred to use the same user account that TrendManager Suite application is running 34 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Check the User account where Communications Service is running It can be found by going to Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Services and will see below screen where 43 TV 25 11 GLO you can see the user account under Log On As I Services File Action View Help e9 HlGcsS aml gt auw G Services Local To run TrendView Historian under a different account or on account of expiry of a pass word use Security Configuration Utility which is a part of the TrendManager Suite instal O TMS Communications Service Name Description Status Gir Gi Power Manages power poli Started 75 aa ee Print Spooler Loads files to memor Started S Remote Procedure Call RPC TheRPCSSserviceis Started Sh RPC Endpoint Mapper Resolves RPC interfa Started Gh Security Accounts Manager The startup of this se Started Gh Server Supports file print a Started G Shell Hardware Detection Provides notification Started Sh Superfetch Maintains and impro Started G System Event Not
69. Workspace Profile Details Profile Name Henry 2 XX ID 1 Profile name Henry 2 XX ID 1 Description Device XXX Input Registers S Group 1 16 Channels starting address 5 i 3 MODBUS register address Hogaria kont neges w NumberOfChannels S Channel 1 Pen 1 Temp 0 000000 Channel Name Number of channel groups Pen 1 Temp Zero Channel group number 0 000000 Group 1 of 2 amp Span Re 90 000000 First channels register address Profile description Device XXX Input Registers B Unit Number of channels in group Color 255 5 Scale Type Linear Channel 2 Pen 2 0 000000 50 000 Channel t of 16 in Group Channel 3 Pen 3 3 6 Log Channel s register address 6337 Channel 4 Pen 4 0 000000 100 00 Channel 5 Pen 5 0 000000 50 000 Channel name Pen 1 Temp Channel 6 Pen 6 0 000000 200 00 Channel 7 Pen 7 0 000000 100 00 Zero 0 000000 Channel 8 Pen 8 0 000000 100 00 Channel 9 Pen 9 0 000000 6 0000 Span 90 000000 Channel 10 Pen 10 0 000000 100 Channel 11 Pen 11 0 000000 100 Unt degC Channel 12 Pen 12 0 000000 100 Channel 13 Pen 13 0 000000 100 E Channel 14 Pen 14 0 000000 100 Channel 15 Pen 15 0 000000 100 z hannal 1C Dan IC N MNNM inn iid EX Channel number Linear Logarithmic 6 2 A 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 307 Honeywell Transferring Modbus profiles between sys
70. You can later choose a dataset of a paticvar user to make t as a Master copy TMS user in older versions Choose backup location Browse Folder ProgramData TrendManagerSuite_Backup Select a Master Copy Make this user s data set a Master copy 811063 Keep the existing TMS data and configuration l Depending on the number of users from previous Trend Manager Suite installation the user list of populated in the drop down list User can select a particular user to complete migration of his data to the latest TrendManager Suite application to work with User can also select Keep the existing TrendManager Suite data and configuration of the administrator who used to use the TrendManager Suite application from the previous installation Click on Apply to complete migration of data After successful completion click on Close Button Installation will progress For TrendServer Pro it creates TMSApplica tionAc cessGroup and TMServiceAccessGroup groups and for TrendManager Pro it creates only TMSApplicationAccessGroup These groups can be checked only after completion of installation and restart of machine for more details please refer to See TrendManager Suite User Groups after Installation on page 15 The installation complete window appears with message to restart the machine or not Click Finish 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Post migrat
71. a ag Frizi Jan 2005 12 40 49 Frizi Jan 2005 12 50 49 ee 218 Fri 21 Jan 2005 12 25 49 Fri 21 Jan 2005 12 35 49 recorder in the list 216 Fri 21 Jan 2005 12 10 49 Fri 21 Jan 2005 12 20 49 Find Select Batch to 214 Fri 21 Jan 2005 11 55 49 Fri 21 Jan 2005 12 05 49 produce the Event m2111 Fri 21 Jan 2005 11 40 49 Fri 21 Jan 2005 11 50 49 Naat Batch viewer EM 209 Fri 21 Jan 2005 11 25 49 Fri 21 Jan 2005 11 35 49 W207 Drag and drop 21 Jan 2005 11 10 49 Fri 21 Jan 2005 11 20 49 M205 Fri 21 Jan 2005 10 55 49 Fri 21 Jan 2005 11 05 49 Prev jong Of double click 534 Jan 2005 10 40 49 Fri 21 Jan 2005 10 50 49 M200 a batch to pro Fiz Jan 2005 10 25 49 Fri 21 Jan 2005 10 35 50 S FIGURE 9 8 m98 duce agraph Frizt jan 2005 10 10 49 Fri 21 Jan 2005 10 20 49 Eee 196 Fri 21 Jan 2005 09 55 49 Fri 21 Jan 2005 10 05 49 193 Fri 21 Jan 2005 09 40 49 Fri 21 Jan 2005 09 50 49 amp Off 191 Fri 21 Jan 2005 09 25 49 Fri 21 Jan 2005 09 35 49 fa estes 189 Fri 21 Jan 2005 09 10 49 Fri 21 Jan 2005 09 20 49 Settings 189 Fri 21 Jan 2005 09 10 49 Fri 21 Jan 2005 09 20 49 187 Fri 21 Jan 2005 08 55 49 Fri 21 Jan 2005 09 05 49 wf 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Text Search Export Close 227 Honeywell Another way to graph a batch is to double click on one of the batch event markers in the event bar If it is a green tile this means one or more batches will have started double click to produce the event list to select th
72. a scale appears like a big arrow pointing to the left saying No more data this means that there is no data to display for this pen at this time Along the bottom of the scale window is an Arrange button This gives four options for auto arranging the scale panels room taken up Resizing scale panels 1 The top button automatically generates Tile mode as shown 2 Strip mode is the second button which makes all the scale panels full height 3 The third arranges the scale panels of different sizes to Best fit 4 Minimise the scale panels is the bottom button to achieve the least amount of Scale panels may be reduced or increased in size by using the resize handles indicated by a small bar at the top and bottom of the scale panel see Figure 9 6 on page 221 Move the cursor over either handle TrendManager Suite changes the appearance of the cursor from a pointer to a double headed arrow drag until the required size is achieved and drop The area used within the graph window to display a pen s data is dependent upon the size of the respective scale panel If a scale panel is increased by 100 in length the area used to display that data will also increase by 100 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 221 222 Honeywell Graph Set Time Span This button on the switches panel Figure 9 3 on page 216 produces a box where the user can specify an exact start time date and span of the current graph to be d
73. a specific times on a specific day these boxes become active when this option is enabled Enter at what interval the down loads should take place Selected Days reveals the days of the week at the bottom of the window so the recorder data can be downloaded on predefined days Download from Select from the recorder s internal Disk drive PC card if fitted V5 recorders You can elect to delete the imported files on the recorder once the import has been successful Select the Delete files on recorder option so when the import is successful all the files will be deleted from that recorder freeing the disk space Receipt in log file option will create a file in the program directory called shedlog txt This will hold all the schedule downloads when activated This file can get quite big if used regularly Write detailed log file will be available and will add more detail to the standard log file this file can also become very large Use with caution Synchronise recorder clock with PC if there is more than five seconds difference between the recorder s clock and the PC then the recorder will update in line with the PC This option is available only on X amp GR Seriesrecorders not V5 recorders Floppy drive only available on the eZtrend V5 Schedule Import When all details are completed in the Schedule settings box press OK and return to the FTP scheduler setup box Enable the scheduler and click on Done No further action is necessar
74. alarm is triggered For Rate Up and Rate Down enter as a percentage how far the signal can deflect before an alarm is triggered rate Up and Rate Down are tied to a time period and it doesn t stand alone it is a rate of increase or decrease Ref Pen Only available when the alarm Type is set to Deviation Select and enter the pen that this alarm is referenced to This works like an actual pen that dynamically tracks a designated pen Time Period Only available when the Alarm Type is set to Rate Up or Rate Down Enter in seconds how long the signal is allowed to deviated at the specified deviation level before an alarm is triggered Tag Enter a Tag or name to identify this alarm Up to 17 characters Allow Change If activated this will allow quick configuration changes to this alarm level from the alarm button found in the top menu bar on a process screen in the recorder with out having to enter the setup This does not change the original setup e Relays Out Select and choose which Relay Output s is triggered by this alarm on this pen only The Fixed button will use the common relay output on the power board 24V relay e Latched A latched alarm will maintain in its active state until the trigger source has returned to a non alarm state and the alarm has been acknowledged A latched alarm will continue to flash if an alarm marker or pen pointer is displayed until it is acknowledged and in a non alarm st
75. and GR Series devices use IEEE float Dec Start Addr This is the register address number to start the transaction from 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell e No Of Items Enter the number of items from the start address that are included in the transaction For example displayed here will be 10 SCV 1 1 1 1 1 10 This means the transaction will take 10 items from the start address with a Serial Comms variable of Slave 1 Transaction 1 Register 1 to Slave 1 Transaction 1 Register 10 Modbus X Modbus X protocol differs from standard Modbus by the 4 floating point order that is reversed for application compatibility Slave e Enabled Toggle On to make this recorder a Slave Device e Port Select this for a list of available ports either Ethernet or RS485 For port configu ration Ports on page 94 e Protocol Select this for a list of available protocols Modbus or Modbus X Modbus and Modbus X can both use Ethernet or RS485 Ports Protocols define the format in which the data is transferred from the recorder to a PC or transfer between other devices and peripherals FPLB Floating Point Little Endian Byte Swapped Format amp FP B Floating Point Big Endian Format are standard notations e Slave ID This is a unique Modbus ID Address used by the recorder to identify Modbus messages Applications that talk to the recorder with Modbus will need to know this number to ret
76. and Totals also you can get access to the previously complete whole hour day week or month for each pen An hour is a whole hour starting on the hour eg 10 00 to 11 00 e A day starts at one second passed midnight e A week starts one second passed midnight on Sunday e A month starts at one second passed midnight on the 1st of the month Access to this is provided automatically via reports but this information can also be included in maths scripts and by using embedded variables Pen Report Maths In maths the following syntax is available prmax x y z Pen report Max value prmin x y z Pen report Min value prave x y z Pen report Average value prtot x y z Pen report Totaliser value where x Pen Number 1 to 96 y period 1 Hour 2 Day 3 Week 4 Month z report set 1 Current 2 Previous completed e g P1 prmax 23 2 1 Max value so far for current day for Pen 23 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Pen Report Syntax the syntax for the embedded variables is as follows PRPtttxynn v ttt is the type of variables required and can be MAX Max value MAT Time max value was recorded MIN Min Value MIT Time min value was recorded AVE Average Value TOT Totaliser value STM Start time of the reports set x is the report set and can be C Current working hour day week month L Last completed hour day week month y is the period and can be H Hour D Day
77. appear If Auto Clear is switched off you will be required to press OK on the screen error alert message Enable Reflash If Reflash is enabled and a time set the error alert message will appear again at the time specified until the error is resolved With Reflash enabled pressing the OK button on the recorder s screen message will only make the message disappear until the next reflash time occurs Reflash Time Set this to how often you want the error alert message to repeat until the problem is solved Display alert as an event effect This feature is available from within the event system where the Alert Display can be used as an event effect to display a preset or user defined marker See Event Effects on page 100 Field IO When AMS2750 mode is enabled extra tabs will appear for added configuration Listed under the Ana logue Inputs tab will be displayed Sensors only certain selections will be available Analogue In tab Press the Analogues button to display all the analogue inputs available Click on the individual Analogue In number to set up each channel profile Each channel has a list of menu items to be configured Enabled Tick to Enable Type Select this for a list of available signal inputs Volts Amps and Ohms RT Resist ance thermometer or TC Thermocouple Sample Rate Select this for a list of available Analogue Input sample speeds A Fast Scanning range of 50Hz 20mS is available as a firmware
78. as Administrator XXXXXXXX User Password Re enter Administrator Password Adminstrator ae te The user account name Administrator is the only account capable of managing users hence Change Password Done make sure you never lose this password User Manager Cancel Audit Manager V want to use passwords Change Password To change a password select Change Password and enter the new password twice This can only be done by the Administrator Password User Manager The User Manager screen is designed to add remove and edit passwords and password access There are two users already loaded into the password system these are known as password accounts The Default account is when no users are logged on and access is kept to a minimum The Administra tor account is recommended to be kept with full access 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell FIGURE 7 11 Password Manager User Manager User Manager User Description Default Default permissions when not logged in e Administrator Administrator Add Remove Properties To Add or Change the properties of a user select this button from the User Manager screen and click on Add or Properties This will reveal the User Properties box To add a new user make sure nothing is selected in the box and click on Add Enter the User s FIGURE 7 12 Password Properties Name a Description for identification and the Password
79. bar in the bottom right of the PC Screen Note Data will not be gathered until the Comms Server is activated from the Start Menu Help The TrendManager Suite has a comprehensive on line Help facility which includes detailed instructions on How to do things and explanations of all application areas The help system is generic to product names and there is a section at the beginning of the help files on identifying recorders There is also advise on how to use the Help system included in the TrendManager Suite Help Index 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell System Requirements TrendViewer requires the following minimum specification ee 1GHz Pentium IV processor or higher ee CD ROM drive a mouse ee Monitor recommended screen resolution 1024x768 minimum requirement high colour ee Windows 7 32 bit Professional and Ultimate Edi tion 64 bit Windows 8 82 bit Enterprise Profes sional and Ultimate Edition 64 bit Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2012 ee 4GB or more of RAM min 4GB recommended e 16 bit colour graphics 24 bit recommended Screen Designer only e 50 Mbyte hard disk free disk space e Flash card reader or USB port for X Series recorders e 3 5 floppy disk drive or PCMCIA for V5 recorders For TrendServer and TrendManager the following minimum specifications apply ee 1GHz Pentium IV processor ee CD ROM drive a mouse ee Monitor recommended screen resolut
80. devices in a network Hubs are commonly used to connect segments of a LAN A hub contains multiple ports When a packet arrives at one port it is copied to the other ports so that all segments of the LAN can see all packets See passive hub intelligent hub and switching hub Intelligent hub Intelligent hubs include additional features that enables an administrator to monitor the traffic passing through the hub and to configure each port in the hub Intelligent hubs are also called manageable hubs IP Address This is an identification for communication An IP Address is a 32 bit number that identifies each sender or receiver of information that is sent in packets across the Internet IP Resolution A mechanism which maps the IP Address to an Ethernet address This is also known as an Address Resolution Protocol or ARP 1QQQ This stands for Installation Qualification amp Operation Qualification This is a custom built report based on the configuration of a recorder Local Area Network LAN A local area network LAN is a group of computers and associated devices that share a common communications line and typically share the resources of a single processor or server 260 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell within a small geographic area for example within an office building Usually the server has applications and data storage that are shared in common by multiple computer users A local area network may serve a
81. fixed once set and any data values imported outside of the pen scale limits will be capped at the appropriate limit However this data can be read in by version 5 release of TrendServer Click on OK and the data will start to import If there is a device in the database with the same Serial number but a different ID this will be flagged up and you can choose to add the data to this device or a new device will be created For a new device choose from the Database Device Destination User Selection box The Data File conversion will start and the destination box will appear to confirm the correct device When the file conversion is complete press ok When the import is complete the data will be automatically displayed as a graph showing the data as pen traces and displaying each associated pen Any events will be imported via Trendbus only with the data and can be displayed on the graph using the Event button at the bottom of the graph The device is loaded into the recorders list for identification purposes click on the Recorders icon to display the list of recorders The device can not be configured from the software The imported data can be graphed analysed archived printed and exported to a spread sheet See Exporting data to a spreadsheet on page 178 For data imported from Honeywell V5 X Series recorders an Event viewer is available by right clicking on the recorder in the recorders list and selecting Events See Recorder Eve
82. for TrendManager Suite Application 43 TV 25 11 GLO During the launch of TrendManager Suite Application Ul if you see any of the below messages Unable to connect to the local database server 0x8000401a you may need to reinstall your software Unable to connect to local communications server 0x8000401a you may have insufficient memory or need to reinstall your software The above messages can be due to a Password expiration for the given logged on user account Use Security Configura tion Utility for this For more details refer to Security Configuration Utility on page 36 b If the user is not part of TMSApplicationAccessGroup For more details please refer to TrendManager Suite User Groups after Installation on page 15 c TrendServer Pro Application if Commnunications Service is still not started after steps 1 and 2 have been applied then copy the TMS folder of the logs for further understanding of the issue The TrendServer Pro uses Microsoft s DCOM to allow remote users to access data on other copies of the Manager and the Server software across networks Using TCP IP Please troubleshoot below steps if you are experiencing issues with remote communications a For all Windows versions From Start select Run and type dcomenfg This will start Component Services Go to Component Services gt Computers gt My Computer Right click on My Computer and select Default Propertie
83. involve the design development production use or stockpiling of nuclear chemical or biological weapons or missiles nor use Software services or technical data in any facility which engages in activities relating to such weapons or missiles In addi tion Software services or technical data may not be used in connection with any activity involving nuclear fission or fusion or any use or handling of any nuclear material until Licen see at no expense to Honeywell has insurance coverage indemnities and waivers of lia bility recourse and subrogation acceptable to Honeywell and adequate in Honeywell s opinion to protect Honeywell against any type of liability 12 12 Language This Agreement is in the English language only which language shall be controlling in all respects and all versions of this Agreement in any other language shall be for accommodation only and shall not be binding on the parties to this Agreement All communications and notices made or given pursuant to this Agreement and all documenta tion and support to be provided unless otherwise noted shall be in the English language Entire Agreement Modification This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between Licensee and Honeywell and supersedes in their entirety any and all oral or written agree ments previously existing between Licensee and Honeywell with respect to the subject mat ter hereof The terms and conditions of any purchase order or other instrument iss
84. is required to be written to two drives Usually only one pen can write to one drive Additional pens can be purchased upon request Finally confirm if your recorder has a PC Card fitted PCMCIA see PCMCIA Interface Card on page 124 All these areas are covered in the TrendManager Suite Help Click on any area on the screen and press F1 on the keyboard to display the related help files GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 125 126 Honeywell PCMCIA Interface Card Multitrend Plus V5 This is a memory card interface or hard drive interface purchased as an option It can be any size from an 8 MByte flash card to a 1 GByte hard drive This view shows the Multitrend Plus V5 with the disk drive flap down revealing the disk drive and the PC card slot above it If there is no PC card a blanking plate will cover the slot FIGURE 6 7 PCMCIA card slot PC card Hardware Configuration Wizard for the eZtrend V5 FIGURE 6 8 Hardware Wizard Hardware Configuration Wizard Build your recorder v Digtal channels 4 Out 6 Out 2 In VPens 6 ff you have bought additional maths pens you can specify them here e The eZtrend V5 configuration only requires the number of analogue channels to be set either 2 4 or 6 inputs The Digital channels box is available if the recorder has an alarm card fitted The two alarm card options available are 4 relay output or 6 relay output with 2 digital inputs Select the correct se
85. is triggered for that sound Also like ring tones the sounds themselves can be replaced on the recorder with custom sounds To add sounds refer to the Recorder User manual Display Alert Display alert as an event effect this feature is available from within the event system where the Alert Display can be used as an event effect to display a preset or user defined marker Select Message Type as Preset to display a list of all available mark ers that have been previously added to the recorder To add Preset Markers go to Preset Markers on page 105 Select the Message Type as User Defined to enter your own text For more information on the Alert system and how to customise it see Error Alert tab on page 64 Batch Batch controls can be used as the effect of an event occurring An event cause must be set up so that the effect of the event is to Start Stop or Pause a batch Batches work using groups of pens so when setting up an event with a batch control as a cause you must assign a group of pens See Groups tab on page 59 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell e Reports A report can be created as an effect of an event Reports can be generated ona periodical basis using event system to show daily weeks monthly totals max mins aver ages etc the reports can be printed e mailed as attachments or exported to external media Before a report can be run the report details must be entered in Reports on p
86. logging can be controlled by batch start and stop the stop and start logging can be independently controlled so a batch could start the pens logging but choose not to stop them logging when the batch stops or start logging independently of a batch but have all pens stop logging when a batch stops Only pens within the group of the associated batch will be controlled Stop Log Finish Enable this if you require logging to stop when the batch ends See Start Log Start for details Allow Direct Input Enable this to allow the Batch control properties listed below to be edited directly from the batch control screen A barcode reader can be plugged into the front of the recorder and the barcodes scanned in directly e Single Screen Batch available for GR Series recorders only allows you to view and enter all the batch details on a single screen If this is not selected the Batch Wizard will enable separate screens to enter the same information The batch fields are Batch Name User Id Lot Number Description and Comment are available for viewing and entering details on a single page using the Single Screen batch enabled if disabled a separate screen will be required for each field The Lot number is unique for each batch on a recorder and user cannot modify the Lot number The Lot number starts at 1 and incre ments by 1 This is irrespective of whether the user is using Batch Wizard or Single Screen Batch to enter the batch details T
87. or through an Ethernet connection Only Modbus protocol is available for X Series and GR devices see Appendix G Modbus Communications and Modbus Profile Tool on page 301 P The Communications Server appears as an icon in the Windows system bar The Modbus protocol can be used to connect with other devices that support floating point values in their register maps Devices are held in databases and the databases are accessed via the Database Server It is possible to connect to remote database servers and access their databases and devices Similarly connections can be made to remote comms servers to retrieve data from their de vices The comms server uses IP Addresses to locate devices on local and remote servers All Log ging configuration for comms logging and logging to a database is set up from the Comms Server The Comms Status shows all the activity of devices Communications ports Databases and Database Servers The window to the left displays the areas controlled by the comms server the database servers and the communications ports The display area s to the right will dis play details of any item selected in the left window Depending on what has been selected the right window will split in two to give logging information Items listed in the left window that have a sign against them contain other items click on the sign to reveal the list of items contained within The sign will change to a sign when all the
88. output port setup on page 136 By Digitals enables the alarm if one of the digitals has entered its specified state determined by the Digital Inputs button This button activates a list where by the available digital inputs can be added or removed to the list of triggered alarms The Disable digital is its default state and if selected the alarm will appear in the recorders alarm list but will not be active Click in any area on the screen and press F1 on the keyboard to display the related help files General alarm settings Select the Type of alarm either High or Low so if the level goes above the stated value on a high alarm or below the stated value on a low alarm the alarm will be triggered Log mode should be set to Normal unless the log rate needs to change when the alarm is active then select Alarm Set the alarm Level by entering the numeric value at which the alarm is to be activated the level is in terms of pen units so must not exceed the current pen scale Log as Event will log the alarm state entry and exit to the event window For Mark on chart the Log as Event item must be checked as well to use this Places a mark on the chart on alarm state entry and exit Choose whether to Trigger relays on alarm entry tick this to produce the Relay Outputs button Select relays from the Relay Output list and add to Trigger Output list using the Add and Remove buttons Advanced options Hysteresis gives the alarm a tolerance level
89. path to be entered in the Printer name The file path will contain the server name this could be the PC the printer is connected to or a print server and the printer name Eg PC or print server name printername e Colour Printer Tick if a colour printer is being used for the screen capture facility Screen captures can be printed as an Effect of an Event See Events Cause and Effect on page 96 If in doubt contact your IT Administrator for advice 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 63 64 Honeywell Error Alert tab A new alert system has been implemented to allow on screen alerts to be displayed for seri ous errors and for early warning on potentially serious issues like available media space When an alert is detected a large message box will be displayed on the screen it has a flash ing border for which colours are user defined and will display the current error state An acknowledge button is available and a re flash can be set to warn the user again if the error condition is not rectified Error Types The following conditions are available to be enabled Network Unplugged will detect hub switch failure also Internal Memory Alarm Display when internal memory is going to start over writing non exported data within a defined period of time Storage Alarm level must be set ee Export Alarm Where external media capacity will run out within a defined period of time Storage Alarm le
90. pen has been taken also pads when no data is being logged No Padding Will not fill in the empty cells but leave breaks Date Time Format Standard will display standard date and time format as text Lotus 1 2 3 Export files in Lotus 1 2 3 format Lotus format is the number of seconds elapsed since 1970 Can be applied to graphing or to display in Excel format 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 179 Honeywell File Formats Local Format Exports using non decimal format if the users PC is set up that way Uses the native format for that country Long Filenames Attaches a tag to the beginning of the file name and an extension to the end of each pen exported to include the recorder name and pen name Traditional DOS This is a naming format which allows the user to enter a six character tag which has the trace number attached to the end of the file name Used on older type of networks Send To Excel Exports to Microsoft Excel 97 or later Auto starts with the exported files E mail PCs using a MAPI compliant E mail programme e g Outlook Outlook Express etc will open the E mail programme automatically creating a new e mail with the selected files attached Sample Period Graph Res Exports the data dependant on the graph resolution displayed This gives an overview of the actual data to reduce the length of the spread sheet Actual Full Res Takes the fastest logging speed and exports every data point One pixel o
91. prompt to save will only appear if changes have been made in the setup window Printing Setups 43 TV 25 11 Honeywell V5 Recorders Select the recorder button on the left and right click on the recorder containing the setup required to be printed Select the Print button and choose the setup required form the list and press OK Print Recorder Setup x Select which section s to print General Pens Analogues Digitals IV Print General Settings J Print Hardware Settings Print User Counters I Print User Email Addresses and Messages NB Full recorder configuration can take up many pages If this is required select Landscape mode to cut down the page count The Font type can be changed if desired Click Done when each tab is fin ished and Print when all tabs are completed Select each tab for General Pens Analogues and Digitals to configure what is required in the setup printout GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 147 148 Honeywell 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Chapter 7 TrendManager Suite Recorders All the areas listed below are covered in detail in the TrendManager Suite Help Click in any area on the screen and press F1 on the keyboard to display the related help files FIGURE 7 1 Add New Recorder z Recorders x j Select new device Select a device from the list Button Bar Add New Recorder Button produces the Select new device box Minitrend QX high resoluti
92. queue of 60 samples and each 10 seconds the new rolling average is calcu lated The prefill simply takes the current pen value and fills the queue with that average causing the damping effect to be baselined at the current reading No prefill will cause the first few samples to have a greater effect on the average as they will not be diluted by 60 samples but 1 2 3 4 up to 60 after the 10 minutes Comms e Modbus Communications protocol for Ethernet and RS485 Web Browse your recorder using the web browse feature See Web tab on page 90 e Email Setup email accounts to send alarm and event information See Email tab on page 90 e SNTP Simple Network Time Protocols is a protocol for synchronising the clocks of computer systems and other devices over ethernet networks See SNTP tab on page 91 e TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol A protocol for communica tion between computers recorders and other devices See TCP IP tab on page 92 e Network Admin Network Admin is required for printers on a network and shared or work group printers See Network Admin tab on page 94 e FTP File Transfer Protocol Used to transfer data to and from the recorder See FTP tab on page 94 e Peer to Peer Sets up the recorder to be identified on a network See Peer to Peer tab on page 95 86 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Modbus tab Modbus can
93. real time Data Compression technique is an alternative to the more standard methods of recording data Paperless Recorders are primarily used for exception recording They spend most of their life trending and recording straight lines Fuzzy Logging has been developed to improve the efficiency of data storage and is particularly effective in exception recording examples where normal operation consists of generally static inputs Fuzzy Logging looks for straight lines in the data stream in real time whether they are horizontal climbing or descending A straight line made up of say 10 points can be equally well represented by 2 points one at either end the other 8 points are redundant Fuzzy logging works by creating straight lines in the data and discarding redundant points adasi To help the user in the trade off between Scan Rate Disk capacity and Recording Time after all the Pie is only so big D Fuzzy Logging has been developed to help maximise all three sections in effect 1 Scan Rate E Storage Capacity increasing the size of the Pie Recording Period The Recording Pie The result is a technique that delivers a host of real world benefits over the more tradi tional recording methods _ Disks take longer to fill changed less frequently less site visits Faster scan rates can be used for any given disk size giving greater resolution on the process Recording time can be e
94. related services have not been started you will see the below error message while opening TrendServer Pro Could not establish connection to Local Communications Server Please check if TMSService is running Open Comms UI with administrative privilege and restart servers a If Remote communication server is not running and the remote Comm Server is clicked from the Comms Server pane the following error message should pop up 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Could not establish connection to Remote Communications Server 192 168 11 219 Please check if TMSService is running in remote machine Open Comms UI administrator previlege in remote machine and restart servers For more detailed information on the Comms Server refer to the appropriate recorder Communications or User manual Communications Realtime Settings Select the System button from the left side of the main screen and click on the realtime icon this will produce a window containing the realtime pen settings All these settings are for realtime data only e From this box the default for the Data Rate and the Type of data can be set to either Sample or MaxMin Sample will log the actual data value of the last sampled reading MaxMin will log the maximum and minimum values since the last log e Click in the Events box to retrieve and display event data if required then enter a default data rate time e Use the left mouse
95. right clicking on the Event bar which will produce a box where you can select the Add Date Time User Text Event 27 Januay 2005 16 00 00 iat Depending on where you click on the Event bar will determine the time and date displayed in the box and the time and date that the User Event is displayed on the graph The time and date can be changed using the drop down boxes To change the date the drop down box will produce a monthly calendar Select the month and click on the date To change the time first click on the hours minutes or days then use the up and down _Cancel_ arrows to change the time Enter text for any Event or add a Batch Event Marker These User Text Event markers can be displayed on the either the Logged data Disk data graph area or the Realtime graph area Maximum characters 43 including spaces v Batch Events Enter text here P l June C Pause for reading User defined text can be added to any graph retrospectively The text entered will appear with that event The time and date will automatically be added to the text displayed Batch markers can be retrospectively created in historical data Once entered a User text event cannot be erased See Retrospectively Graphing a Batch on page 229 For details on setting up Events using TrendManager Software see Events System on page 136 Graphing a Batch Individual batches can be graphed by right clicking on the appropriate Batch recorder in
96. srren t E A AE AEAEE oaa 108 Transfer siesessicsacesusisese suaseeiasevtasteotesteascsapsncsapsgboasbsgoseodpsnpeseastsaahnosoeavosssbeasesevohsdebe 112 Hardware isen ii E taeda teat ATTER 113 REPOS ararsan e aE EE E E E E T N 114 Recorder configuration complete cssssscscsecssssesersesssssssescssssescsscsseesssssssssesssssesesess 117 Printin Setups secsssssaseinsendsanosinccdvoenscassdasedseceseosessoussvasesootaseasocsseesevtesersuoenses 118 Honeywell V5 Recorders i ssessssssssossjoseisotvssosossevuessseco iversosdresv siisii seisis 123 Start here sessies aieri aa ianari ariris 123 Hardware Configuration Wizard for the Minitrend VS issesessssssscssssesessscsesesseeees 123 Hardware Configuration Wizard for the Multitrend Plus V5 ssssssssssssssssssseseseseees 125 PCMCIA Interface Card cciciessvitccsasicotesassactessiveacestessososesesssevsasteotestgesceesssssaasioneee 126 Hardware Configuration Wizard for the eZtrend VS sssssssssesscsessesssseserssessesssceees 126 iv 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Recorder Setup sisscesesscdseassssscoscissensessnsuacctvseascevsbeaseceetedessesccunsesscvesaceesesensaes 127 General recorder SELUP pevsdccsscividecevscsaaveessecseks arkccorsedcsvendcsssvstetsvescicessosedseersdetesee 127 Communications tab Pen related setups Analogue Output Setup or Re transmission sissssssssssssessssscsessssssssscsesesssessesssseses 136 Digital input output port setup Events Syst
97. store is applicable for Windows Server 2012 Windows Server 2008 Windows 8 and Windows 7 Steps are given below to locate virtual store folder for the user who is currently logged in the system By default virtual store folder is hidden Steps to show hidden files Open explorer Go to the Tools gt Folder Click on View tab 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 17 18 Honeywell Folder Options General View Search Folder views You can apply the view such as Details or Icons that PES you are using for this folder to all folders of this type beatin Advanced settings dJ Files and Folders E Always show icons never thumbnails V Always show menus V Display file icon on thumbnails V Display file size information in folder tips Display the full path in the title bar Classic theme only d Hidden files and folders Dont show hidden files folders or drives E Hide empty drives in the Computer folder E Hide extensions for known file types Hide protected operating system files Recommended Restore Defaults Cancel Apply e Check the Show hidden files folders and drives Click Ok please see above image for reference e Now go to C Users lt User Name gt AppData Local VirtualStore Under VirtualStore folder Program Files TrendManager Suite TMP5DB Program Data TMP and ProgramData commsserv w
98. sub menu for DNS WINS MDNS Only available when Auto DNS is deactivated e Auto WINS This is a sub menu for DNS WINS MDNS Tick to activate With this deacti vated the Windows Internet Name Service can be changed from the default if required Pri WINS Address This is a sub menu for DNS WINS MDNS Only available when Auto WINS is deactivated Sec WINS Address This is a sub menu for DNS WINS MDNS Only available when Auto WINS is deactivated e Auto MDNS This is a sub menu for DNS WINS MDNS Tick to activate This will deacti vate the Managed Data Network Services 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 93 Honeywell Ports Defaults to 80 502 select Set to activate the options The port settings are associated with the IT sys tem in use Port settings are set to a default but can be changed by the user to allow data traffic to use a specified port When complete select Done HTTP HyperText Transport Protocol is the communications protocol that enables Web browsing Select and enter the desired port number if required e Modbus communications protocol used for automation applications Select and enter the desired port number if required Network Admin tab This must be set up to ensure network printing can be performed without being prompted for this infor mation each time you want to print This information will remain after a firmware upgrade Network Admin is required for printers on a network and
99. the Archived Databases in Archive Database Server Start here With the software open the main screen will be blank with a tool bar down the left hand side To start recorder configuration first select the Recorder button on the button bar down the left side of the screen Add New Recorder To add a recorder select the recorder icon from the button bar down the left side select Add New Recorder and follow the on screen instructions to confirm the new device being loaded In the Hard ware Configuration Wizard enter the recorder details including the ID number The ID number of the unit must be set by the user It is important that all of the user s recorders have different ID numbers especially if Comms is being used Hardware Configuration Wizard for the Minitrend V5 FIGURE 6 4 Hardware Wizard Hardware Configuration Wizard Build your recorder ShtA Universal Cadwth B F haek ShbtB FastScaming Cadwith 2 E Chonnels Sht C Ethemet z wih fes Ship Alam z Caidwth BRekp 2Digtal gt Channels VPens Bo y If you have bought addtional maths pens you can spacily them here lt Back New gt Carce Heb Slots A and B are for analogue inputs select either Universal Fast Scanning Linear and Output cards depending on what options are fitted into the recorder When the analogue input cards are selected ensure the corresponding number of channels is displayed in the associated box on the Hardware
100. the IMS application Note This utility can be used to reset an existing account incase password has been changed or other account to be set for TMS Application Please select an option to continue with this utility 1 Set User account for IMS Application 2 Set User account for TrendView Historian 6 Exit Enter your Option 1 Enter the User Account details Domain User please enter as Domain Name User Nane Local User please enter as ser Name or Machine Name User Nane Note Same user account should be used on another TMS Installed System for remote communications Enter DomainName UserNanme 2 You need to provide valid user credentials that are intended to use with TrendManager Suite or TrendView Historian 3 To change the user account under TrendManager Suite or TrendView Historian it should be provided in the following format a For Local user account format User Name or Machine Name User Name Steps to check for Machine Name e Go to Start Menu gt Control Panel gt Start gt Control Panel gt System e You will see Computer name which is also Machine Name b For Domain user account format Domain Name User Name For this account if you provide wrong password depending upon the domain policy the account may get locked after multiple tries 4 On change of password for the given user account under which TrendManager Suite or TrendView Historian is ru
101. the domain user account and password If the domain user account is not found then installation will display the below message x Please enter an existing valid User name and Password 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 11 Honeywell Note For TrendServer SIREC Server Pro only The user account entered in the above window is used for setting the Communications Service and processes to run under it The password entered will expire as per local security policies after this TrendServer Pro may stop functioning Please ensure passwords are updated regularly as per your security policies using Security Configuration Utility which comes along with the installation of TrendManager Suite For more details refer to the Security Configuration Utility on page 36 NOTE For TrendServer Pro only The user account entered in the above window is used for setting the Communications Service and processes to run under it To run Communications Service under a different account or on expiry of password use the Security Configuration Utility which is part of the TrendManager Suite installation For more details refer to the Security Configuration Utility on page 36 NOTE For TrendManager Pro only The user account entered in the above window is used for setting Database process to run under it To run the Database process under a different account or on account of expiry of password use the Security Configurati
102. the recorders list and selecting Batch from the tool bar The Event Batch View window will appear with the Batch tab displaying all the Batches for that particular recorder Either select a batch and drag and drop it onto the graph area or double click on the start of a specific batch The graph data being displayed will only be for that batch All events including batch events will be displayed when the Event bar is activated To see how to generate a graph and show comparrison for Golden Batch go to Generate Graphs on page 175 The batch area is contained within two red dotted lines denoting the start and the end of in this case batch 216 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell A Batch graph can be quickly identified by the word Batch displayed in the time bar at the bottom of the graph There is an elapsed time of 10 seconds before the batch is started and when the batch has ended Recorders Event Batch iew Batch Test Pen 3 Batch Test Pen 7 tL t Batch Test Pen 2 F Batch Test Pen 6 100 00 80 00 60 00 40 00 20 00 0 00 Batch Test Pen 1 Events Batch 2005 1 Batch Test 10 49 4 10 secs elapsed time before and after batch End Time al Column 225 i 21 Jan 2005 13 10 49 Fri 21 Jan 2005 13 20 49 Config m2223 Fri 21 Jan 2005 12 55 49 Fri 21 Jan 2005 13 05 49 Right click on
103. the timer If input 1 is not the highest input value then stop totalising time and return the current timer value 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 283 284 Honeywell We know that in Example 1 the highest value channel number is contained with GLBV1 and as this is a global variable it is also accessible from this script if GLBV1 1 BLKV1 trun 1 0 return tget 1 else BLKV1 tpause 1 return tget 1 Tests if the global variable 1 is equal to channel 1 If it is then keep the timer running without resetting Return the current timer value If not then Pause the timer Return the current paused timer value Note in this script above there is no way to reset the timer this could be modified to allow the user to reset this timer from a switch fed into a digital input as follows if D1 1 else BLKV1 treset 1 return tget 1 if GLBV1 1 BLKV1 trun 1 0 return tget 1 else BLKV1 tpause 1 return tget 1 Tests if the DI 1 is not set If it isn t then Tests if the global variable 1 is equal to channel 1 If it is then keep the timer running without resetting Return the current timer value If not then Pause the timer Return the current paused timer value If it is reset the timer 1 to zero return the current zeroed timer value 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Example 4 Commenting
104. the value 1 to set or 0 to clear The function will return the value set if successful if not successful it will return 1 0 this would be caused by trying to set and digital input rather then output Set User variable UVSET x y Returns the result of x the user variable and y the value Sin sin x Returns the SIN of x SinH sinh x Returns the Hyperbolic SIN of x Square Root sqrt x Returns the Square Root of x Square sq x Returns the square of x i e x multiply by x Subtract Returns the result of the subtraction Tan tan x Returns the TANGENT of x TanH tanh x Returns the Hyperbolic TANGENT of x Trigger an Event TRIGE x This will trigger Event x 1 to 20 TRIGE x will return 1 when the event is fired otherwise it will return 0 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 275 Honeywell Functions use radians 27 radians 360 degrees Event triggering from scripts This feature allows any enabled event with an enabled effect does not have to have any caus es enabled to be triggered from within the scripting system using the following function TRIGE x where x is the event 1 to 20 Once an event is triggered using scripting the event is locked and cannot be triggered again from scripts until the lock is cleared using the clear event function CLRE x where x is the event number 1 to 20 This prevent successive executions re triggering the same event As a further measure to avoid the system bein
105. this group can Guests have the same acces Built in group used by Inter Members in this group can Members of this group may Members of this group can Power Users are included fo Members in this group are Supports file replication in Users are prevented from m Members in this group can Debugger Users are non adi IS Worker Process Group Members in the group have Members in the group have Members in the group have Members in the group have Members in the group have Members in the group have Visual Studio developers ca e Select Properties A list of users will be populated who are authorized to access TrendManager Suite application f Add any user you want to give authorize to access TrendManager Suite application In below diagram Recorder Operator155 has been added to TMSApplicationAc cessGroup 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell A ApplicationAccessGroup at Description Members a lam RECORDER Operator 155 Changes to a user s group membership are not effective until the next time the user logs on ox cancel NOTE Ensure below steps once user is added to TMSApplicationAccessGroup to access TrendManager Suite application 1 Check for TrendManager Suite TMP and CommsServ folders are present in the virtual store of given user After locating the given folders in virtual store take backup and delete those folders from virtual store The virtual
106. to Peer POTtsS voeeececeeeeeeee RS232 ben on IRS485 me eaaa r E Communications X Series rccecccccecccsscseseeseeeses 86 FTP Web Concurrent Batch Mode X Series 59 Copy a Graph Counters o 324 Honeywell D Damping Alarms Damping Alarms Damping Signal Data Locator ossessi Data Importing ssis Database Management Tool Database Servers wiccescccccccccece Database Size Management Databases sssri Add a Database ou cceeeeeteteteeeeees eas Change the Current Database n Delayed Event Event Bitect seart T D 104 Delete a Graph ssssssrssoiisssoisoreissseiseseen 214 Delete a Server i 183 Diagnostics Comms Server secesie Digital I O Port Setup Fail Safe sissies cannes ats Digital IO Card X Series es Disk Life Calculator eccscnscscanetivicctniaen Display Alert Event Effect semerci oinaan n DNS WINS MDNS Comms me Documentation seecsecssssessssesssisssvissssssessssssstesssiessies E Email Alas eee E ede A ees Event Effects oo Email Setup iets a inincnnwincen Email Setup Events Embedded Process Values cccssscccssssssssvessess 100 Event Effect esnsieuroneniaiiss Engineering Scale Enter Replay Screen Event Effects cocci ccc cceccssccsscssecsssessecsssesseessees 105 Error Alert X Series e 64 Ethernet Poft ccccccccccccccccscccsscsscsscsscssvssvssvsscsstssteseens 128 IP Address Mail Server
107. type of counter can be used to count any type of event s see Counter Setup on page 144 Enter the type of counter which event is to be counted and the value of the count GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 143 144 Honeywell Marker Setup Page Select the required message from the list enter text below p Markeri gt adding tags using the lists and add tag button essage Marker Text temperature equal lt PP1 gt lt PIU gt and pressure equals lt PP2I gt lt LP2U gt Control Type Variable Type Pens Label Label X Pens F Pen 2 ne Units m aatas Counter Setup Counter setup is only required when a User type counter is selected in the Counter Cause Setup box see Event Counter Setup on page 143 To activate select the Counter Setup button at the bottom of the main events screen Counter Setup x Counters for any enabled Alarms Digitals and Events already exist and are incremented automatically e Choose a counter number from 1 to 16 and click in the ena nS es bled box ser Counter Setup Enter a tag or description to Select the desired counter from the list and fill out the settings identify the counter Counter f Indicate a Start point for the Counter 1 x counter and a value in the Rollo ver box for the counter to reach IV Enabled and restart the count Tag Click Done when complete The Phin 5 Counter is in place and can be used i on any Event Start at Ro
108. view all the sources related to the pens for that graph This will provide information like PenName Pen Type RecorderName DatabaseName ServerName The icons on the left are Select all does exactly that Copy selected data to clipboard copies the selected data on to the Windows clipboard for pasting into such as Microsoft Word or Excel To Print selected data click on the Print icon to generate two boxes one to select the font required then click OK followed by the print setup box Pen DataSources View Pen Name PenType Recorder Name Server Name Database Name Historical FTP Multitrend 5x 821711 Local Server penD atasource Time Adjusted Multitrend SX 821711 Local Server penD atasource Historical Realtime Multitrend 5 192 168 10 136 Logged Data Historical FTP Boiler Temp Archive Database pendata RealTime Multitrend 53 192 168 10 136 RealTime Multitrend Sx 192 168 10 136 Graph Data Viewer Select this icon from the left side of the graph area to view data as a table The Data Viewer either displays an overview of data every pixel currently visible in the graph window showing times and values that have been aver aged or as actual data points for the same span The left column displays the time and date of each data value This example show 3 pixels and their widths measured in max min time readings The screen area may span 1000 pixels and Pixel 1 width each pixel may contain 100 data points Th
109. viewed in the recorder s Status menu 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 191 Honeywell Internet Security Settings Types of web browser for use with the Remote Viewer include Internet Explorer 5 and above To browse multiple recorders IE8 or higher version is required Figure 7 10 Internet Security Windows 7 on page 192 shows an example from Internet Explorer 100n a Windows 7 machine The settings shown are for Internet access If the de vice is to be accessed in an intranet scenario then the same has to be done for local intranet option Firewall settings If this device is sitting on an enterprise network with a firewall in place then the firewall should be configured to allow all requests on port 80 and port 976 for remote control activex There is also one port for FTP control and one for OPC which should be opened Access to the firewall settings will differ depending on what firewall is installed Figure 7 10 Internet Security Windows 7 Internet Options p General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings Administrator approved Select a zone to view or change security settings Disable Enable A JS Display video and animation on a webpage that does not use Disable Internet Localintranet Trusted sites Restricted Enable sites 9 Download signed ActiveX controls Internet Q This zon
110. with the left mouse button but remain the same The year day month and time will be displayed whilst the locator is being moved For recorder specific help select any item on the screen for enquiry and press F1 on the key board Adding historical data to a realtime graph Historical data from a recorder on a database in the comms server can be added to a graph already displaying realtime data The realtime data is graphed in the blue tint section of the graph area Drag a recorder or pens from a recorder on a database in the comms server on to the white middle section of the graph area For specific help click on any part of the graph and press the F1 key on your keyboard to display the related help files 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 215 Honeywell Graph display features FIGURE 9 3 Activates Add data to Print this Graph display Point markers Start of one or switches the graph graph switches more batches panel Digital values cursor Add Real r SS p eee AAAA s asia eis iais alae A 28 000 100 000 Thu Mar 22 14 03 00 time pens 20 000 80 000 ee Point Markers 5 tote S 60 000 A to graph vs aooo 40 000 a 5 o ooof 20 000 ei 5 009F 6 _0 00 Spread Ey 100 000 4 00 000 sheet sa 80 000 5 2 80 000 ne S 60 000 S 60 000 export a 40 0005 40 000 Reale iy amp 20 0005 5 20 000 12
111. 0 0 Channel 9 Pen 9 0 000000 6 000 Channel 10 Pen 10 0 000000 10 Channel 11 Pen 11 0 000000 10 Channel 12 Pen 12 0 000000 10 Channel 13 Pen 13 0 000000 10 Channel 14 Pen 14 0 000000 10 B Scale Type Channel 15 Pen 15 0 000000 10 Linear Channel 16 Pen 16 0 000000 10 Channel 2 Pen 2 0 000000 5 Group 2 4 Channels starting address B Channel Name MODBUS register address Pen 2 6433 B Zero NumberOfChannels 0 000000 Channel 1 Zero Line 0 000000 1 Span Channel 2 Event Test 0 000000 50 000000 Channel 3 Batch Test 0 000000 B Unit Channel 4 Totals Test 0 000000 deg C B Color 16711935 B Scale Type linase E E Be 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Modbus profile realtime data update TrendServer software will generate a modbus profile when data is imported from USB key SD card or Compact Flash card or when it is manually imported via FTP This applies to FTP of setup and FTP of pen data The automatic or scheduled FTP import of data from a recorder does not result in an updated modbus profile being generated Once a modbus profile has been generated it is immediately available to the Comms Server but will not be automatically used by the Comms Server Any new connections created in the Comms Server will use the most recent modbus profile that has been generated when importing data on that PC For existing device connections go to the relev
112. 00 and its value is 59 then this value will be shown as 59 in the batch report as it is within scale limits and pen 2 scale is 33 to 55 but its value is 200 then based on scale its value will be somewhere near 55 and this value will be shown on batch report ii Min Max with Min Max scale option Batch report will show actual data e g In a batch there 2 pens pen 1 scale is 0 to 100 and its value is 59 then this value will be shown in batch report as 59 as it is within scale limits and pen 2 scale is 33 to 55 but its value is 200 but as it has been selected as min max its value will be 200 and this value will be shown on batch report iii Custom with Custom scale option Batch report will show data as per the scale limit of that Pen User can set the new Zero and new Span for each individual pen as per his requirement Change pen scale limits Pen name Maximum reading 33 00000 Minimum reading 33 00000 Original span 100 0000 Original zero 0 000000 Current span 100 0000 Current zero SOP gio00 Shortcuts for using dialog values Max Min Original Current New span 50 New zero 50 Ca oj In batch report you will need to select the required pen and set the custom scale as shown below For each pen once user has changed any of the above three scales user needs to click on Apply button The batch report will open automatically after generation if requested The dialog box will automatically close
113. 011 01 12 14 50 07 000 2011 01 12 14 50 17 000 2011 01 12 14 50 27 000 2011 01 12 14 50 37 000 2011 01 12 14 50 47 000 2011 01 12 14 50 57 000 2011 01 12 14 51 07 000 2011 01 12 14 51 17 000 2011 01 12 14 51 27 000 2011 01 12 14 51 37 000 2011 01 12 14 51 47 000 2011 01 12 14 51 57 000 Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific 15 x 2011 01 12 14 52 07 000 Good Non specific w gt Read Attribute for selected items 3 Select the Checkbox in front of the attribute for retrieving the associated information for the pen Attributes are used to return information associated with the pen Click Read Attribute to retrieve the information associated with the pen NOTE Support is provided for below Attributes only OPCHDA_ITEMID ItemID Specifies the item id OPCHDA_DESCRIPTION Description Describes the item OPCHDA_ENG_UNITS Eng Units Specifies the label to use in displays to define the units for the item e g kg sec OPCHDA_SOURCE_NAME Source Name Specifies the name of the item on the source OPCHDA_HIGH_ENTRY_LIMIT High Entry Limit Specifies the highest valid value for the item A value for the i
114. 05 09 39 47 6100 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 48 6100 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 49 6100 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 50 6100 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 51 6100 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 52 6100 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 53 6100 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 54 6100 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 55 6100 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 56 6100 50 3 49 71 50 3 49 71 50 3 49 71 50 3 49 71 50 3 49 71 50 3 49 71 50 3 49 71 50 3 49 71 50 3 49 71 50 3 49 71 50 86 50 3 50 86 50 3 50 86 50 3 50 86 50 3 50 86 50 3 50 86 50 3 50 86 50 3 50 86 50 3 50 86 50 3 50 86 50 3 51 4 50 86 51 4 50 86 51 4 50 86 51 4 50 86 51 4 50 86 51 4 50 86 43 TV 25 11 GLO 52 3 52 18 52 42 52 3 52 53 52 42 52 65 52 53 52 76 52 65 52 87 52 76 52 99 52 87 53 1 52 99 53 21 53 1 53 32 53 21 53 43 53 32 53 53 53 43 53 64 53 53 53 75 53 64 53 85 53 79 53 95 53 85 54 06 53 95 54 16 54 06 54 26 54 16 54 36 54 26 54 46 54 36 54 56 54 46 54 66 54 56 54 76 54 66 54 65 54 76 54 95 54 65 55 05 54 95 55 14 55 05 37 28 31 2 37 28 31 2 37 28 31 2 43 35 37 28 43 35 37 28 43 35 37 28 43 35 37 28 43 35 37 28 43 35 37 28 43 35 37 28 43 35 37 28 43 35 37 28 43 35 37 28 49 39 43 35 49 39 43 35 49 39 43 35 49 39 43 35 49 39 43 35 49 39 43 35 Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Use the bottom and side scroll bars to reveal all pens and more d
115. 1 to 8 This may already be entered depending on how you have chosen to add the device The RS485 Com ms option card and expansion card are required for the eZtrend QXe recorder Slave ID This is a unique Modbus D Address used by the recorder to identify Modbus mes sages Applications that talk to the recorder with Modbus will need to know this number to re turn messages to the device The same number must match in Comms Server Recorder Name This is the name displayed in the top right any process screen on the re corder Status This will automatically enable the designated port and the device will become active This can be activated later from the main Comms Server screen Socket This number should not need to be changed only by advanced users for networking The Test button enables the Add Device settings to be validated It can be used to determine whether the recorder is configured for Modbus or Modbus X Because we are using Modbus X the Modbus X column gives correct readings the Modbus column returns wrong readings Vice versa if using Modbus If the column shows the correct reading the recorder must be communicating correctly Press Done 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Test modbus device communications The goal of this test is to help determine which Modbus protocol variant Modbus or Modbus x the device being added has been configured to use The slave address and COM port
116. 14 UK Setup Window Maths Type Edit Maths WARNING Honeywell Scripting v TF 41 PAZIL Al RADIER Al gt A4 GLBV1 1 return 41 elseif A2 gt A1 RB A2 gt A3 RR A2 gt A4 GLBYV1 2 return 42 n A3 gt A1 ELAI RAZARA A4 GLBY1 3 return 43 else GLBY1 4 return 44 Maths Scripting is credit controlled Changes here may not be reflected on the recorder Maths expressions can be applied to extra pens Up to 12 extra pens are available on the eZtrend QXe 16 for the Minitrend QX and up to 48 extra pens on the Multitrend SX and DR Graphic recorder Go to the credits tab to check if the recorder has any extra pens 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 81 Honeywell Totals tab To use the Totals option on the recorder it must be enabled as a firmware credit option FIGURE 6 1 Totals tab set to Normal Setup Window General Scales Logging Maths Totals Alarms RAV Enabled W WARNING rsa Field 10 Totals are credit controlled Type Normal ts Changes here may not be reflected se on the recorder z Tota f Add to Msgs Units mm Time Factor 60 0 f Unit Factor 1 0 gt No Backflow IV Backflow Level Restrict Range a sais pa a Max Range 1000000 Notation Normal ati Auto User Defined AfterDecml 2 For example the Totaliser function is associated with flow monitoring applications The input to the recorde
117. 15 sp1 114 sp1 113 sp1 112 sp1 111 sp1 111 sp1 11i sp1 111 sp1 29 8 2011 111 111 29 8 2011 111 recorder Select All Copy To Clipboard Print Selection Mon 19 Sep 2011 16 35 04 Mon 19 Sep 2011 16 32 24 Mon 19 Sep 2011 16 31 09 Fri 16 Sep 2011 15 25 19 Fri 02 Sep 2011 16 53 57 Fri 02 Sep 2011 16 39 30 Fri 02 Sep 2011 16 38 41 Fri 02 Sep 2011 16 03 51 Fri 02 Sep 2011 16 01 41 Fri 02 Sep 2011 15 29 48 Fri 02 Sep 2011 15 10 00 Fri 02 Sep 2011 13 36 01 Fri 02 Sep 2011 13 29 50 Fri 02 Sep 2011 13 29 28 Wed 31 Aug 2011 10 15 06 Tue 30 Aug 2011 18 11 35 Tue 30 Aug 2011 17 53 03 Tue 30 Aug 2011 17 09 58 Tue 30 Aug 2011 17 08 42 Tue 30 Aug 2011 17 04 17 Tue 30 Aug 2011 17 03 41 Tue 30 Aug 2011 16 32 45 Tue 30 Aug 2011 10 33 29 Tue 30 Aug 2011 10 33 17 Mon 29 Aug 2011 15 47 17 Mon 29 Aug 2011 15 46 35 Mon 29 Aug 2011 15 03 53 Mon 08 Aug 2011 18 42 50 FIGURE 19 1 Batch view 43 TV 25 11 GLO Mon 19 Sep 2011 18 47 21 Mon 19 Sep 2011 16 33 25 Mon 19 Sep 2011 16 31 52 Mon 19 Sep 2011 13 24 01 Fri 16 Sep 2011 11 42 53 Fri 02 Sep 2011 16 53 11 Fri 02 Sep 2011 16 39 21 Fri 02 Sep 2011 16 12 40 Fri 02 Sep 2011 16 03 08 Fri 02 Sep 2011 15 40 32 Fri 02 Sep 2011 15 20 08 Fri 02 Sep 2011 13 38 39 Fri 02 Sep 2011 13 31 34 Fri 02 Sep 2011 13 29 35 Fri 02 Sep 2011 13 28 40 Tue 30 Aug 2011 18 14 02 Tue 30 Aug 2011 17 57 52 Tue 30 Aug 2011 17 14 28 Tue 30 Aug 2011 17 08 54 Tue 30 Aug 2011 17 05 11 Tue 30 Aug 2011 17 03 50
118. 17 11 39 Wed 24 Sep 2014 17 00 09 Wed 24 Sep 2014 16 00 54 Wed 24 Sep 2014 14 55 09 Wed 24 Sep 2014 12 50 25 C Up Honeywell Wed 24 Sep 2014 18 28 06 Wed 24 Sep 2014 18 28 00 Wed 24 Sep 2014 18 15 16 Wed 24 Sep 2014 17 39 37 Wed 24 Sep 2014 17 20 23 Wed 24 Sep 2014 17 08 28 Wed 24 Sep 2014 16 29 19 Wed 24 Sep 2014 15 07 48 Wed 24 Sep 2014 14 04 09 Select All copy To cipboara Print Selection Golden Batch Enter Batch License The Golden Batch feature can be used only after providing the license key Click the Enter Batch License button and provide the license Golden Batch This feature that allows you to define a stan dard Golden Batch by creating a pen trace golden batch or identify from an existing list of samples Subsequently compare a sample batch with Golden trace in order to analyze and measure the deviation from the standard manually nominated sample This comparison can be depicted on an intuitive graph or export it to a PDF file The comparison of batches is possible only if the golden batch and batch in comparison have the same logging rate and span The engineering units of the batches to be compared must be same despite the tool does not check for this rule The batch list window now provides additional options to enable the Golden Batch feature 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Golden Batch 167 168 Honeywell NOTE If the Archive Database option is selected t
119. 185 186 Password access table Honeywell GRAPHING FOLDERS RECORDERS DATABASE SERVER IMPORT COMMUNICATIONS SETTINGS Open Rename Delete Print Export data from Graph Events Add Copy Move Save Create Rename Copy Delete Add 4 4 A SPP ADS AD A AE ASS Copy Delete Edit Rec Setup View Events Print Rec Setup SAP AT AT NP NEN SENN NSN SENN NNN EN NN Web Browse Upload Setup Add Change Add Delete Change Disk Import Data lt S FTP Import Data Disk Import Setup FTP Import Setup Add Server Delete Server Change Server Status Window Configure Logging Graph Realtime data E Mail ANNS Comms Admin SINISEN SI SSII SEN ISN NEN I SEINS ANI NSN NSI SSII S II SES N NII EINS SSI N SII SISI SI SIS NINE NEST SI NSIS SISIEN IN NES NI SENS SASI SN NSII SSII SES N NII EINS SSI SEN ANNES Realtime SN 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Audit Manager Honeywell The Audit Manager is only available on TrendServer and is accessed through the password sys tem at Administrator level only The Audit Manager facility allows the Administrator to configure log and view all actions that have occurred within the software Click on the System button on the main screen tool bar and select Passwords Only the Administrator
120. 209 Realtime Comms Logging ircccssvcssccssveceeeesvveee 163 Realtime Communications 11x220 49 162 Comms Server Data Buffer Pen Settings serrie Ea Ea aE E Realtime Graphing Graphing Realtime Data oe 230 Recorder Button vceeccccsecssssesssssssssssssssssssesssesessessvees 49 Recorder Clash List ssis 150 Recorder Configuration X Series 53 Recorder Event Viewer o cccccscsccssssssssssssssessesves 165 Recorder Setup jucsesarditnie he caaenenien 127 Recorder Setup X Series iecccccccsssssssssssssssssssssee 57 Recorder types cn iceeoiautsasnee 3 Rec rders sects deciatenstietin sean Sita une Add a Recorder 2 0 cccscsscsccscscssesssessavciersecsascgeseeceacaes Copy a Recorder Delete a Recorder Edit a Recorder Recording Rename a Graph 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Report Generation Tool Reports sss P Event Effect cicscsstisssisiess Acsscstacasctesstceasarssacaseracersretess Resizing Scales scccscisessrssricvsesceasiassasasenrcnnciassssoviios Retrospectively Graphing a Batch 229 Tee em a E RSA I sienna at Run a Report S Save a Graph ee 214 Save AS a Graph sssrin 214 Scales oy Scales X Series siseicnesccsssssidecisinsayinstesvorenspennsisaesi 78 Schedule Setup seis dita tances 160 Scheduled exscsiccsssssettesivicsicctsscesctsetledesttndeisiin 108 Scheduled Events X Series s 98 Scheduler set up neeccssssscsrorsesesssrse
121. 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Firewall settings on Windows 7 1 Select Advanced settings bg ay gt Control Panel All Control Panel Items Windows Firewall Control Panel H ith Wi a a TORE Help protect your computer with Windows Allow a program or feature Windows Firewall can help prevent hackers or malicious through Windows Firewall through the Internet or a network Change notification settings How does a firewall help protect my computer yl Turn Windows Firewall on or What are network locations off a Restore defaults For your security some settings are managed by y Advanced settings ale i Advanced settings iV Domain networks Troubleshoot my network Networks at a workplace that are attached to a domain Windows Firewall state C Incoming connections B li Active domain networks j Notification state N 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 39 40 Honeywell 2 Click on Inbound Rules gt New Rule Windows Firewall with Advanced File Action View Help e gt AA uA vith Advance Name Group Bu Connection Security Rules 7 Zip File Manager b B Monitoring 7 Zip File Manager CLEARDLG Application CLEARDLG Application M2012 Remote Viewer CommsSrv CommsSrv Communicator Communicator pcom Device Encryption Client Incoming Remo Device Encryption Client Incoming Remo 3 Select Port and click on Next permon
122. 262 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Appendix A Maths Expressions for Honeywell V5 recorders A maths expression is made up of a number of terms A term is the smallest valid com ponent in a maths expression and can be a variable operator or function Certain oper ators and functions have the same effect in a maths expression for example or SQRT will both perform the square root of an operand An operand may be a constant i e a fixed number or a variable The variables that can be used are described below In the following examples P1 Pen 1 equals the result of the maths expres sion shown in the shaded area A pen number P1 will be automatically entered when a pen is selected e An The letter A followed by a number causes the P1 Af reading taken from an analogue input denoted by T the number to be inserted in the maths expres sion In this example the readings from Analogue Input 1 are being displayed on Pen 1 e In The letter T followed by a number causes the P1 11 12 reading taken from a digital input denoted by the E number to be inserted in the maths expression In this example the result of digital input 1 multiplied by digital input 2 is displayed on Pen 9 As digital inputs are read as either 1 or 0 the result of this maths expression will effectively be an AND function i e digital inputs 1 and 2 must both be 1 for the value displayed on Pen 9 to be 1 see Boolean Ex
123. 29 December 2014 UK 201 202 Honeywell Modbus Profile The Profile name box is used to tell TrendServer Pro how to access the data on the recorder This profile is automatically generated from the recorder setup that was downloaded to TrendServer Pro previously The system creates Modbus profiles from an imported setup or logged data and creates a profile including information for pen scale units etc A set of profiles are available for Honeywell modbus devices The profile Name is made up from the Recorder name Type and ID number Once the setup or data has been imported it will display in this window the next time that it is opened no need to restart Comms Server For X amp GR Series recorders drop down the list and select the recorder from the list It will be in the list under the same name as the setup previously saved If any equipment other than X amp GR Series recorders is to use TrendServer Pro to log and graph data then a profile has to be generated A Modbus Profile Tool is now available to aid in setting up Device Profiles for other devices The Comms Server can support up to 96 pens per device NOTE The Recorder ID number is NOT the same as the Slave ID Number A Modbus Profile Tool is now available to aid in setting up Device Profiles for other Honey well devices refer to Appendix G Modbus Communications and Modbus Profile Tool on page 301 Communications Port Choose between Ethernet or RS485 for COM ports
124. 485 interface is connected to is selected in the Communications Port drop down list Everything else is the same there is no IP address to enter and test should still work the same Figure 8 6 New Device Status Y Communications Server f ex Administration h Database Servers ID No Name Mode Stam Channels Active _ IP Address Communication Ports Furnace 1 Realtime 20 xs 100089 x COM1 x COM2 x COM3 x com4 x7 COMS x COME x COM7 x coma New device is added ensure 4 Ethernet the Active box is ticked Destination Source Rate Type Client connections Database logging The status lights will not be active yet This is because no logging or graphs have been set up so no data is being requested To set up Logging go to Logging Configuration on page 206 To start Realtime graphing go to See Realtime Graphing on page 230 Edit a Device Select the Comms port containing the device for editing and right click on the device either in the left or top window The Edit Device Details dialog box will appear showing the configura tion for comms with that device Any fields not greyed out can be changed For Ethernet de vices the IP address can be changed Any device can be made active or inactive from here For active Modbus devices the recorder name and protocol variant can be changed modbus vs Modbus X For an inactive Modbus device the device profile can also be changed For inf
125. 5 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell If it is not installed below screen appears and installation will be aborted Pr Net Framework 3 5 is missing on this machine Please install it before OF TrendManager Suite installation Press OK to abort the installation e Click Next and accept the terms of License Agreement of TrendManager Suite to proceed further Click Next The Choose Destination Location window appears displaying informa tion about the default destination folder If you want to change the default destina tion folder click on Browse to specify a different destination folder Click Next The Language window appears displaying default English language Other languages supported are German and French Choose the appropriate lan guage pack Click Next The Package Selection window appears Package Selection Select TrendM anager Suite software package Click the type of software package you prefer then click Next TrendManager Pro TrendServer Pro Advanced graphical data analysis package for use on a single PC or for distributed use across the network 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 9 Honeywell The TrendManager Suite has three different versions to install 1 TrendViewer This software is a free version that is part of the Recorder software 2 TrendManager Pro This can be purchased and has added features 3 TrendServer Pro This can be purchased and has a comple
126. 5 Add Edit Remove Done Cancel _ In the Recorder Setup box enter the IP Address if known If the IP Address is not known click on Look up the IP address from the recorder name button This will translate the recorder s name to an address Enter a description and click OK The recorder s address will be checked when a download is attempted Click on Look up the IP address from the recorder name to locate the recorder s address from its network name i e myrecorder honeywell com sensing Enter the name and click Find the address will appear if it has been found Click on Use for the recorder to be added into the system If unsuc cessful check the IP address DSN server and Internet connections The other method is to select the Find Device button This will search for all X Series amp GR recorders on the network using their Network ID eg xs nnnnnn where nnnnnn is the recorder s serial number Give a name for the recorder This should be something recognisable all recorders should be given dif ferent names Press OK On pressing OK then Done you will return to the External Import dialog box as above Check that Setup only and from Network are still selected Then drop down the list and select the recorder you have just added The recorder name and IP address are in the list Finally select Import TrendServer Pro will download the setup from the recorder and this wil
127. 50 is the specification that cov ers pyrometric requirements for thermal processing equipment used for heat treatment TrendMan ager Suite has 2 capability modes to match with the mode set in the recorder In process mode sets of timers are configured to inform and alert the user to the status of certain conditions these include Temperature Uniformity Survey TUS System Accuracy Tests Instrument Calibradtion due date Control TC due date and TC Status In TUS mode the recorder is configured to run a survey based on sensor and furnace set tings in the recorder These must be configured in line with AMS2750 specification Refer to the User manual for more details 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Setup Window General Setup This is a list of areas for configuration in the Setup Window General See General button on page 58 Field IO See Field IO on page 65 Pens See Pens on page 77 Comms See Comms on page 86 Event Counters See Events Counters on page 95 Screen See Screen on page 106 Recording See Recording tab on page 108 Transfer See Transfer on page 112 Hardware See Hardware on page 113 Reports See Reports on page 114 Setup Window General Pens Groups Batch Credits Printer Error Alert i C5 Name ral Field 10 Station 2 2 Pens Description Boiler houses 1 4 Comms OE ID Events Counters
128. 52 99 52 87 53 1 52 99 53 21 53 1 53 32 53 21 53 43 53 32 53 53 53 43 53 64 53 53 53 75 53 64 53 85 53 79 53 95 53 85 54 06 53 95 54 16 54 06 54 26 54 16 54 36 54 26 54 46 54 36 54 56 54 46 54 66 54 56 54 76 54 66 54 85 54 76 54 95 54 87 55 05 54 95 55 14 55 05 37 28 31 2 37 28 31 2 37 28 31 2 37 28 31 2 37 28 31 2 37 28 31 2 37 28 31 2 37 28 31 2 37 28 31 2 37 28 31 2 43 35 37 28 43 35 37 28 43 35 37 28 43 35 37 28 43 35 37 28 43 35 37 28 43 35 37 28 43 35 37 28 43 35 37 28 43 35 37 28 49 39 43 35 49 39 43 35 43 39 43 35 49 39 43 35 49 39 43 35 49 39 43 35 Batch Test Note ACTUAL LOGGED DATA a value with a star after it has been logged at the time specified on that line Batch Test Pen Batch Test Pen6 BatchTest Pen5 Batch a Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 29 6100 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 30 6100 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 31 6100 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 32 6100 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 33 6100 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 34 6100 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 35 6100 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 36 6100 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 37 6100 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 38 6100 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 39 6100 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 40 6100 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 41 6100 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 42 6100 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 43 6100 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 44 6100 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 45 6100 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 46 6100 Thu Jan 20 20
129. 9 16 05 36 56 780 2010 09 16 06 19 26 780 2010 09 16 07 01 56 780 2010 09 16 07 44 26 780 Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific gt 253 Honeywell 3 Set the Start Time End Time and Resample interval The Resample interval is the period during which you want to calculate the aggregate For more information please refer to OPC HDA 1 20 Specification by following this link http www opcfoundation org DownloadFile aspx Rl 117 FIGURE 10 20 Set Start Time and End Time for Read Processed oMatrikonOPC HDA Explorer File Server Function View Help Read Processed Hci TrendView Historian r Start Time Localhost s Hei Trendview Historian EFTPHMultitrend SX6 FTP Imported DatatPen 11 3FTP Multitrend SX6 FTP Imported DatatPen 95 l 1 13 2011 7 3 00 00 PM IIFTPIMulitrend Interpolative IIFTPIMultitrend Interpolative Us Avetage data over the resample interval Minimum value in the resample interval Maximum value in the resample interval 254 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell 4 Select the Pen from the Aggregate Item box for the aggregate values re
130. A installation Do you want to proceed creating a new service account user Recommendation Use default service user account same new service account user on all the TMS installations which need data sharing 22 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell d If you have a domain you can also enter the domain user account and password If the domain user account is not found then installation will display the below message x Unable to create the user Please ensure user name and password are compliant as per local security policies e Ifyou have a domain you can also enter the domain user account and password If the domain user account is not found then installation will display the below message TrendManager Suite InstallShield Wizard x Please enter an existing valid User name and Password Note For TrendServer Pro only The user account entered in the above window is used for setting the Communications Service and processes to run under it The password entered will expire as per local security policies after this TrendServer Pro may stop func tioning Please ensure passwords are updated regularly as per your security policies using Security Configuration Utility which comes along with the installation of TrendManager Suite For more details refer to the Security Configuration Utility on page 36 NOTE For TrendServer Pro only The user account entered in the above window is
131. Available Recorders Recorders to download from Recorder Name IP Address Add Recorder Name IP Address Ed Recorder 2 Levels 160 221 36 29 Add Al Recorder 1 Alarms 160 221 36 31 Remove Remove All Select when to perform the download Download from C Single Shot Disk drive C PC Card Interval Delete files on recorder C Selected Days Receipt in log file ia Time Date I Synchronise recorder clock with PC V5 only 14 22 37 24 August 2006 wv EA Connection speed Fast gt 5 mbps bd 0 Days 1 Hours fo Minutes B E ja E Cancel Description User identifiable text for schedule recognition Destination Database Database location where the FTP download will go to Lists available servers and databases Import operation cannot be done on the Archive Database User cannot select Archive databases for FTP scheduler operation Import operation cannot be done on the Archive Database User cannot select Archive databases for FTP scheduler operation 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Add and Remove windows The left window lists the recorders available and the right window lists the recorders that have been selected to download from Use the Add Add All and Remove Remove All buttons to select and deselect recorders Double clicking on a recorder in one window will transfer it to the other window Select when to perform the download Single Import does the download once Interval will down load at
132. C Thermocouple Toggle between Active and Passive Active means it will send out a current to the TC Set to Passive means it takes a reading without sending out a current The T C is wired differently for Active and Passive Burnout e Show Burnout Only available when Type is set to TC Toggle between Upscale and Downscale Burnout TC Type Only available when Type is set to TC Select this for a list of available TC types CJ Comp Only available when Type is set to TC Select this for a list of available CJ Compensation Int Automatic Uses the cold junction sensor in the recorder as a variable refer ence temperature e Ext 0 Deg C Assumes the cold junction is held at 0 C to provide a OmV reference external to the recorder e Ext with Spec Temp Uses a reference junction held at a constant temperature Specify the temperature that the cold junction sensor id to be set at Ext Input Use a thermocouple or resistance thermometer from another channel to measure the cold junction sensor e External Input Only available when CJ Compensation is set to Ext Input Select the input required as an external input e Eng Span Ohms Volts and Amps only Only available when not using Use Pen Scale option This is the highest value of the engineering range and corresponds to the top of the input range Select and enter a value using the on screen keyboard Eng Zero Ohms Volts and Amps only Only a
133. Database and another called June FTP Databases can be added by right clicking on the Local Server icon and then clicking Add Database Enter a database name and description click OK and the new database will ap pear on the list To add a database server you will need the IP address of the device that will be the database server Click the new database server button Enter the IP address and a new database server will be added Add databases to this server as above New Database Server Logging Configuration 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 205 206 Honeywell Logging Configuration This screen configures channels for logging from a device to a database It can be accessed in several ways 1 Use the Configure Database Logging icon at the top left of the screen and select Config ure Logging from the resulting menu 2 Right click on Communication Ports in the left window and select Configure Logging from the resulting menu 3 Right click on the comms port and select Configure Logging from the resulting menu 4 Right click on the device and select Configure Logging from the resulting menu Any of these will display the Logging Configuration box If this screen is selected from either a comms port or a device then the comms port information will already be inserted If the screen is selected from the icon or Communications Port heading then the comms port will need to be assigne
134. Date Time will activate a drop down menu to select a time span Batch Name will activate a drop down menu to select batches to view From a specified batch name To a specified Batch name Device ID is only active when the batch button is selected from the main tool bar not the recorder tool bar From the main tool bar the list of batches are for all recorders Device ID will activate a drop down menu with all recorders listed for that database Export Events button will produce a dialog box where copy of the Batch data can be exported and saved as an Excel spreadsheet Figure 7 9 on page 178 The Find section is for searching through text in Event Markers for specific Batch informatin Make a selection from the left hand box for the type of batch information you are searching for All Name Description Comment User ID User Data or Lot No Then enter the text you want to search for in the right hand window The search will start on the top line downwards Select whether to search Up or Down the list then press the Find button You may use a barcode reader to enter the same batch infor mation as used on the factory floor For more details on Setting up Events Event Markers Counters E mailing and Viewing Events see See Events System on page 136 To find out more about how events can be graphed see Graphing Events on page 223 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 177 Honeywell Exporting data to a spreadsheet 178 Available only
135. Diagnostics gt Comms This screen will help to identify which area to focus on if the recorder connections are not doing what you expected 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 89 90 Honeywell Web tab The Web browse function is enabled disabled from the recorder Select this to enable and allow the recorder to be browsed on a web page Internet access is required The Web function is password pro tected if passwords are enabled For web browsing information refer to the recorder user manual The recorder must have the Remote View option active which is a firmware credit option Email tab Set up this email menu in order to send emails for the following When an Alarm is triggered As an Effect of an Event occurring such as e Alarms In to Out of or Acknowledged e Totaliser Start Stop or Reset e Digital Inputs On Off or State change e TC Burnout on a specific Analogue Input channel e Scheduled Events Once Interval Specific days Month End For more information on setting up events that will send emails see Events Counters on page 95 Setup Window Modbus Web Email snrp TCP IP Network Admin FTP Peer 2Peer General Server Name Server Name Templates X ami Field 10 Authentication M Subject Pen 1 Temperature Username User Name Message Body P1 7 P1 v P Password er User Address phil d gap undergrour Events Counters R m Recipients Sen 1 phil d gap
136. Event Causes AMS2750 Timer wo ccccccecccsccesesccsesscscssesesssseeseaee 98 AMS2750 TUS 1 61 cae ner a a eaea a ee eed Hot Button woe ceccccccececsececssseseseees SYSTEM roria EE RRG E eters User Action eccerre Event Causes X Series 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Event Chart Controls ssis 209 Event Counter Setup u 105 143 Counter as an Effect Counters as a Cause Event E mail 0 Viewing Counters oo eeeeseseseeseeeseeneeenes Event Effects Change Chart Speed Enter Replay Screen Exit Replay Screen Event Effects X Series sccccsccssssssssssssssssssssssssees 100 Event Marker Setup sssi 139 Event Viewerf sssri Evyents Filter sarinehaieicacstshrcraienadnusdenet Eyents System sssrin Event Marker Setup Marker tables Setting Up Events ciasestscieadecescisieiescedecseheiseensvetacseate Events Graphing Events User added text o crecccsscsssssssssssessees 226 Events X Series Event Causes Event Effects Scheduled Events User Counters sererai Sin Exit Replay Screen Vent EPC Cts gc ss chfsccssdscedeaeeessactdassiaesheeteaieeesseetandes 105 Export Settings sssri 179 Exporting Data to a Spreadsheet 178 Extra Pens gscsseosenioenaninieuna ona 130 Extra Pens X Series vicceccccccccccssssessssstsstesteseees 56 F Fail Safe senrenraeeaneni nema 136 Fail Safe X Series oececccssecscsssesssssssssssssessssssssseeee 70 Fi
137. FIGURE 6 3 Network Server and Client Server recorders Client Server Network Figure 6 3 shows a Network Server PC at the top a recorder acting as both a server and a client in the middle and a string of client recorders at the bottom A recorder can be set up to be a server anda client Setting it as both means this recorder will synchronise time with the network server But will also allow other recorders to time sync with it This saves many recorders trying to time sync with the net work server TCP IP tab Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol A protocol for communication between computers recorders and other devices Static IP Tick to enable This is an IP Address which is the same every time With this feature Off the recorder s IP address is created dynamically using a DHCP Server with this feature On the IP address can be fixed by entering a known available IP address below IP Address Available when Static IP is On This is an identification address for commu nications between two devices The IP Address identifies a specific recorder When a recorder setup is loaded the IP address will be transferred Sub Net Mask Available when Static IP is On Acts as a filter when identifying an IP address Gateway Available when Static IP is On A configuration parameter transmitted to each network device 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell DNS WINS MDNS Set to Automatic cli
138. For more information See Batch Mode Event Markers on page 142 Enter text into the Marker Text box and add the embedded parameters tag if required using the drop down lists marked Control Type Variable Type Pens and Label 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 139 140 Honeywell FIGURE 6 17 L Label P Pens Build up the Marker Text that will be added to the 2 Pen number graph to mark an Event U Units Marker Setup Page Select the required message from the list enter text below M Marker gt adding tags using the lists and add tay button assage Marker Text temperature equal lt PP1 gt lt PIU gt and pressure equals lt PP2 gt ILP2U _ ar z ee ee A Control Type _ Variable Type Label ss os a Label xe P3ns bd Pan 2 Ea Dits bi Embedded parameter tags The Marker Text can be built up using combinations of user entered text and the embedded parameter tags Figure 6 17 shows an example of Marker text this is how it is broken down Temperature equals lt PP1 gt lt LPU gt and pressure equals lt PP2 gt lt LP2U gt Temperature equals lt PP1 gt this tag is telling the system to process the information on Peni and add it to the marker lt LP1U means add the Pen 1 as a label to the marker plus the units in which it is measuring e g sec onds inches or C The second part reads pressure equals lt PP2 gt this is t
139. For more information please refer to OPC HDA 1 20 Specification by following this link http www opcfoundation org Download File aspx Rl 117 e Anonymous Interactive and All Users access restricted for the TMS OPC HDA Server i e TrendView Historian Hence all users may not be able to access it e Only Local Domain users who are added to user group TMSApplicationAccessGroup on both machines where TrendServer Pro and OPC HDA client resides are given access to TMS OPC HDA Server e f the above step is not followed OPC Client s may get Access Denied error e For Matrikon OPC Client OPC ENUM DCOM object can be given security permis sions for the TrendManager Suite Users 2 TrendView Historian does not support Alarms or Events TrendView Historian is only for view ing historical data and no support is provided for annotations interface 3 You need to provide start as well as end time to retrieve historical data Exception is Asynchronous methods ReadRaw ReadProcessed AdviseRaw AdviseProcessed where there is no need to provide end time 4 To access historical data the start time should be less than end time 5 TrendView Historian server will simply return No Implementation for any not supported inter faces and their related functionality to OPC HDA client 6 There is no support for insert replace of any data in to the TrendView database server 7 TrendView Historian does not support ReadAtT
140. IP address from the setup dialog are used to get data from the first input register in the modbus device profile selected For the device The data is retrieved using both Modbus and Modbus X By programming a set value on the first channel of the device it is possible to confirm the specific protocol that the device is using Modbus slave address 1 IP Address 160 221 36 31 Modbus profile Recorder ID 1 64 628510 25 532473 0 000028 24 152302 6 706206E 016 4 714286 0 000000 37 500000 0 000000 25 000010 1 203979E 011 45 204956 5 910645E 022 86 447815 0 000000 0 000000 Find Device This can be used to find X Series and GR recorders on the network It uses the recorder s unique Network ID to identify them and populate this list Select your device from the list and press the Use Selection button to insert the recorder details into the Add Device box Locate Device Select device to connect to from the list below Pump Station 1 xs 100061 160 221 36 22 Pump Station 12 xs 100062 160 221 36 56 Avon Creek west xs 100075 160 221 36 76 Avon Creek north C Furnace 1 xs 100089 160 221 36 33 When you get back to the Add Device Detail Box press OK The recorder you have set up will now be added to the device list 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 203 204 Honeywell Add a Device via RS485 Setting up the Comms Server for Modbus on RS 485 follows the same procedure but the PCs comm port that the
141. Input Output 1 to 8 16 Digital Input Output 1 to 16 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 55 56 Honeywell eZtrend wae Channel Slot position Card type numbers Slot A 3 Analogue Inputs 1to3 6 Analogue Inputs 1 to6 Slot B optional 3 Analogue Inputs 9 to 11 card 6 Analogue Inputs 9 to 14 Slot G 4 Relay Output 1to4 8 Relay 2 Digital In 1 to 8 8 Digital Input Output 1 to 8 DR Graphic Slot position Card type Channel numbers Slot A 8 Analogue In 1to 8 Pulse Inputs 1to4 Slot B 8 Analogue In 9to 16 Pulse Inputs 9to 12 4 Analogue Out 9to 12 8 Relay 2 Digital In 1to8 To fit the Analogue Input option card Slot B or a Relay Alarm or Digital IO card into the eZtrend recorder you will require an expansion card to interface to the recorder Extra Pens Extra Pens is an option that is available using the Firmware credit system in the recorder Extra pens can be set up here to reflect the recorder setup If a setup is going to be transferred to a recorder ensure that the same amount of extra pens are available in the recorder These extra pens are used mainly for displaying maths functions and the totaliser Extra pens can also be used as Comms variable pens When the Hardware details have been entered click on the OK button This will save the new recorder details and the Setup Window is displayed AMS2750 Mode AMS2750 is an option that can be enabled in the credit system AMS27
142. Input Text Message ssssessssscsecsscssssccscvscvecscessessessesseseessessesssssessessessessessesseaseaseaseasees Analogue Input Value Communications Input Pen Valles gt eera E E N N Weedon eE Appendix G Modbus Communications and Modbus Profile Tool 301 TrendManager Suite and Modbus communications sssesesesesesesoesesecesosseoseesee 301 The Modbus Profile Tool ssscsscssssscsscssssscsssssessncssesssssssnesesssssessesseseesners 302 Installation aiai aoier A E E E R G 302 Getting Started Era R E E E EE E vaasdaveacdasseeasen 303 Transferring Modbus profiles between systems ssesesesseseoesoseseeossesecososecoeoesee 308 Comms Server and Modbus profile s Appendix I Batch Report Tool 313 Batch Report Tool Overview e ssssesessesessossesoesessesossesoesesoosessosoesossesossossesossee 313 Open Batch Rep rt Tool sicvssusevessisccetescousatvsescscssaceduavsetensevesveeecoescsee tocebeopeastecddeee s 313 Generate Report sesscscesescessesesssecsescsssesessossassessetsesssissesesovtsesesp secon sessonsaddossenssssacsers 315 Sample Bath Repoti Mosesin aR E RER s 320 Index 323 viii 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell NOTICE OF LICENSED SOFTWARE HONEYWELL END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT This End User License Agreement Agreement is a legal contract between Honeywell Inter national Inc acting through its Honeywell Process Solutions business having an office at 1860 West Rose Garden Lane
143. Low offset so High Eng 100 0 Highoffset 5 0 Comp Type Linearisation Tables Ohms Volts and Amps only Select a table from the drop down list if required See Linearisation tab on page 71 Use Pen Scale Toggle On and Off this is enabled by default Analogue defaults to the corresponding Pen eg A1 will default to Pen 1 If you change A1 to use another pen scale eg Pen 3 you must go into Pen 3 and change the maths to A1 This will ensure that Pen Scale 3 will display A1 input With this enabled the Engineering Zero and Span is the same as the pen scale Disable this and the Engineering Zero and Span will not reflect the pen scale This is not available when using Linearisation Tables Units This is the Units of Measurement for each input Select and enter a value Max 13 characters Label Select and enter an identification label for the input Select and enter a label Max 15 characters SQRT Extract Toggle On and Off The Square root extraction in the analogue input is used to linearise certain sensors that have a non linear output for example in the calcula tion of flow So when you check the Square root extraction in the Analogue input section it carries out the following calculation It ratios the analogue input range that you set to 0 to 1 So any sensor input is represented by a number from 0 to 1 We then take the square root We then re ratio the result back to the user set range Comp Type sel
144. Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Good Non specific Honeywell Get Server Status 1 Follow the steps below to retrieve the Server status 2 Connect to the OPC TrendView Historian server 3 Right click on Hci TrendView Historian Server Select Server Status and the Server Status Dialog will open FIGURE 10 23 Select Server Status f MatrikonOPC HDA Explorer Dj xj File Server Function View Help Hci TrendView Historian cS ae By alls ae Se Ss s E Localhost dici TrendView Historian Disconnect Add Items Server Status Right click on Hci TrendView Historian to get the Server Status Dialog 4 Server Status dialog will open FIGURE 10 24 Server Status Dialog lol x VUMatrikonOPC HDA Explorer File Server Function View Help HecTeendviewHistonan SSI Yds SL SalSod Sy oaoa lt x s Hei TrendView Historian Server Status The historian is running Statussting n CunentTime OVI7711113414 S Stat Time nazm n232 MajrVersion e n Mina Veson 0 2 Ot CS BuldNumbe jo 888 8 tst S S VendorInfo Honeywell SSCS MaxRetVals 20000 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 257 Honeywell Disconnecting Server 1 Right click on Hci Trendview Historian and Click Disconnect or click Disconnect to dis con
145. O Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Time Factor Normal Totaliser only Time factor Totaliser adds a value once per second so you need to Divide by this factor For example If your flow meter is in units second Time factor is 1 If your flow meter is in units minute the unit will DIVIDE by the time factor in this case 60 so every 1 second 1 60th of the unit is added If your flow meter is in units hour the unit will DIVIDE by the time factor in this case 3600 so every 1 second 1 3600th of the unit is added Unit Factor Normal Totaliser only The Totaliser adds the engineering unit from the instrument onto the total after the time factor is applied You then need to Divide by the unit factor For example If your flow meter is in litres time and you want to Totalise in litres there is 1 litre in 1 litre so your unit factor would be 1 so every 1 second 1 1 unit is added If your flow meter is in litres time and you want to Totalise in Cubic meters there are 1000 litres in 1 cubic meter so your unit factor would be 1000 so every 1 sec ond 1 1000th of a unit is added No Backflow Normal Totaliser only If the flow reading should go into a negative value eg The flow meter has been switched off and No Backflow is inactive the totaliser will subtract from the total value When No Backflow is active any negative values are ignored and the total value is held while the flow meter is off until
146. Pen 2 Units Recorder Minitrend GR ID 0001 Serial Number 999103 Pen Pen 1 Units 4 Export Progress Start Export 2 Click on the Settings button to produce the Export Settings window which is a list of default settings that will determine how the data is displayed on the spreadsheet for a quick export 3 Click on Ok if all the settings are ok or modify as necessary and then click on Ok Click on Reset if you want to preserve old settings or on Cancel to keep as it is 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell s Export Settings Export Data Sample Period Same Sheet Graph Res Pen Per Sheet C Actual Full Res Pad Empty Cells User Defined No Padding 1 0 Secs Date Time Format Export Values Standard Max Min C Lotus 1 2 3 Average File Formats Export Events Local Format V Export Long Filenames Export with Pen Traditional DOS Seperate Sheet Send To CSV Delimiter l Excel CSV Pens Order Ascending Descending Export Settings Export Data Same Sheet Exports data for all Pens to one spread sheet Pen Per Sheet Exports data for each pen to an individual spreadsheet Pad Empty Cells Displays all the data for the pen with the fastest sampling speed and pad the empty cells with the previous reading for the pens with slower sampling speeds Padding will commence when the first reading of the slowest
147. Pen report Average Value prave x y Z Gets the Pen Average value for a report x pen number 1 to 96 y period 1 hour 2 day 3 week 4 month z report set 1 current 2 previous completed Pen report Totaliser Value prtot x y z Gets the Pen Totaliser value for a report x pen number 1 to 96 y period 1 hour 2 day 3 week 4 month z report set 1 current 2 previous completed Power Relay PWRREL Returns the status of the fixed power relay Pstv PSTVx Get the persisted Global variable x Persisted global variables maintain their value through a power cycle There is a maximum of 50 per sisted global variables PRC PRC Power Relay Counter Pulse Inputs Al slots HPULn Get the Pulse frequency from the Pulse card n 1 to 48 25kHz max Pulse Inputs DIO Slots LPULn Get the Pulse frequency from the Digital Input card when in Pulse mode n 1 to 48 1kHz Max RT Compensation RTCOMPn Get RT Compensation value for channel n 1 to 48 Units mV RT Calibration RTCALn Get RT Calibration value for channel n 1 to 48 Units mA Slave Comms Variable SCV 1 1 1 Returns the value for the Modbus Slave Comms GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 273 274 Honeywell Table 13 7 Maths Variable Table Maths Variables Syntax Description Totaliser Tn Get Totaliser value n 1 to 96 UC1 to UC16 UC1 User counters 1 to 16 USB1 free storage spac
148. Relays Relay number Tag State text Totals Counters Sub type Label Event Event number Alarm Alarm number Digital Digital number User Counters and sub types marked are not available on the eZtrend V5 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 141 Batch Mode Event Markers For Batch Mode the Event markers 10 to 20 have pre defined control characters set up for controlling batch information These can be edited and changed adding information for each marker Markers 1 to 9 default as blank markers but can be used for Batch Control Honeywell ener Control Function Description Number Character P Places a marker to Start the batch This MUST 10 MS Start Batch be followed by a space and then the Batch name or number 11 IE End Batch Places a marker to End the batch 12 P Pause Places a marker and Pauses the Batch 13 R Resume Places a marker and Resumes a Paused batch 14 IA Abort Places a marker and Aborts the batch 15 A Add text to Comment Places a continuation marker to add a user defined text to a Comment Used to identify when a Batch Name or Number Rename a Batch Name or ee 16 B needs to be renamed as an individual marker or Number as a part of a Marker Places a Marker on its own plus a user defined 17 D Batch Description Batch Description or can be added as a part of a Marker Places a Marker on its own plus a us
149. SIDE x y z is not within the ranges of y and z P1 will equal 1 when x is outside the OUTSIDE Outside range ranges of y and z P1 will return 0 if x a is not outside the ranges of y and z P1 OUTSIDE x y z The value of P1 equals the Sin of A1 SIN Sine A1 is in radians P1 SIN A1 2pi radians in every 360 C The value of P1 equals the cosine of A1 COS Cosine A1 is in radians _ P1 COS A1 2pi radians in every 360 C The value of P1 equals the tangent of A1 TAN Tangent A1 is in radians P1 TAN A1 2pi radians in every 360 C F2C F2C Converts Fahrenheit to Celsius P1 F2C P2 A C2F C2F Converts Celsius to Fahrenheit P1 C2F P2 P1 is equal to the indexed analogue input A Indexed analogue 1411 If 11 1 P1 A2 u If 1 O P1 A1 P1 A 1 l1 TEREE P1 is equal to the indexed digital input of l Indexed digital input 1 O1 If O1 is 1 P1 12 P1 I 1 01 P1 is equal to the indexed relay output of o i a a 1 A1 If A1 O P1 01 P1 O 1 A1 EVAL Evaluate Returns 0 if x O otherwise returns 1 P1 EVAL x A P1 displays the rolling average of Rolling Average ae X analogue input eg A1 RAV munevonee y number of samples Max 500 P1 RAV x y Z z sample interval ms P1 equals the Delay of input A1 number DELAY Delayed value of samples 10 every second 1000 ms P1 DELAY A1 10 1000 266 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 Decembe
150. Screen tab Brightness Control and Screen Saver Settings e Charts tab Set up the chart speeds in three categories Fast Medium and Slow Screen tab Setup the recorder s screen configuration Brightness Control Adjust the brightness of the screen using the instant brightness slider Default screen brightness is 80 Adjustable between 10 and 100 of full brightness Move the slider to adjust the brightness Screen Saver Settings Configure the screen display and Screen Saver functions The default state for the Screen Saver is dis abled The Screen Saver function helps to reduce backlight wear When active the back light is off and nothing on the display is visible The screen saver will not function in Setup Menus or in test mode e Enabled Tick to enable e Timeout Mins Only available when the Screen Saver function is active This is how long the Screen Saver will display on the screen Programmable between 1 and 720 min utes in software when disabled the screen will remain on permanently enter 0 to disable e Saver Type Only available when the Screen Saver function is active This is set to Nor mal 106 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Setup Window Dim Saver fuse Saver Brightr v Saver Level 50 DimSaver Only available when the Screen Saver function is active Dim Saver will help to increase the life of the backlight and lower the screen brightness for night time use Us
151. Select the type of firewall rule to create Steps Rule Type What type of rule would you like to create Protocol and Ports Action Program Profi Rule that controls connections for a program Name Port Rule that controls connections for a TCP or UDP port Predefined BranchCache Content Retrieval Uses HTTP Rule that controls connections for a Windows experience Custom Custom rule 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell 4 Select TCP Port specify port no 135 and click on Next N a ce Protocol and Ports Specify the protocols and ports to which this rule applies Rule Type Does this rule apply to TCP or UDP Protocol and Ports TCP Action UDP Does this rule apply to all local ports or specific local ports 5 Select Allow the connection and click on next E errearen Action Specify the action to be taken when a connection matches the conditions specified in the rule Steps Rule Type What action should be taken when a connection matches the spe Protocol and Ports M Allow the connection This includes connections that are protected with IPsec as well Allow the connection if it is secure This includes only connections that have been authenticated b will be secured using the settings in IPsec properties and rules i Rule node Customize Block the connection 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 41
152. Setup this is the same as for Importing from a directory except that when importing data via FTP you will have a choice of New data or all data The All function will import all the data in the recorder s memory to the external device port The New function will just import any new data since the last import was made GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 157 158 Honeywell re Select type of import A Pen data and events C Setup only Database Location SLocal Server T est Source Location From Directory e From Network v Set up General options V Auto graph the data I Make a log file in the program directory r Trend iew options Connection speed Fast gt 5 mbps J X Trend iew Y5 FTP options Download from Disk drive C PC Card Delete data on recorder on successful completion NOTE Hit F1 for help on using FTP Each recorder is identified by its name and a unique internet number known as an IP address Internet Protocol Address For more details on IP Addresses see your IT system administrator If the recorders and TrendServer are on the same local network a number can be selected from a range of pre allocated numbers Three buttons will become available Set up Add Edit or Remove the recorder you wish to import from See From Net work Setup on page 159 e Batch See Batch set up on page 160 e Schedule The Schedule button is for adding this recorder to a time date s
153. TrendManager Suite Software for V5 X Series and GR Series Recorders SOFTWARE COMMS SERVER i ie ETHERNET TCPIP d RS485 MODBUS ee R 7 A p r z i Bowl PULL E E E V PC Application Software Configuration Analysis Tool plus Database Management and Communications Server Honeywell 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 iii NOTICE OF LICENSED SOFTWARE wessssssssscssssssccssssscccssssccsssscsecsssssssssccssessoeeees ix Year 2000 Compliance Statement cccsccsscssscsscssscessssscsesssssesseesessseesesens xvi Welcome to the TrendManager Suite 1 Introduction to the TrendManager Software Suite 3 IMtrOdUctiONn scccscsssssscssccescesscsscscsssesssesessesenesessssssesssesssssssesssessessesssesseessesseeees 3 Software Options ccccscsccssssssscessssssscssscsssescsscssssssescsessscscessssessnessssessessesees 3 Installation 7 Installation sscccccssssssvsseesvsescessscscsssscesesssssssensssossossessssnsessssnseesscessesssessesseeees InstallationTrendManager Suite TrendManager Suite User Groups after Installation sssesessssssssssseeseseeees 15 MiSTatiOn lt scsscisccsscctesatassensescccosssiecetsdescdecesasectscosusedSedediensbonacssusedcescaceseboesantecess 20 Migration of TrendManager Suite ou escesssssssscssessesessescsecsscenceneees 20 Post migration ch
154. Tue 30 Aug 2011 16 37 35 Tue 30 Aug 2011 11 35 52 Tue 30 Aug 2011 11 35 52 Tue 30 Aug 2011 10 32 41 Tue 30 Aug 2011 10 32 41 Mon 29 Aug 2011 15 45 24 Thu 11 Aug 2011 11 44 38 Column Config Show Events off C On Settings Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell There are two Batch Report options 1 Generate Report on page 315 2 Settings Button on page 316 Generate Report To generate Golden Batch report and Comparrison Batch reports see Generate Report on page 176 Registration When user select Generate Report If user has NOT registered for TrendManager Batch report then Registration dialog will pop up as shown below Once Registration is done below dialog will be popped up Register Batch Report Document Name Path testbatch 8pens_ 12 04 10 20 16 21 C Users E528446 Documents Batch Repor Comment Browse Cancel Launch PDF on finish Batch Report details i Default report name will be Batch Name _ BatchReport_StartTime ii Default path will be UserDirectory Batch Report This can be changed by selecting Browse ii User can put comments in Comment edit box which will be displayed in PDF report as Additional comments After putting all above information a report will be generated with default settings from start time to end time of batch and report time will be for 5 minutes Currently sample 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 315
155. UTE GOODS LOSS OF PROFITS OR THE LIKE REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION WHETHER IN CONTRACT TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE STRICT PRODUCT LIABILITY OR ANY OTHER LEGAL OR EQUITABLE THEORY EVEN IF HONEY WELL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES IN NO EVENT WILL HONEYWELL S AGGREGATE CUMULATIVE LIABILITY FOR ANY CLAIMS ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THIS AGREEMENT EXCEED THE AMOUNTS PAID BY LICEN SEE FOR THE LICENSED SOFTWARE THE LIMITED WARRANTY LIMITED REMEDIES WARRANTY DISCLAIMER AND LIMITED LIABILITY ARE FUNDAMENTAL ELEMENTS OF THE BASIS OF THE BARGAIN BETWEEN HONEYWELL AND LICENSEE HONEYWELL WOULD NOT BE ABLE TO PROVIDE THE SOFTWARE WITHOUT SUCH LIMITATIONS 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK xiii Honeywell 12 GENERAL 12 1 Governing Law and Forum This Agreement shall be governed in all respects by the laws of the United States of America and the State of New York without regard to con flicts of law principles The parties agree that the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods is specifically excluded from application to this Agreement All disputes arising under this Agreement shall be brought exclusively in the state or federal courts in New York New York as permitted by law Licensee consents to the personal juris diction of the above courts 12 2 Injunctive Relief It is understood and agreed that notwithstanding any other provi sions of this Agreement breach of the pro
156. a 2 minute period for stability to be achieved X defaults to 0 5 Dec C Refer to the User manual for more details This time is determined by how you set up the stability parameters whether you base it on time or the degree temperature variation The tolerance hysteresis of the soak stability detection can be adjusted to suite the user this defines how stability is determined in the soak Stability detect is measured in 3 ways 1 Timeout see below 2 Automated detection see below 3 Manual stability the user can determine when stability has been achieved and can use the manual override button on the TUS screen to register stability 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 75 Honeywell Setup Window Time foo Comms TO Events Counters Timer Enable Default is off Check this to enable the Stability Detect Timer Time default 10 mins Timer based stability the system will be deemed stable after the defined period of time that all TC s remain within tolerance from the point at which they all enter the soak band Auto Enable Default is off Automatic stability Stability will deemed to be achieved when all TC s are within tolerance band required for soak for class and no TC continues to change in temperature by more than a user defined degree step between readings Degree Change This becomes enabled when Auto Enable is activated Default is 0 5 degree over 2 mins looks for an amount of temperature dri
157. a disk or PC card is X full X user defined entry Disk Card Out When a disk or PC card is removed from system Totaliser Start When totaliser is started Totaliser Stop When totaliser is stopped or paused Totaliser Reset When a totaliser is reset Digital Inputs high A digital input has been applied Digital Inputs low A digital input has been removed Relay Outputs high A relay output has been closed Relay Outputs low A relay output has been opened Thermocouple O C Check if thermocouple has reported as open circuit Screen Change When a swap to another screen is generated Manual Mark On Chart When a manual mark on chart is received Scheduled Triggers an event at a specific time Start up Trigger at recorder start up Data Flushed Logging Event data has been successfully flushed to disk ASCII serial data When serial data is received through RS232 or RS485 Web Activate Triggered manually from web page 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 291 292 Not available on the eZtrend V5 Honeywell Table 15 Effect Honeywell V5 recorders only Method Description Mark On Chart Cause a mark on chart Logging Control logging starts stops or start logging and discard current data in memory Start Totaliser Start totaliser Stop Totaliser Stop totaliser Reset Totaliser Reset totaliser back to min value or 0 Screen Change Automatically swap to another screen S
158. a if this option has been selected Realtime graphing across Time Zones Realtime graphed data appears from the right hand edge of the screen and scrolls to the left The right hand edge represents the time Now If an event or a spike occurs it will hap pens at the same moment you see it appear on the graph The time may not be the same as the date line shows on the graph The recorder has to be synchronised with the PC through the same Comms Server Retrieving data via another Comms Server may give a different time setting If the user is accessing data from a recorder in a different time zone the time displayed on the graph will be the time set for the PC Example User UK1 wishes to access data using the software on his PC in the United Kingdom the data is on a recorder in Washington D C USA The Comms Server in the US is synchronised at US time with the recorder User UK1 sees an event occurs at 4 00pm UK time on the graph it would actually have happened at 11 00 am on the recorder in Washington D C The graph will show the time lines as for real UK time Data logged to disk will store the time as displayed on the PC and the recorder once they have been synchronised For specific help click on any part of the graph and press the F1 key on your keyboard to display the related help files 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Graph Pen Data Source Viewer Select this icon from the left side of the graph to
159. aces Logging When enabled set the Logging Mode to Normal or Alarm Alarm is the logging rate for this pen when it goes into an alarm state Select which removable media the data is to Log To If the Logging type is set to None logging will be disabled Choose between Continuous logging or Fuzzy logging For more details see See Fuzzy Logging on page 130 The Logging Rate is available for Continuous logging only Specific intervals can be fixed using the Concise option There are three Logging methods to choose from Sample Average or MaxMin Sample will log the actual value of the last sampled reading Average will take an average of all the samples taken since the last log and MaxMin will log the Maximum and Minimum values since the last log Fuzzy Logging Fuzzy Logging has been developed as a secure data storage technique which has self teaching data storage algorithm so the recorder stores data at a variable rate to match the process being monitored For more information see See Appendix C Fuzzy Logging on page 287 When Fuzzy Logging is selected the set up screen will change A Base Sample Rate is required this is the rate at which the Input signal is checked Specific intervals for logging can be fixed using the con cise button To keep logging to a minimum optimise disk space and to have more accurate waveforms tick the Autofit box Advanced Users Only Fine tuning Band A Set up a percentage by which the input
160. ach after the specified segment duration Click Add Segment 6 Click the Add Segment button to create a trace that you want 7 Click Save Pen The Golden trace can be viewed from View the Golden Batch List on page 172 NOTE e Reset All Clears all data entered in the window e Remove Segment Removes all segments which appear after the selected segment Example The following screen provides an example that shows a newly created golden trace 0 Days 0 Hrs 0 Mins 1C 0 Days 0 Hrs 0 Mins 1C 0 Days 0 Hrs 0 Mins 1C 0 Days 0 Hrs 0 Mins 1C 0 Days 0 Hrs 0 Mins 1C Segment Duration 00 00 10 HH MM SS Set Point IV Initial Value SP Set Point SD Segment Duration DD HH MM SS 170 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Nominate as Golden Batch This utility allows you to nominate from an existing batch data from a recorded as a Golden Batch Nominate as Golden Batch You can select any one of the following methods to nominate the graph Make sure that the pens inside the batch have same log rate and span e Nominating a single pen as a Golden Batch from the selected batch e Nominating the average of all Pens The average of all the pens values is calculated at each instance of time e Nominating Max min data from all Pens by calculating the maximum and minimum values from all the Pens at each instance of time To nominate a Golden Batch from existing list 1 Inthe left pane
161. age 114 Update Tabular Readings Triggering this event causes the tabular display to update and show the latest set of readings e Enter Replay Screen An event can be set so that the effect is to change the screen to enter the Replay Screen e Exit Replay Screen An event can be set so that the effect is to change the screen so that the recorder will Exit the Replay Screen e Change Chart Speed An event can be set so that the effect is to change the Change Chart Speed The speed of the chart can be set in the Sub Type section for Fast 6000mm h Medium 120mm h or Slow 10mm h When that event gets triggered selected chart speed will be set to the current active screen Counters Up to 16 User Counters are available and can be used as a part of the Events system User Counters can be set up as a Cause or an Effect of an Event Setup a User Counter Select the next available Counter number e Enabled In the Counter menu tick to Enable e Name Name the counter for ease of identification Start At Enter the number at which you want the counter so Start At e Rollover At Enter the number at which you want the counter to Rollover At The default maximum Rollover value is 3 3e 38 Once a User Counter is setup it has to be assigned something to count eg as a part as an Event See Events tab on page 95 Preset Markers Set up marker text that can be used to mark the chart as a part of an Event Effect or manu
162. age box The selected Report Sample Period is 5 Secs which exceeds the allowable Report Sample Period For the current report the minimum acceptable rate is 49 Secs Click Yes to generate the report at this rate or click No to abort the generation of the report or to select a different rate See Product manual for additional details of acceptable report sample rates Refer to the table below to check minimum allowed sample period for different number of pens Note The maximum number of pens in a batch supported by the Batch Reporting Tool is 32 2 Hours 60 Mins 45 Mins 30 Mins 7200 3600 2700 1800 191 165 175 150 2 Batch Start time and Batch End time Batch start and end time will show the time for which batch has run Initially application will show actual Batch start and End time User can change the start and end time to generate TMS batch report for specific period E g If user want to generate 2 Hours of report user can set the start and end batch time accordingly in above batch report settings dialog Now Batch report will be generated with above settings 3 Batch Report scale Mainly there are three types of scales i Original with Original scale option Batch report will show data as per the scale limit of that Pen 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 317 318 Honeywell e g in a batch there 2 pens pen 1 scale is 0 to 1
163. agement Tool software is a separate software application that is pro vided for use with TrendServer Pro It provides the user with the ability to back up sort archive move and copy the data stored by TrendManager Pro and TrendServer Pro software From the DVD the Database Management Tool will automatically install Follow the on screen instructions Enter your organisation and code code found on the DVD case From the three types of installations Typical is recommended The software will install into C Program Files TrendManager Suite Database Tool 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 43 44 Honeywell Modbus Profile Tool The Modbus Profile Tool can be used to edit existing Modbus profiles or create new Mod bus profiles It can also be used to export Modbus profiles from one system so that they can be imported into another system It is generally aimed at enabling the setup of Modbus communications with non Honeywell devices that support floating point input registers in their Modbus memory map The Modbus Profile Tool is available with TrendServer Pro It will install automatically and can be activated from the same location as TrendServer Pro software The Modbus Profile Tool can be opened by going to Start gt Programs gt Trendview Recorders Modbus Profile Tool The Modbus Profile Editor window will open with empty files ready for a new profile to be created For more information see The Modbus Profile Tool on page
164. ail function Recipients only available when the Email function has been enabled Select from a list of email recipients Email addresses and Server names must be entered in Email tab on page 90 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 115 116 Honeywell Print Set to a tick to enable the Print function The printer settings must be set up before this feature will operate see Printer tab on page 62 Export Device Select from a list of options if you require your report to be exported to an external media device or select Do not export The removable media device needs to be fitted to the recorder when the report is run and have enough memory available Run a Report Once the report details have been completed in the report menu you can run your report either manually or by using the Event system Fora manual report see Reports Process in the User manual e Fora report triggered using the Event system see Event Effects on page 100 Pen Report Information Currently pens provide real time values max min and totals Reports need some history of these values to be maintained so a set of period based data is maintained The periods being an hour day week and month The recorder builds up the current hour day week and month ly data and keeps the previous completed hour day week and month stored At anytime it is possible to access the current hour day week or month for Max Min Average
165. al added from the process screen as a Mark on Chart The mark on chart functionality has been extended to include the use of 20 separate preset markers With some markers configured when using mark on chart the user has the option of starting with blank text the previously entered text or one of the preset markers Preset mark ers are also used in the Mark on chart effect and the Alert system effect See Error Alert tab on page 64 To add text to a marker select the next available marker and enter the text via the on screen keypad 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 105 Honeywell Time Sync This provides Time Synchronisation on recorders on a Digital Input Enabled Select the tick to enable Time Sync e Trigger When recorder receives the Digital Input and there is a state change i e On or OFF then the recorder time will be synchronized to the nearest hour e Digital Input only on Digital Input configured as pulse input Choice the input pulse through one of the channels supported 1 to 4 Time sync will only happen on the config ured channel when digital input is received on that configured channel e Sync time this defaults to synchronise the time every hour Once the time synchronization is complete message will be send in the system messages to show time changed on digital input This will notify the user that system time has been synchronized to the nearest hour due to digital input Screen e
166. all and use the Software pursuant to the terms and conditions of this Agreement 1 7 Licensed Site means the specific address of Licensee s facility where the Licensed Processor is located as specified in Licensee s Purchase Order 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK ix Honeywell 1 8 Licensed Software means the Object Code of the Software identified in Licensee s Purchase Order and or for which Licensee has purchased a license under this Agreement including all updates revisions modifications or changes thereto to the extent licensed by Licensee under this Agreement and all full or partial copies thereof 1 9 Licensed Use means use of the Object Code form only of Licensed Software by the Authorized Users 1 10 Object Code means computer programming code in a form not readily perceiva ble by humans and suitable for machine execution without the intervening steps of interpre tation or compilation 1 11 Purchase Order means an order form submitted by Licensee to obtain rights to use Licensed Software under this Agreement 1 12 Software means computer programming code in Object Code and or Source Code and Documentation in written or electronic form including updates if any and all modifications thereto and full or partial copies thereof For the avoidance of doubt Software may include Licensed Software and Unlicensed Software 1 13 Source Code means computer programming code in huma
167. am RECORDER Operator150 has been added in the Administrators group Administrators Properties General he Administrators Administrators have complete and unrestricted access to the computer domain RECORDER Administrator e RECORDER Domain Admins RECORDER Operator150 Operator150 Recorder local Changes to a user s group membership Add Remove are not effective until the next time the user logs on ok Cancel Amey He GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 7 Honeywell To Install TrendManager Suite e Load the DVD into the drive and wait for the autorun sequence to start If the auto run does not commence follow these instructions Go to My Computer gt DVD ROM drive e Right Click setup exe For Windows 7 Windows 8 Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2012 a Click on Open if you are logged on with Administrative privileges b Or click on Run as Administrator N Which user account do you want to use to run this program Current user RECORDER c Protect my computer and data from unauthorized program activity This option can prevent computer viruses from harming your computer or personal data but selecting it might cause the program to Function improperly O The following user The TrendManager Suite InstallShield Wizard appears 1 It will check for Net Framework 3 5 Ey Checking for Net Framework 3 5 Please wait 43 TV 2
168. ame e g the OPC DA Ite OPCHDA_ITEMID Specifies the item id This i is used to aly z gt FIGURE 10 18 Read Attribute Dialog ww MatrikonOPC HDA Explorer File Server Function View Help fAtinbute OPCHDA_DATA_TYPE Pen 11 2011 01 13 17 36 38 667 OPCHDA_DESCRIPTI 2011 01 13 17 36 38 667 OPCHDA_ENG UNITS Penll 2011 01 13 17 36 38 667 OPCHDA_SOURCE_N 100 2011 01 13 17 36 38 667 OPCHDA_ITEMID 0 2011 01 13 17 36 38 667 4FTP Multitrend SX6FtFTP Imported Dat 4FTP Multitrend SX6 FTP Imported DatatPen 95 252 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK AA MatrikonOPC HDA Explorer lB x Retrieving Aggregate values Honeywell 1 Please follow the first 11 steps given in Retrieve Historical data to add items Pens 2 Right click on the pen and select Read Processed It will open Read Processed Dialog FIGURE 10 19 Read Processed Dialog File Server Function View Help HeiTrendView Historian Me fees ol eS s 43 TV 25 11 GLO Read Attribute Read At Time Insert Replace Insert Replace Issue 29 December 2014 UK 2010 09 15 22 00 58 550 2010 09 15 22 27 48 550 2010 09 15 22 27 58 550 2010 09 15 23 10 28 550 2010 09 15 23 49 08 550 2010 09 15 23 49 36 730 2010 09 15 23 56 46 780 2010 09 15 23 56 56 780 2010 09 16 00 39 26 780 2010 09 16 01 21 56 780 2010 09 16 02 04 26 720 2010 09 16 02 46 56 780 2010 09 16 03 29 26 780 2010 09 16 04 11 56 780 2010 09 16 04 54 26 780 2010 0
169. an be used to verify the Modbus profile 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 305 Profile Workspace As the Modbus profile is being created the information is being constructed in the Profile Workplace window on the left The window will display the profile in an hierarchal tree Honeywell Click on the box to expand the profile and display the Modbus register addresses Number of channels and channel details for each channel In the Profiler references to channels refers to input registers Profile Workspace Saving a Profile When the new profile is complete use the Save icon or go to File and select Save Profile It is recommended to name the profile so that it includes the recorder name the recorder type and the ID eg Station 2 XX 1ID 21 Identifying the type of recorder will be useful when creating similar Modbus profiles in the future This profile can be called up modified and saved Save Pro file As with a new profile name The new saved profile will appear in the Comms Server list Profile Name Henry 2 XX ID 1 Description Device Xxx E Input Registers 3 Group 1 16 Channels starting address 6337 B Ej E MODBUS register address 6337 NumberOfChannels 16 Channel 1 Pen 1 Temp 0 000000 90 000000 deg C Linear E Channel Name Pen 1 Temp E Color 255 Scale Type Linear A J Se a ee ee se Channel 2 Pen 2 0 000000 50 000000 deg C Linear Chan
170. ant device and press right mouse button for the context menu Select Edit Device and then press OK on the resulting dialog The updated modbus profile will now be in use and this should be evident if you graph the data a couple of minutes later give enough time for some data to be logged to the data base using the updated modbus profile So in summary when updating an X Series and GR recorder configuration import the setup or pen data that use the new setup into TMS Do this either via USB SD card Compact Flash or a manual FTP operation then go to Comms Server and bring up the Edit Device dialog as described above and press OK The Modbus profile names are based on the given name of the recorder it s ID number and the type of the recorder eZtrend Multitrend and Minitrend See Figure 18 2 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 311 312 Honeywell 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Appendix I Batch Report Tool Batch Report Tool Overview Batch report function can be used to generate the report for a specific batch data in PDF read only format It provides a better intuitive and professional report as compared to reports that get generated at recorder side for specific batch The report provides all data or specific data with timestamp which was not supported on recorder side reports Along with data values it also displays this data in graphical format It also provides many features like Bat
171. arere RA AA essen TRER 214 Savea Graph eriein riviere dec cosecdvabeted ebbevege Gov cetinesusdes aoise taadi sevens 214 RENAME a graph asssssscsecsssrsersersecsecsecsscssesescescessesceseeseessesesssessessessessessesseaseaseaseasses 214 Delete a graph vi 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue29 December 2014 UK Chapter 10 Chapter 11 Honeywell Data Locator sscccssosssrssssresssrsecersecersesenensonsesesensessesesensescssessssssssessesessssessesens 215 Adding historical data to a realtime graph ssesessssssscsssscssssscsssscssssssscsssssessssssseees 215 Graph display features Graphing different types of scale data Time adjustment pen Pre Irigget Data sissssssssces sussesseusessessees ovode ee voaasasvansaxcavoancancases eoveae a4 ose 003 roura Zooming Y AXIS ZOOMING seriis severe sscesdesconssecs esses seesessyssbesvssvsssesdsasesa edsee EVE a X axis ZOOMING sisessssesesesevesvscescvsessacsedsessseseseseceseesdesoecessoesevussssdbassassaesaesedsasensdevease Point markers sceisseddssdsgdssd sessbevedates sid skscesssesassansasssessscescabcansasesseisdssessessdaseduoascaeeies Pen Scales sscccccsrssssscsessessrcsesscssrsseseesecsssscesecsesenssecsessnsonseesessesssesecsessesscesesses Arranpine Scales deriet A E O Resizing scale panels Graph Set Time Span Graphing EVENS eesessrsecssessdiserssessdesvesioii desiros oco iesi riese eriet Explaining GNE Vents Graph menssen aaa EEE ES 225 Events Filter srengeni insine i
172. ata values To re arrange the columns place the cursor in between the column headings until a double headed arrow appears Click and hold down the left mouse button and move the column left or right Rows of data can be selected by holding down the CTRL key and clicking on the col umns required To select all data hold down the SHIFT key and select the first and last row required or use the Select all icon The icons displayed on the left are Remove recorder name from columns this can be used to hide the name to allow more column space Show all of the data this is not an overview this is all the actual data points NB When using this as it will reveal all the data this could produce a huge list or even refuse and will ask you to resize the graph Select all does exactly that Copy selected data to clipboard copies the selected data on to the Windows clipboard for pasting into such as Microsoft Word or Excel To Print selected data click on the Print icon to generate two boxes one to select the font required then click OK followed by the print setup box According to your version of Windows the amount of data might reach the maximum size of the clipboard and some lines will be clipped off Click in any area on the screen and press F1 on the keyboard to display the related help files The Data Viewer will prompt with the warning message below when data point exceeds 1000 for each pen or total data points exceeding 20000 Tre
173. ate 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 97 Honeywell Scheduled See Scheduled Events on page 98 e User Counters See User Counters on page 100 e MaxMins Reset A manual reset of the Max Min values by the user can be used as a cause to then trigger an effect Max Min values can be reset in the process menu on the recorder System An occurrence in the system can be used as a cause to trigger an event effect System occurrences include Power On Setup Change Internal Memory Low Export Memory Low and FTP Memory Low The system monitors the mem ory storage levels and triggers the alert when the low level set is reached To set the memory low level go to Storage Alarm on page 109 e User Action Select a User action such as placing a mark on the chart as a cause to trig ger and event Or add a Hot Button which can be displayed on an active Trend screen on the recorder ee The Hot Button function when active as a cause The user can click the Hot Button on the active screen and the corresponding event that the user needs to set will be triggered The hot button will display on active trend screens in top right of screen if enabled e Batch Use a batch control as a cause to trigger an event effect An event cause can be set up so that when you Start Stop or Pause a batch it will cause an effect to occur Batches work using groups of pens so when setting up an event with a batch control as a
174. ate A Reflash option is available to keep the alarm flashing whilst in an alarm state even after it has been acknowledged See Reflash e Change Log Toggles On and Off Select this to change the Log speed when an alarm occurs The Log rate changes when alarm is active and stays at the alarm rate for as long as the alarm is active then returns to the normal logging rate Set up the new alarm log ging rate in Alarm Rate in the Logging Tab e Mark Chart Toggles On and Off Selecting On will place a Mark on the Chart with auto mated messages when the alarm becomes active e Email Alarm Enable this to send an email when any alarm is triggered on this pen This function is a firmware option that is activated in the recorder e Set View Recipients Only available when email has been enabled Select your recipi ents from the list provided Email addresses and Server names must be entered in Email tab on page 90 e Hysteresis not available for Deviation Toggles On and Off When this is activated you can set a tolerance level for an alarm It allows a specific percentage value of the span of the scale to be added to the alarm level e Hyst Level not available for Deviation alarm Enter as a percentage of the span of the scale This is how much tolerance the signal can have past the set alarm activation point until the alarm is de activated e Damping Toggles On and Off When switched On the alarm level must be breached for
175. ation or training Support installation and training services to the extent offered by Honeywell may be separately pur chased at Honeywell then current rates 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK xi Honeywell 8 LICENSEE OBLIGATIONS 8 1 Records Licensee shall maintain complete current and accurate records docu menting the location of the Licensed Software in all forms in Licensee s possession 8 2 Compliance Verification To ensure compliance with the terms of this Agreement Honeywell or its designated representative shall have the right to i request that Licensee send a written certification of compliance with the terms and conditions of this Agreement within thirty 30 days of Honeywell s request and ii conduct an inspection and audit upon reasonable notice of the records set forth in Section 8 1 of this Agreement electronic logs of access to the Software and the relevant books and records of Licensee and to obtain true and correct photocopies thereof during regular business hours at Licensee s offices and in such a manner as not to interfere unreasonably with Licensee s normal business activities In no event shall such certifications be requested or audits be conducted hereunder more frequently than once every six 6 months If any such audit should disclose any underpay ment of fees Licensee shall promptly pay Honeywell such underpaid amount together with interest thereon at a rate of one and one half perc
176. atus screens Message lists Process screens and Replay screens The printer network information should be entered prior to printing see Network Admin tab on page 94 If the information is not entered in the Network Admin menu a dialog box will ap pear prompting you to enter Username Password and Domain Entering this information into the dialog will not populate the Network Admin menu It is recommended that you fill in this information into the Network Admin menu as it will not be affected by firmware upgrades in the recorder 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell The Printer menu allows configuration for setting up a printer The printer option displays a Print button from various screens using a basic USB standard PCL printer For details on suit able printer types refer to the installation section of the User manual Setup Window CF General Pens Groups Batch Credits Printer Error Alert Allow Printing iv Field IO Paper Size A4 v D Pens Orientation Portrait v Printer Name LPTi Colour Printer e Allow Printing Tick to enable On and Off e Paper Size Toggles between A4 and Letter Orientation Toggles between Landscape and Portrait e Printer Name Enter the printer name as found on the network For a local printer that is connected directly to the recorder via USB ensure the printer name is set to the default LPT1 Shared printers on a domain or work group require the network
177. be used with RS485 or Ethernet ports The Modbus protocol defines a message structure that controllers will recognise and use regardless of the type of network over which they communicate RS485 is a hardware option for the eZtrend QXe recorder FIGURE 6 2 Modbus Master Configuration Setup Window Modbus web Email sNTP TCP IP Network Admin FTP Peer 2Peer Master Slave RS485 Enabled w Slave 2 Nw Slave 3 Enabled Iv Slave 4 Events Counters Slave 5 Friendly Name Slave Device Slave 6 Slave 7 ID 1 Screens Slave 8 saves Port Ethernet Network Name 192 168 1 1 gt Recording aia 10 Slave 11 O Slave 12 Protocol Modbus FPLB Slave 13 o Transfer Slave 14 Static Transaction 1 7 Slave 15 Slave 16 Enabled IV Dec Start Addr Hardware Slave 17 Slave 18 Direction In v No Of Items Slave 19 Reports Slave 20 P Se Slave 21 Comman Input Registers Slave 22 Slave 23 Data Type IEEE float Slave 24 Slave 1 Modbus Master Communications The recorder can communicate with up to 32 slave devices on both RS485 and or Ethernet at a maxi mum poll rate of 1 second slowest 1 hour Each slave up to 8 transactions can be performed where a transaction can retrieve 1 or more registers from a slave or send one or more Pens to a slave Access to slave registers within the maths function has been provided using scv x y z where x Slave number y Transaction Number and z is the each
178. ber of unique items that a OPC DA server supports is 100 I e Number of pens Number of totalisers Number of communication variable spread across 3 groups per cli ent Recommended number of clients that can connect a OPC DA server is 3 OPC A amp E Server Number of active alarm that is maintained at a given time is 576 Includes pens having active alarms and pens which have normal but unacknowledged alarms if latch enabled Recommended maximum number of event subscriptions is 3 Not only can pen and alarm values be imported from the recorder but CV values can be sent to the recorder from the OPC software How OPC works When data acquisition devices conform to the OPC standard you can use them with any OPC enabled software application and vice versa You can therefore easily combine different devices from different manufacturers in one system OPC gives you the freedom to add new hardware from third party vendors to existing set ups or to replace a device without worrying about compatibility with your chosen software The measurement and control hardware such as a recorder provides front line data acqui sition As soon as the hardware device has collected the data it makes it available to software applications running under Windows It presents the data according to the OPC standard and is thus known as an OPC server Each OPC server offers data in the same way If the soft ware application can understand the OPC format it can the
179. bility Sockets These numbers should not need to be changed only by advanced users for networking All these areas are covered in the TrendManager Suite Help Click on any area on the screen and press F1 on the keyboard to access recorder specific help files Also see See Glossary on page 259 Pen related setups Pens A Select each pen from the list and allocate information about that pen by going through the tabs at the top of the screen Click in any area on the screen and press F1 on the keyboard to display the related help files 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell General In the General tab select and enable each pen required allocate a name or tag and a description There is an option to set the pen trace thickness and a comprehensive colour palette to modify the pen trace colours on the graph The pen trace colours are identical to those in the recorder Scales Setup Window General Scales Logging Maths Totals Alarms Scale type C Linear Logarithmic General Unit Text Be Analogues P X a3 Retransmit Starting power of 10 Number of Decades js E Bg Digitals m Divisions matically Adjust Divisions Ge Events Major Division Minor Division fi fi Scale Factor E4 3 4E 012 Format Ok Cancel Scale Type Scale Type is for either a Linear or Logarithmic scale When either of these are selected some of the headings will change on the Scales
180. bit Professional Enterprise and Ultimate Edition Windows Server 2012 Windows 7 32 and 64 bit Professional Enterprise and Ultimate Edition Windows Server 2008 Password protection Full user traceability v graph data only Archive data on integral secure database Concurrent Batch Mode Export using CSV format files Enable Fuzzy Logging Events system including user counters and reports Export using OPC links SN Ny NE NYS Communicate with recorders using RS485 interface Communicate with recorders using Ethernet TCP IP Distribute all recorder data over LAN plant wide FTP or secure Communication Interface over Ethernet Web browse a recorder Send setup to recorder via Ethernet Audit trail manager Relating data retrieval used for graphing amp logging Replay of historical and Realtime data using a split screen format Ethernet RS485 communications Enable Modbus and Modbus X via Ethernet or RS485 NPN ENE NYE NY NY NEN EN NEN NY NY NE NNN USN 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Features TrendViewer TrendManager TrendServer Comms Server manages the communication status of the recorder y Remote access to other servers via Ethernet v Modbus Master and Communication with Slave over RS485 or Ether net IQOQ Protocol Documentation v AMS2750 survey setup v v View Archived Database
181. ble Activate this to make this recorder the server Other recorders set up as Clients can synchronise their time to this server recorder e Client Enable Tick to enable Activate this to set this recorder to synchronise time with the server Figure 6 3 on page 92 Server Name Only available when Client Enable is active This is the name of the Net work Server that can be used for time synchronisation Enter the server name to be used for time synchronisation this could be a Time Server on the internet or on your network If a recorder is acting as the server the client recorders must have the recorder s network name as the Server Name up to 32 characters This is xs nnnnnn where nnnnnn is the 6 digit serial number of the recorder 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 91 92 Honeywell e Period Only available when Client Enable is active Select and enter the time period in seconds required between checking and updating the time This will default to 120 sec onds X Series recorders have a period limit of 60 to 3600 seconds GR Series recorders have a period limit of 600 to 3600 seconds e Threshold Only available when Client Enable is active This is a specified amount of time in seconds that the recorder clock must be within to ensure synchronisation with the network server Eg if set to 3600 the recorder time must be within 1 hour of the network server to ensure time sync will take place
182. ble problem source e Check network security settings and ensure DCOM traffic port 135 is being allowed f Attempt to establish a direct connection between the client and server by accessing the shared folder on either of the machines g If the client will communicate only with a direct connection as above the security set tings used on the client network need to be reviewed to ensure DCOM traffic is being allowed h As a final check that DCOM traffic is not being blocked by the client network a port scanner may be used to check the state of and access to port 135 this is not recom mended for anyone unfamiliar with network technology A basic and safe port scanner PortQry is available for down load from Microsofts web site a search on Microsoft com for Portqry will locate the instructions for down load and use down load ing from any third party web site is not recommended i Check to see if the client and server are in the same domain If they are not in a domain then following applies e Simple File Sharing SFS should be switched off on both client and server machines Follow below steps to switch off SFS ee Open windows explorer go to the Tools menu and select the Folder options menu item This will present a dialog box as follows Folder Options General View Fle Type Oline Fie Tack Show coeamon tacks in foldes O Use Windovrs classic loklers Browse toldere Open each folder in the sam
183. button to move the indicator on the Realtime Graphing Data Buffer Size indicator from 10 minutes to 2 hours This is the amount of data being displayed in the realtime data graph To stop the realtime data scrolling hit the Pause button use the scroll bar at the bottom of the graph to review previous data see Pause button on page 232 and Realtime Data Buffer on page 163 Click OK when the Realtime Pen Settings are complete Click in any area on the screen and press F1 on the keyboard to display the related help files Realtime Data Buffer e The realtime data has a buffer of time which can be set by the user so a timed amount of data is stored in the buffer This buffer is from 10 minutes to 2 hours then the oldest data will disappear from the realtime graph Go to the System button down the left side of the main screen and select the realtime icon See Communications Realtime Settings on page 163 Realtime Comms logging To configure a recorder for logging first click on the Realtime icon in the left hand toolbar on the Main screen This will produce the Recorders slide out pane listing the available recorders for Realtime logging Realtime e Right click on the desired recorder and click on the Log icon to produce the Logging Con figuration box for that particular recorder The recorder details will be displayed showing the Port Number and the Device ID Number check these match the recorder If the infor mation i
184. cause you must assign a group of pens See General tab on page 77 e TUS Temperature uniformity Survey This will only be enabled if the AMS2750 TUS or TUS Process option has been enabled in the recorder credits menu Select either Start or Stop TUS When a TUS is started or stopped this can be used to trigger and effect Refer to the User manual for more details e AMS2750 Timer This will only be enabled if the AMS2750 TUS or the TUS Process option has been enabled in the recorder credits menu Select TC Timers or Process Tim ers as a Cause and set the Alert Type to Warning or Expired Refer to the User manual for more details Scheduled Events A scheduled event can be set up as a cause so that when a scheduled event occurs it trig gers an effect With scheduled events you can specify the time and date for something to happen Eg A schedule can be setup every weekday at 12 00pm to send an Email Enabled Tick to enable e Type Scheduled e Sub Type Set Once Interval Specific Days or Month End Once This is a once only occurrence Interval A scheduled can be setup at timed intervals eg every 12 hours Specific days Select the day s time and how often count the schedule will occur Eg Friday at 12 00 with a count of 10 will carry on for 10 weeks or Monday through to Friday at 12 00 with a count of 10 will carry on for two weeks Month End If Month End is selected with a count of 10 it will carry on for 10 month
185. ceseeseeesresennees 45 System Status E Mail arric N E Password Realtime System Status Button T FCPAP Comms siomenersenornnpiin i nni TCP IP Comms X Series Time adjustment pen ssis To Install Migrate TrendViewer Historian 34 To Migrate TrendManager Suite 0 20 Totals ce asceatensin eet sus te eie niet 132 Totals X Series cceccccceccccsssssscsssesssesseessssseeseesessees 82 Traces on Graphs ssiri 214 Transfer Setup sssrin 112 147 Transient Filter sccscceesssccieltsreaenatititadeanaten 134 Trash Can Button ss 50 TrendManager Pro and TrendServer Pro Installation Migration 10 21 TrendManager Suite sssri 8 TrendManager Suite User Groups 15 28 Trend view Historian ecccccscscccsiesssisesssees 44 Trendview Historian Installation 238 Trendview Historian Server Client Software 237 Trendview Historian Support Information 237 TrendViewer Installation Migration 10 21 Troubleshooting for TrendManager Suite Application scscsistesccik ducioiscsrise aati 31 Update Tabular Readings Event EMEC saiora E 105 User Action Event Canses icicictdhearatkininarenhanshee 98 Hot Button oo cccccccsccseseseseseeseseeseeeeseseeeseeseseees 98 User Counters X Series sss 100 328 Honeywell UVW Web Browser sssr 191 Web X Series coicceececcccccesscesssssssssessssssesessssseesessseesees 90 X Series Cause and Effect o ccc cc ccecccscescsscesseesseeseeees Modbus Function Code
186. ch Status Pen Overview Min Max values for batch data System Alarm Security mes sages etc It also provides space for Auditor or external agency to provide below details like Reviewed By Checked By and Comments This tool can generate a batch report from TrendManager TrendServer software in PDF format TrendManager TrendServer software is required in order to use this Batch tool Note Batch report utility will work only with administrator access users Open Batch Report Tool The Batch Report Tool is launched by opening TrendManager TrendServer software and selecting the Batch button from the left hand side This will open the Batch View dialog box containing available batches see Figure 19 1 on page 314 This tool can generate Batch report from TrendManager TrendServer in PDF format The batch report contains following details Batch Report Name Description Lot No Comment Batch report data within Batch start time and Batch finish time for all Pens available in the batch Min max information for every pen present in the Batch Events occurred within Batch start and end time System messages User Messages Alarm messages Security messages etc Batch Graph 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 313 314 Honeywell The Batch report option is available in Batch view dialog as shown below 8me1 8tmp Simp 16me1 125 sp1 124 sp1 123 sp1 122 sp1 121 sp1 120 sp1 119 sp1 118 sp1 117 sp1i 116 sp1 1
187. chedule to import data see Schedule Setup on page 160 Activate any further General options as required such as Auto graph the data Make a log file in the program directory and Include extra diagnostic details For X amp GR Series recorders select your network connection speed Please check with your IT sup port team as putting in a faster connection speed than the network can handle may cause the FTP transfer to work incorrectly and cause Time Out messages For V5 recorders select Disk drive or PC card to download from If required tick to Delete data on recorder on successful completion 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Recorder Setup eReERAKSK Recorder Location IP Address Eg 192 168 1 1 192 168 10 45 network ID xs 817810 Honeywell From Network Setup Click on Setup in the External Import box to produce the Recorder Manager this will be empty at first Click on Add to add a new recorder the Recorder Setup box will appear To modify any existing recorders either select Edit or double click on the entry displayed in the box this will also produce the Recorder Setup box Remove will delete the selected recorder from the list Press Done when all set ups are complete FIGURE 7 5 FTP Recorder Setup requires IP address as EX Recorder Manager Recorder Name IP Address OK Find Device Look up IP address 4 descriptive name for the recorder Recordet 4
188. choose either Multiple pens Pen group or All Pens and select the relevant pen s below Digital Outputs Is an event effect that can switch a Digital Output On or Off Enter which one in Sub Type and select the relevant relay output s Alarm Acknowledge this is an effect of an event that can acknowledge a latched alarm on a Single Pen Pen Group or All pens Select the pen and the alarm Select the pen and the number of alarm to be acknowledged Email Is an event effect that will send an Email when triggered by a Cause Eg Cause Totaliser Starts Effect Email is sent ee Sub Type Auto Single Line User or Multiline User Auto will enter what the Event was eg Scheduled or Alarm triggered Single Line User can have up to 69 charac ters of text or use Embedded Process Values on page 100 Multiline User can have up to 80 characters per line with up to 1000 characters including spaces carriage returns and line feed They can also include embedded process variable ee Recipients Enter email recipients from the list If no email recipients are present in the list they must be entered first in the Email menu see Email tab on page 90 Email Text Only available when Single Line User is selected as a Sub Type Enter text here to add a Mark on Chart when the Email is sent e Email Template Only available when Multiline User is selected These are sets of text scripts that can be pre written and assigned to an Email
189. ck in any area on the screen and press F1 on the keyboard to display the related help files FIGURE 9 1 elim llallita llla allal 1 00 000 1 00 000 Graph slide out pane A h Pratl aa A EJ Mini QX Graph1 Graph area EJ Mini QX Graph2 P 5000 Realtime TrendServer 400 000 A A 80 000 j Ny l y V i only Gromit Pen 11 Graph list Scales Graph window Data Locator button Data found Data in brackets being graphed Graph list This is a list of the stored and open graphs in the currently selected folder See Folders on page 154 Add New Graph e To open a graph click on the Graph icon at the top of the Button bar This displays the Graph slide out pane e Click on Add New Graph and a blank graph will appear 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 213 214 Honeywell Graph a recorder e To graph a device go to the recorders list under the Recorder slide out pane e Drag and drop the desired device either over a blank section of backdrop to make a new graph or over an existing graph to add traces to it Data can be imported without first closing graphs relevant graphs will auto update Traces on graphs e To add traces to a new or existing graph select the recorder icon on the graphs tool bar called Add Data to Graph and click on Pens to reveal the Pen list see Figure 9 3 on page 216 Drag and drop the selec
190. ck on Apply to enable the channels to log Once the channels are in the Channels logging to selected da tabase window they can be selected and the Edit and Delete button become active The Edit button allows the logging rate or type of logging to be changed There is also a Database Events Logging box that can be ticked that allows any events to be logged to the database using Trendbus Not available for X Series recorders Summary of Logging Changes If any changes are made using the Edit button the Sum mary of Changes button becomes active this will show the last changes made to any of the channels for this configuration only The Delete button will take the channel out of this window and put it into the window showing available channels for logging logging will stop for this channel 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 207 208 Honeywell Comms Server Status Screen If you have a graph open Comms Server should be showing that the recorder is operating by displaying flashing green lights in the Active column Click and highlight the recorder Click the Database logging Tab The screen should now show all the pens logging for that record er and their log rate Figure 8 1 Comms Server Status Screen eb Communications Server z Name Mode Status _ Channels Active _ IP Address Furnace1 Realtime ee 20 xs 100089 ID No 1 Local Server Initial Database June FTP 5 Sa
191. ck on this to activate and de activate options DNS Domain Name System WINS Windows Internet Name Service MDNS Man aged Data Network Services Available when setting DNS WINS MDNS Setup Window Po cores Modbus Web Email SNTP TCP IP Ne work Admin FTP Peer 2 Peer General Static IP Vv DNS WINS MDNS Settings naa Field 10 Auto DNS IP Address 160 221 36 29 Pri DNS Addr E Pens Sub Net Mask 255 255 255 0 P Sec DNS Addr Gateway D ta Auto WINS DNS WINS MDNS DNS WINS MDNS Ports 80 502 Pri WINS Addr T Sec WINS Addr Pa Recording descents e7 Transfer at Hardware Automatic DNS Names The recorder will automatically register a unique Network ID using the serial number The for mat is xs nnnnnn where nnnnnn is the serial number of the recorder This allows you to locate the recorder for browsing if you are using DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DNS WINS MDNS Defaults to Automatic select Set to activate the options DNS Domain Name System WINS Win dows Internet Name Service MDNS Managed Data Network Services When complete select Done e Auto DNS This is a sub menu for DNS WINS MDNS Tick to activate With this deacti vated the DNS Server address can be changed from the default if required Pri DNS Address This is a sub menu for DNS WINS MDNS Only available when Auto DNS is deactivated Sec DNS Address This is a
192. click to activate the instructions on that particular task Technical papers This will access technical information relevant to your particular software 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 51 Honeywell Searching in Help Within each help topic there are different ways to search for information The top of each help screen shows the same menu bar throughout id ioo Gok Bm nee gt i Find This takes you to the Find set up Wizard follow the on screen instructions This will enable the user to find a particular word or scroll through the alphabetical topic screen By clicking on the tags at the top of the Help Topic menu the user can view the Index or Con tents file Help Topics This takes the user to the Help Topics menu where Find Index and Contents files can be accessed Select option and press display Back This takes the user back to the previous screen Print Direct access to printing any of the help screens Options Annotate Annotate allows the user to Copy Small type any additional information Print Topic Go Noma associated with this topic Font gt Large ects en cser Copy allows the user to copy Use System Colors Ine screen Qn Top e Print topic gives direct access Not On Top to print the screen The final two options at the top of the help menu Font size can be changed are shown as arrow direction buttons these will take you either to the previ
193. clude Cooling if required Completion Value For Sterilisation if cooling is not required enter a Completion Value 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 83 84 Setup Window General Scales Logging Maths Totals Alarms RAV Alarm Alarm 1 v Enabled Enabled Always I a z E gt et Honeywell Sterilisation Specification for Sterilisation The definition Fo Po is the sterilisation pasteurisation time in minutes required to destroy a stated number of organisms with a known z at temperature T For example F18 250 represents the time in minutes required to destroy a stated number of organisms at a temperature of 250F 121 11C with a z 18 degrees F F values are used to compare the sterilizing values of differ ent processes however F values cannot be compared unless the z values are the same When temper ature is not specified for example F 8 6 it is understood that the temperature is 250F 121 11C the subscript O as in the term Fo 7 4 is used to indicate that the z 18 degrees F and the temperature is 250F 121 11C Alarms tab Select from the list of available pens in the window You will be setting up alarms on this pen only Select the first available alarm eg Alarm 1 and configure each alarm as required for each pen When an alarm has been configured an Alarm Marker or Pen Pointer will appear on the recorder for each alarm depending on the type of process screen Type High X Leve
194. computer program can quickly select desired pieces of data Database Server data bases administered by the database server The database server is accessible by other users on the network Data bits Smallest unit of information on a machine Dedicated network A computer network in which one or more computers are set aside or dedicated as servers Dedicated server A computer used exclusively as a network server 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 259 Honeywell Default Gateway A configuration parameter transmitted to each network device Where an IP Address can not be found in a local network the default gateway sorts out getting traffic from one subnet to another DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Used for assigning dynamic IP address to devices on a net work With dynamic IP addresses a device can have a different IP address every time it connects to the net work DNS Domain Name System or Service an Internet service that translates Domain names into IP addresses Because domain names are alphabetic they re easier to remember The Internet however is really based on IP Address Every time you use a domain name therefore a DNS service must translate the name into the corresponding IP address For example the domain name www honeywell com ps might translate to 195 26 34 186 The DNS system is in fact its own network If one DNS server doesn t know how to translate a particular domain name it as
195. connected to your workstation or PC not on a local network RS232 This protocol is useful for point to point communications at low speeds For example port COM1 ina PC can be used for a mouse port COM2 for a modem etc This is an example of point to point communication one port one device RS232 was designed for communication of local devices and supports one transmitter and one receiver RS485 RS485 is used as a multiport communications more devices may be connected to a single signal cable e g Ethernet networks which use coaxial cable Trendbus can be used via RS485 serial communications port 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 261 Honeywell Server a computer or device on a network that manages network resources For example a File Server is a computer and storage device dedicated to storing files A Network Server is a computer that manages net work traffic and a Database Server is a computer that processes database queries Severs are often dedi cated meaning that they perform no other tasks besides their server tasks SLIP Serial Line Internet Protocol for communication between two machines previously configured for comms with each other PPP is preferred SMTP Simple Message Transfer Protocol This allows a device computer to send messages to an e mail server without having its own e mail address Stopbits Used to signify the end of a character string Used for setting up constraints for Ethernet commun
196. creates one common group for all the variants i e TMSApplicationAccessGroup and for TrendServer Pro it creates another group called TMSServiceAccessGroup NOTE For TrendServer Pro only TMSServiceAccessGroup is required for Communi cations Service and processes runs under it Do not delete this user group and also do not modify delete the user in the user group 1 The user account provided during installation should be part of TMSApplicationAccessGroup for TrendManager Pro and will be part of TMSServiceAccessGroup in case of TrendServer Pro 2 Users can be added to the TMSApplicationAccessGroup by launching the TMS Admin Console from the location C Program Files TrendManager Suite TrendServer TMSAdminConsole exe ZA TMS Admin Console Ifyou have done a new installation of Trend Manager Suite on this PC and need to allow users to access TMS the below option guides you with the process You can use this option to add any other users or group ata later point Add Users F you have upgraded your software from a version 6 141 or earlier data upgrade is necessary to prevent issues accessing the newer version The below option guides you wih the process Do Migration 3 Click on Add Users to launch User Configuration Window and users can be added to TMSApplica tionAccessGroup 4 Users can be added manually by following the below mentioned steps a Please go to Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Com
197. ct opgrator left to right Add operator Spaces are not recognised in maths expressions and the expression can be written anywhere Pi ROUND A3 within the 250 character text field More than one set of brackets can be used ina maths expression For example if you wanted the value of the square root of Analogue Input 3 to be rounded to the nearest whole number the expression would be written in one of three ways as shown opposite SQRT A3 The Square Root function can be written as the operator or as the function SQRT In the first and third example the round brackets surrounding A3 can be omitted they are included to make the expression easier to under stand 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 269 270 Constants Honeywell A Constant can be added to the end of a Maths equation These are the constants available Constant Value Description PI 3 14159 The ratio of the circumference of a circle to its diameter Cc 2 99792e 008 Speed of light Vmol 22 4138 The molar volume in units ml mole g 9 80665 Gravity Planck 6 62608e 034 Equal to the ratio of the energy E of a quantum to energy to its frequency Boltzm nt 1 38066e 023 Average energy of a molecule to its absolute temperature Charge e 1 60218e 019 Elementary charge electron proton Avogadro 6 02214e 023 Number of particles per mole of particles Boolean Expressions B
198. d Double Click the zip file Provide a path to extract the application to install the patch Once done double the application to install the patch TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol is the main transport proto col used on the Internet for connectivity and transmission of data across heterogeneous systems With all Honeywell software performance improves with more RAM faster CPUs and faster and larger hard disk drives NB It is recommended that at least 100 Mbyte of free hard disk space is available for archiving data Please note the more logging and data being stored the more free space on the hard disk is required This is not required with TrendViewer 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 47 48 Honeywell 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Chapter 4 Operation Operation When the TrendManager Suite is first opened most of the PC screen will be blank apart from a Button bar down the left side of the screen Button bar The Button bar appears down the left hand side Sera Cems of the screen From here recorders can be fully Graphs Ke lt Databases configured not available on TrendViewer amp Add New Recorder This is the main control area for the recorder 2222 Dilbert graphs and databases Clicking on either the b 0666 Recorder Graphs button or the Recorder button will reveal 0001 V6 Temp Profile 0001 Lo
199. d Select the device ID number if necessary from the drop down menu The next section is Database Configuration a list of connected database servers and a list of databases that are currently being logged to In this section is a window showing the channels available to be logged As channels are selected from this window three additional buttons become active Add Channel selection select each channel for logging Add all Channels for logging and Clear Channel selection Communications Logging Ea Port Number Et hernet Device ID Number 1 Database Configuration Connected Database Servers Database Currently Logging To Local Server Initial Database Channels available to be logged Add Channel Selection Add All Channels 5 Clear Channel Selection we m Channels logging to the selected database Source Rate Type new settings _Edit Channel Input Reg Ch 1 Sample Input Reg Ch 2 Sample Delete Channel Input Reg Ch 3 Sample Input Reg Ch 4 Summary of all changes Apply Cancel 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Add Channels for Logging As each channel is selected or all channels depending on the button selected the Logging Channel Configuration box appears so the Log Rate and Type of logging can be set for each channel individually or all channels When the channels have been selected they will appear in the bottom window cli
200. d 001 End 002 Mon 2007 15 21 01 End 001 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell FIGURE 9 7 Graphing Events Comment Batch End Batch Pause Batch Resume Batch Number of Into Alarm User activated Events tile Out of Ala message Events bar Sx sacl a AMA AOS Ben TA YF Thu Mar 2 2 Point Markers M Recorder Name Gromit Pen1 C t 100 000 Ade S 80 000 i Add Batch End Event 60 000 f SS 40 000 li z Events Filter 20 000 v System Events 0 00 v Alarm Events v Digitaf Events 30 000 v Usef Events 25 000 i v Marker Events 20 000 v Batch Events 15 00 nt M Thin Traces Gromit Pen 14 C Gromit Pen 2 Select Events Type Date Time Rec Description Thu Mar 22 2012 14 01 06 00 0001 Stary Batch test 3 Thu Mar 22 2012 14 01 06 00 0001 Usef ID ID3 amp Thu Mar 22 2012 14 01 06 00 0001 D scription Batch Test 3 Ok amp Thu Mar 22 2012 14 01 06 00 0001 Wot Number Lgt3 A Thu Mar 22 2012 14 01 07 89 0001 P12 Alm 1 IntM Alarm 100 SelectAll Cean C aren 14 Press F1 for Help Events button Events Filter Select Events box produced Events detail Use the grab by a numbered events tile text box handle to repo sition the box Explaining an Events Graph When an event is selected from the event bar a coloured text box will appear Text boxes user defined or linked to an event can be dragged and re positioned a
201. d GR Setup Window Import Configuration Export Configuration Import Export Path C DefaultSetupConfig set Browse 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Hardware The Hardware window displays the current hardware status of the recorder If the recorder hardware is changed and new cards are added or removed or moved position then this screen should be updated to reflect the new changes Honeywell For example when adding or removing options cards such as an Relay Alarm card Digital IO card Analogue Out or Pulse card Analogue Out and Pulse In cards are not available on the eZtrend Setup Window Field 10 Pens Comms Events Counters Screens Recording be L mera ag Reports Analogue IO Pulse Cards Slot A Analogue in v SlotB Analogue in v Slot Analogue Out v slotD Pusen gt SlotE None gt Slot F None w Alarm Digital IO Cards SlotG Alarm Relay w Channels js l SlotH Digitalo v Channels ls x Credits Extra Pens 48 o AMS2750 Mode Not Available x 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK WARNING Extra pens are credit controlled Changes here may not be refiected on the recorder 113 Setup Window Honeywell Reports Reports can be generated manually or on a periodic basis using the event system to show dai ly weekly monthly totals max mins averages etc the reports can be printed e mailed as at tachments or expo
202. d Software is included therein solely as a matter of administrative convenience and Licensee further agrees not to attempt to gain access to or permit any third party to attempt to gain access to such Unlicensed Software Licensee shall not disclose the Software keys to any third party Licensee shall not circumvent or attempt to circumvent any license management security devices access logs or other measures pro vided in connection with the Licensed Software or permit or assist any Authorized User or any third party to do the same 3 3 Third Party Software The Licensed Software may contain or be derived from materials of third party licensors Such third party materials may be subject to restrictions in addition to those listed in this Section 3 0 which restrictions if any are included in the docu ments accompanying such third party software 4 OWNERSHIP Honeywell and its licensors shall retain exclusive ownership of all worldwide Intellectual Property Rights in and to the Licensed Software Licensee hereby assigns to Hon eywell any such rights Licensee may have or obtain in and to the foregoing All rights in and to the Licensed Software not expressly granted to Licensee in this Agreement are expressly reserved for Honeywell and its licensors 5 CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION Licensee shall not use or disclose any Confidential Infor mation except as expressly authorized by this Agreement and shall protect all such Confi dential Infor
203. d below are covered in the TrendManager Suite Help Click in any area on the screen and press F1 on the keyboard to display the related help files 154 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Importing 43 TV 25 11 Honeywell The Import button from the main tool bar on the left of the screen will produce the External Import box This function can be used to import data or a setup from an external storage device See also Importing from TrendViewer on page 155 Import In the External Import box select to import either data or setup Ensure the correct information is available from the external storage device Disk Card Compact Flash SD card or USB key and can be accessed FIGURE 7 4 External Import box rir Select type of import PN Pen data and events GR Series C Setup only C amp Series or Older Database Location Local Server T est Source Location From Directory From Network Eek Change General options V Auto graph the data Make a log file in the program directory General options Close Database Location will identify which data base to import to There are two radio buttons in this dialog one for GR Series and another is for XSeries or Older In order to import GR Series data we need to check GR Series button To import X Series data or Older check the X Series or Older button The Source Location will default to From Directory To change the file location
204. d click on OK Delete a graph e Go to the Graphs list under the Graphs slide out pane Either drag the desired graph icon over the nearest Trash can or right click on it and select delete 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Data Locator FIGURE 9 2 Data from different recorders Data locator brackets Use the Data locator to find your data The Locate button appears at the bottom of the scale window activate this to reveal an area below the Time bar underneath the Graph window The Data locator displays the location of data as grey bars each bar representing data from a single recorder The Data Locator shows all the data from a recorder s as a bar The locator brackets represent the visible span of your graph Data can be found by moving the Data locator brackets along the X axis until they capture the grey bars Many recorders can be displayed on one graph Drag the recorders from the Database slide out pane onto the graph Using the left mouse button click hold and drag the data locator brackets left or right over the data Right click to cancel a selection The brackets can be resized to encompass small or large amounts of data This data will then be displayed on the graph Zoom in or out by left or right clicking on the time bar When the cursor is placed over the Data locator brackets two arrows will appear Use the right mouse button to move Data locator brackets notice the brackets do not resize as
205. d new device Device Details Name Device Name Description Device description ID 99 Hardware Setup Analogue IO Pulse Cards Alarm Digital IO Cards Slot A Analogue In SlotG Alarm Relay v Channels ls gt SlotB AnalogueIn v Slot H Digital 10 v Channels is gt Slot C Analogue Out SlotI None v Channels SlotD pusen z Credits SlotE None v Extra Pens 48 8 SlotF None z AMS2750 Mode Not Available v 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 53 54 Honeywell An alternate method is to go to the recorder save the setup on a media even if it is blank and import the setup to the TrendManager software This way the hardware configuration number of virtual pens modbus number and the serial and ID numbers are correct form the beginning It also helps reduce setup time if the customer wants to do real time communications NB Add New Device functionality is not applicable for the Archived Databases from the Archive Data base Server Hardware Setup In the Add new device box there are slot references that co ordinate with the slots on the rear panel of the recorder Select the drop down list in each slot for Analogue IO Pulse In cards this hardware setup must match the recorder configuration Select the correct card description for each slot and the channels number if there is no card fitted Select None Analogue Output and Pulse input cards are not available for the eZtrend
206. d to part of TMSApplicationAccessGroup Click on Add Users or click Continue to perform it later e Click Add Users to launch Configure Users window to add users to TMSApplica tionAccessGroup a Vand Marr Sie a user should be part of TMSApplicationAccessGroup The users and groups on this machine are shown below Select the TMS users from the below list and add to TMSApplicationAccessGroup Note To add users or groups not listed enter the user name manually in the text box below For adding domain user specify the usemame in domain usemame format TMSApplicationAccessGroup Administrators PACRIM1 E811063 TMSUser TMSUsert HON ADMIN htsladmin SQLDebugger TMSUser TMSUser1 TMSUser2 TMSUser4 Add a user 24 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Select a user in the Users Tab or a group in the Groups Tab and click on the right fac ing arrows to add the user group TMSApplicationAccessGroup e Click on left facing arrows to remove the user group from TMSApplicationAccess A user can also be added by using the Add button After adding the users groups click on Close button to exit User Configuration win Click on Start Migration to migrate the data from previous TrendManager Suite installation The following dialog comes up prompting the user to select a destina tion folder to backup the data from the previous users of TrendMana
207. data Multiple pre trigger sessions will be shown as multiple overlaps on the same screen but connected to the same overlapped pen Default GRAPHOOS p ee AA ee Fil 300 point AR E 250 EJ EE ao a oe ace ee eee menm lt eis Pyl j 100 Pre Trigger Bi so bufferred data ry 3 gt shown using overlap ps g 00 method ee OE 8 2 A 0 1 E a Tue Jun 09 08 38 009 Tue Jun 09 08 39 4 m FIGURE 9 5 Pre Trigger data shown as Overlapped Pens 218 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Zooming Honeywell Y axis Zooming Y axis zooming is done in the Scale window Y axis zooming can be achieved by placing the cursor which turns into a magnifying glass over the numbered area of the Scale window and left clicking to zoom in increase size or right click to zoom out decrease size To select a specific area of data stay on the numbered part of the scale left click hold and drag Two horizontal lines will appear to enable the user to select a portion of the graphed data As you click on the Scale window a boxed area appears on the coloured part of the bargraph showing where the data is that you are scaling Having zoomed in full span can be restored by clicking on the restore button at the top right of the scale If a large arrow appears in the scale there is no data available for the trace in the current time span window a 2 55 00 o 60 00 JE w kei
208. ddr Addr Addr Addr Data CRC CRC Address Code f s Count High Low High Lo 02 10 00 04 00 03 05 53 74 61 72 74 CRC CRC The response follows the normal response for function code 16 given in section 3 7 and so to the above message the response would be 02 10 00 04 00 03 CRC CRC Page numbers refer to document Modbus Serial Communications User manual 51 52 25 66P April 2007 Analogue Input Value Analogue readings in engineering units 4byte IEEE floats using 2 Modbus registers per reading Communications Input Values can be sent to the recorder for inclusion in the Maths Block using command 16 up to 32 IEEE floats can be sent to the recorder Using CV1 to CV32 in the Maths Block these values can be displayed on the pens i e P1 CV1 will set Pen 1 to the engineering value set address 1880 with the function code 16 Once again these are 4 byte IEEE floats using 2 Modbus registers per reading Pen Values Pen values in engineering units 4 byte IEEE floats using 2 Modbus registers per reading Modbus Function Codes 298 These are described in document Modbus Serial Communications User manual 51 52 25 66Q April 2007 Pages 14 to 25 inclusive For X Series and GR recorders only use codes 01 02 03 04 16 and 17 Page numbers refer to document Modbus Serial Communications User manual 51 52 25 66Q April 2007 Supplemental to Function code 16 with s
209. den batch The limit is based on the one that is greater For example consider the source batch duration 2 hours golden batch duration 1 hour The maximum offset time allowed is 2 hours The maximum offset time is 31 days 81 24 60 60 seconds This is irrespective of source or golden batch e Report Settings Enter a date and a start time from when the graph in comparison must be considered For example consider data is available for 2 days graph to be com pared You want to use 3 hours data available on the last day Start time Wed 24 Sept 2014 08 00 00 and End time Thu 25 Sept 2014 18 30 10 You can specify the Report Start Time as 09 25 2014 15 00 00 e Generate Graph Generates a graph and shows the comparison See Generate Graphs on page 175 e Generate Report Generates a PDF file with a detail analysis See Generate Report on page 176 3 Click Close to view the graph 174 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Generate Graphs This option provides the graphical comparison between a selected batch and the Golden reference value Example The following graph shows an example for Single Pen comparison where the Upper Tolerance value is set to 20 and Lower Tolerance value is set to 10 It also shows the Golden Reference value and the deviated values in the selected group On comparison of data the golden batch traces are aligned to the start time of the source batch traces It provides None
210. dians in every 360 C The value of P1 equals the hyperbolic TANH Hyperbolic TAN of x TAN of A1 A1 is in radians P1 TANH A1 2pi radians in every 360 C 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 267 Honeywell invers hyperbolic The value of P1 equals the inverse ASINH SIN peran hyperbolic SIN of A1 A1 is in radians P1 ASINH A1 2pi radians in every 360 C inverse hyperbolic The value of P1 equals the inverse ACOSH cos pa x hyperbolic COS of A1 A1 is in radians P1 ACOSHIA1 2pi radians in every 360 C inverse hvp rbolic The value of P1 equals the inverse ATANH TAN oe hyperbolic TAN of A1 A1 is in radians P1 ATANH A1 2pi radians in every 360 C P1 displays the Alarm status for AL1 64 alarms available AL1 to AL64 AL Alarm Status Returns 1 for an active alarm and 0 for P1 AL1 an inactive alarm P1 will display the Alarm level setup for P1 ALEV3 ALEV Alarm Level pen 3 ALEV3 Use ALEV1 to ALEV 64 268 NB Maths functions highlighted with a in the Examples column are not available on the eZtrend V5 Operator Precedence The precedence of an operator specifies how tightly two expressions are tied together For example in the expression 1 5 3 the answer is 16 not 18 because the multiplication operator has a higher precedence than the addition operator Parentheses may be used to force precedence if n
211. dow and put it into the window showing available channels for logging Logging will stop for this channel Apply the addi tions deletions or changes before clicking on the OK button e A summary of the latest set of changes can be displayed by clicking on the Summary of all changes button Click OK on the Logging Configuration box when the channel setup is complete To view the database go to the Recorder icon down the left side of the main screen and select the database designated for that recorder Click in any area on the screen and press F1 on the keyboard to display the related help files 164 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Batch Mode From the main menu bar the Batch button will open the Batch View window This will display the Batch data for all the recorders in the currently selected database Not available on TrendViewer Batch is a firmware option that can be activated using the credit system in the X Series amp GRrecorders Recorder Event Batch Viewer To view both Event and Batch information for a specific recorder right click on a recorder in the Record ers list to reveal a toolbar Select Batch or Events both these buttons take you to the Events Batch View For both the Events and Batch tabs the Device ID will be displayed in the Title bar if this tab is launched from the recorders list If this is launched from the main menu tool bar the database will be displayed in the Title bar Eve
212. e Pen8 Pen 16 Pen 24 Pen 32 Report rate 1 Reportrate 1 Report rate 1 Report rate 1 vax 2 hours Duration 60 mins 45 mins 30 mins allowed Max Readings 7200 allowed Pages 191 If the batch duration is more than the report limits the user can generate multiple reports for the entire batch duration by specifying batch start time and batch duration Example The following PDF shows the Batch and Golden Batch details Golden Batch Comparison Report Report Information Batch Details Golden Batch Details 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue29 December 2014 UK Honeywell The following image shows details from each Pen and the deviation from the standard Golden Graph Pen Overview Date is in MM DD YY format Indicates that pen name is greater than 17 characters Indicates deviated values 09 25 14 Pen 46 10 39 18 10 39 19 Reference Pe 30 14 Reference Per 10 49 On the main Batch tab see Batch Mode Figure 7 8 on page 167 the Column Config button pro duces a box in which you can add and remove the type of Batch information you wish to view Eg Comment Batch Description Lot Number and User ID The Show Hide Events button toggles an individual batch view window on and off as shown in Figure 7 9 on page 178 Select a batch from the main view to display associated events that have occurred during the batch The Filter option when switched On will activate the Settings button
213. e Appen dix H IQOQ Protocol Document on page 309 AMS2750 Capabilities Specific funtionality has been aded to the software to allow configuration of Process mode and TUS mode in line with AMS2750 specifications AMS2750 is the specification that covers pyrometric requirements for thermal processing equipment used for heat treatment Trendview Historian Software Trendview Historian function uses OPC HDA to acquire the data refer to 43 TV 25 41 Trendview Historian User Guide A Windows based Client application is be used to view and access historical data from Trendview OPC Historian Server Trendview Batch Report Tool A tool that improves on the creation of specific Batch reports from TrendManageror TrendServer database makes it easier to analyze and document specific batch process This tool uses the recorder batch information that has been imported into the TrendManager software eliminating the error prone steps of manually entering the data into a spreadsheet application 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell The Batch Report tool allows a user to easily generate separate batch report in a secure PDF format to document the final results of the batch process Golden Batch comparison feature can be used to compare the batch data with a refer ence batch This feature can be used to analyze the deviations of the current batch with reference batch information Honeywell V5 Honeywell V5 recorders require a
214. e Saver Brightness or Off Always Saver Level Only available when the Dim Saver function is set to Use Saver Bright ness Select this to use the instant dimming slider which lowers the screen brightness Default screen brightness is 80 Adjustable between 10 and 100 of full brightness This works on a square law rule that means if you reduce the saver level by 25 you will double the backlight life If you reduce the saver level by 50 you will quadruple the back light life Exit Screen Saver If the screen saver is active on the recorder any of the following will deactivate the screen saver User touches the recorder screen Any USB device is plugged in or unplugged On alarm An alarm is triggered the unit will not return to screen saver till the alarm state is inactive and another screen saver time out period has expired 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 107 108 Honeywell Charts tab A Chart speed is the time it takes the data to travel from one side of the screen to the other The recorder has up to 10 different chart speeds There are 3 categories that can be set Slow Medium and Fast default Set up each category to display the desired chart speed e Fast Speed 60mm h 120mm h 300mm h 600mm h 1200mm h and 6000mm h e Medium Speed 10mm h 20mm h 30mm hr 60mm hr and 120mm h e Slow Speed 1mm h 5mm h and 10mm h 20mm h Once the charts speeds have been set up in this menu go to a process scre
215. e current specifications pricing or name of the nearest Authorized Distributor contact one of the offices below ASIA PACIFIC TAC hfs tac support honey well com Australia Honeywell Limited Phone 61 7 3846 1255 FAX 61 7 3840 6481 Toll Free 1300 36 39 36 Toll Free Fax 1300 36 04 70 China PRC Shanghai Honeywell China Inc Phone 86 21 5257 4568 Fax 86 21 6237 2826 Singapore Honeywell Pte Ltd Phone 65 6580 3278 Fax 65 6445 3033 South Korea Honeywell Korea Co Ltd Phone 822 799 6114 Fax 822 792 9015 EMEA Honeywell Process Solutions Phone 80012026455 or 44 0 1344 656000 Email Sales sc cp apps salespa62 honey well com or TAC hfs tac support honey well com AMERICA s Honeywell Process Solutions Phone TAC 1 800 423 9883 Or 215 641 3610 Sales 1 800 343 0228 Email Sales ask ssc honeywell com or TAC hfs tac support honey well com Specifications are subject to change without notice For more information To learn more about Paperless Recorders isit www honeywellprocess com Or contact your Honeywell Account Manager Process Solutions Honeywell 1250 W Sam Houston Pkwy S Houston TX 77042 Honeywell Control Systems Ltd Honeywell House Skimped Hill Lane Bracknell England RG12 1EB Shanghai City Centre 100 Jungi Road Shanghai China 20061 www honeywellprocess com 43 TV 25 11 October 2014 Honeywell
216. e USB1FREE Returns the percentage of free storage space available on the USB storage key fitted initially front or rear USB2 free storage space USB2FREE Returns the percentage of free storage space available on the USB storage key fitted after the first USB has been fitted front or rear UV1 to UV32 UV1 This allows a system to be setup where values can be altered to effect calcula tions without having to change the config uration Compact Flash is not available on the eZtrend See Comms variable Slave Comms Variable SCV 1 1 1 ft i Slave Comms Variable Slave No Transaction 1 Item 1 Table 13 8 Maths Function Table Maths Functions Syntax Description Add Returns the result of the addition ACos acos x Returns the Arc COS of x ASin asin x Returns the Arc SIN of x ATan atan x Returns the Arc TAN of x Ceiling ceil x Round up x to the nearest whole number Clear Event CLRE x Where x is the event number to be cleared 1 to 20 Cos cos x Returns the COSINE of x CosH cosh x Returns the Hyperbolic COSINE of x Damp damp x y Z x input y Pen pen variable being used and z damping limit in engineering units See Damping examples on page 276 Divide Returns the result of the division Eval evallx Returns 1 if x is non zero otherwise returns zero Exponent exp x Returns the Exponential of x 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue
217. e a 0 mV reference external to the recorder External Specify Uses a Reference Junction held at a constant temperature Specify the temperature that the cold junction sensor is to be set at External Input Use a thermocouple or resis tance thermometer from another channel to measure as the cold junction sensor If the type on analogue input is a Resistance Thermometer select this from the analogue input type drop down menu This screen only requires the range and the unit of measure to be entered A Resis tance Thermometer measures the resistance of the device and produces a temperature Not available on the eZtrend V5 If a Output card is fitted the available analogue outputs will be displayed as a list Click on an output and tick to enable select a pen from the drop down menu Tick to enable over range if required this allows 4 mA either side of 4 20 mA If this option is not available but the unit has a output card fitted check the details have been entered correctly in the Hardware wizard Analogue Output Setup or Re transmission forearm Click in any area on the screen and press F1 on the keyboard to display the related help files Be Digital input output port setup Digitals NB Each Input Output line is shared so it can only be an input or an output Select each digital from the list e g Dig1 this will appear in the Label box The label is to identify the condition of the input for example On State could be labelled Pu
218. e body the recorder name recorder number and the time date will be appended to the end of the message body text This is to allow easy identification of when the message was sent and by which recorder Any E mail message is sent as an effect within the recorder events system so anything that can be con figured to act as an event cause may be configured to send an E mail message Any E mail message may be sent to up to 8 of the recipients If the E mail server supports named groups of E mail addresses an E mail message may be sent to a combination of E mail addresses and E mail groups From the Events Set up screen Set up the required event marker messages Note that the same message may be used both as an event marker mark on chart and as part of an E mail message subject or body Select the E mail Set up button at the bottom of the Events Set up screen Enter the list of E mail recipients not forgetting the E mail Administrator address If either of the two E mail subject fields or larger E mail message blocks are required they will need to be set up Select the Done button to close the E mail set up screen Select the required event to which E mail message is to be attached and select The Add button below the Action list and from the list of available actions select E mail The Set up auto E mailing screen will then be shown Select the required E mail subject and message body text from the drop down list bo
219. e desired batch If data is downloaded part way through a batch the batch graph will display the start of the batch and a red dotted line showing where the batch was interrupted The Batch graph will prompt to be saved by default as the Batch Name or it can be renamed Load the same batch more than once and the Batch graph will be renamed with a suffix 001 002 etc Even if the graph is not saved the Events are entered into the database E Age AA BAA D AA JA PAR AA 4 t Fri Jan 21 2005 12 10 49 43 Rec Batch Test Start 216 Jser ID GRAHAM Comment 7 Double click on Start Batch Event marker to produce individual batch graphs FIGURE 9 9 D 11 1 AS nt 15 AG ey 18 18 20 21 22 3 24 25 M 2005 Fri Jan 21 12 00 4 228 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Retrospectively Graphing a Batch Honeywell Batch graphs can be created from existing data The Events and batch information can be viewed and exported to a spreadsheet in just the same way for batches that are created before the data is graphed e Open a graph showing the required data and go to the Events bar at the top of the graph e In the Events bar the cursor will change to a hand To start a batch right click in the Event bar at the approximate required location e Select Add Batch Start Event and enter the required time and date plus any batch information Do the same for the End Batch and to add any other User
220. e is for Internet websites except those listed in trusted and tricted oe oo Download unsigned ActiveX controls Disable recommended Security level for this zone Enable not seaure Allowed levels for this zone Medium to High Medium high a Acuvex controls not marked as safe for s a Appropriate for most websites _Nieshle frecammeanded Prompts before downloading potentially unsafe 4 w r content Takes effect after you restart your computer Unsigned ActiveX controls will not be downloaded Reset custom settings Enable Protected Mode requires restarting Internet Explorer Reset to Medium t high default Reset Custom level Default level Reset all zones to default level Cox cance 192 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Chapter 8 Comms Server Communications Server Comms Server Overview The Comms server will enable the user to e Monitor the status of communications with a device on any serial port up to 8 ports and an Ethernet connection e Connect to local and remote databases Set up local and remote servers Modbus protocols supported on Ethernet and Serial ports e Enable and disable ports Add edit and remove devices Log to database or client connections local or OPC client Comms Server Start up The Comms server can be opened using the Start Menu of your PC follow the path show
221. e keyboard to display the related help files For details on viewing recorder Events and Batch information see Recorder Event Batch Viewer on page 165 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Setting up Events Events can be set up so when a condition occurs during recording it produces an outcome this is known as Cause and Effect Select a Cause and the Effect by clicking on the Add box at the bottom of each Cause and Effect window for a selection list Limited Events are available on the eZtrend V5 For listings of Events Cause and Effects see See Appendix D Events on page 291 For displaying Events on a graph see Graphing Events on page 223 FIGURE 6 13 Name Enabled Star batch MV Show warnings Check all events Cause Effect Digital Inputs high lt 1 gt Logging lt Start gt Mark Chart lt Marker 2 gt Event lt 1 Events delayed by Add Set Remove Add Set Remove Related Settings Marker Setup Counter Setup Email Setup example shown is for a Minitrend V5 configuration As shown in Figure 6 13 one single cause can be set up to have many effects The event set up here shows that when the Digital Input goes high the effects will be e Logging will start Logging lt Start gt e A Mark will be placed on the chart Mark Chart lt Marker1 gt e Event 1 will be activated Event lt 1 Events delayed by 60 seconds If Into
222. e media is full e Internal memory Set the amount of time before the internal memory becomes full and data is lost and for the Error Alert Message to display on the screen Enter a time period of between 0 5 and 48 hours Export media Set the amount of time before the data being exported to a media becomes full and data is lost for the Error Alert Message to display on the screen Enter a time period of between 0 5 and 48 hours e FTP Memory Set the amount of time before the FTP memory becomes full and data is lost for the Error Alert Message to display on the screen Enter a time period of between 0 5 and 48 hours 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 109 110 Honeywell Pre Trigger The pre trigger functionality function captures a high resolution trend leading up to an event triggered by an alarm and optionally after the event Post Trigger where the information can then be viewed in TrendManager Pro for analysis Setup Window Scheduled Storage Alarm Pre Trigger Pre Trigger Tene Mins 7 Post Trigger Time Secs 1 Configuration The pre trigger system is simply configured by selecting which pens they wish to be included in the pre trigger by enabling the Pre Trigger item in the pen logging menu see Logging tab on page 79 and setting the desired pre trigger time which is common to all pens this is done here in the recording menu e Pre Trigger Time The pre trigger system can be co
223. e recorder name from the list to the graph area this will add all the recorders pens onto the graph or click on pens to list the pens available and drag the re quired ones onto the graph As soon as the pens are on the graph they should start to update in real time The graph will be split into two as below Figure 9 9 Realtime Graphing Recorders xl Li y E net Furnace1 PE Drag and Drop Recorder from the list onto the graph area Jeana oa Realtime button Modbus The white background area The blue background area recorder is the historical data is the real time data The white area for historical data will display the data that is stored to the database At this point we have no data being stored to the database it is simply being acquired and graphed if the graph is closed any data downloaded via Modbus will be lost 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Graphing Realtime Data Only data can be sent via Modbus so no recorder configurations or events are sent for Realtime and Logged data for the X Series and GR recorders FIGURE 9 10 Graph using data via Trendbus Batch Test Pen 1 Batch Test Pen 2 Batch Test Pen 3 Ee reac BE Realtime pens Logged data or data from Realtime data from the shown in orange a disk white scale same recorder To display realtime data on a graph left click on the Realtime
224. e temperature cycle Eg Into cycle is set to 110 can go higher in use once it drops back to the Out of cycle set eg Out of cycle is set to 90 the cycle is complete Out of cycle at Set Out of cycle as explained above in Into Cycle 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell AMS2750 Setpoint TUS mode The configured setpoint or soak level this is the level configured for each thermocouple configuration as per AMS2750 Up to 6 setpoints can be configured individually as a part of a single survey The set points must be done in an increasingly progressive order Setup Window Enabled v Setpoint 300 0 Deg C Stable Soak Time 30 Mins Tolerance Override M Tolerance 0 6 Deg C Select a Setpoint Enabled Default is off Check to enable Setpoint Enter the survey setpoint value as a temperature Stable Soak Time soak time for the actual survey period Per AMS2750 the minimum survey soak time is 30 minutes Tolerance Override Check to enable This will become the working tolerance for the soak in the TUS as opposed to the tolerance for the class Tolerance set a tolerance override temp value AMS2750 Furnace Stability Detection TUS mode During the TUS the recorder starts to monitor all sensors for stability all sensors must remain stable for a minimum of 2 minutes in order to progress to in soak in stability mode no TC s can drift by more than X degrees within
225. e window Open each folder in ts own yindow bck teens a folos th Single cick to open an tem port to select a Unddedine icon tiles consistent wath my browser Undedine icon tiles only when port at them O Double check to open an tem ungle clch to select Restore Detauts 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell ee Select the View pane in order to be able to see some advanced settings The Folder Options window will change to look something like the following Folder Options poen Goreta View FileType Oilfine Files Folder wevn You can apply the view such at Detale of Thet that you are uing tor the folder to all folders inara Advanced vetting C Launch folder windows in a separate process Managing pars of Web pages and folders Show and manage the pai a a single fle Show both parts and manage them individually O Show both parts but manage as single fe 2 Remember each folders view settings Restore previous folder wendows at logon v Show Contot Panel in My Computer v Show encrypted of compressed NTFS files in color Z Show pop up desciption for folder and desktop items C Use sinple file sharing Recommended v Restore Detauts Cora Scroll to the bottom of the Advanced settings area of the window and make sure that the Use simple file sharing Recommended option is not enabled It has been disabled in the example screenshot above
226. eansezeede 104 Chart Controls Eyent Meeden ateeest Scere lees eters 209 Realtime cece cece cccccccsccsscsscsscsscsscssesseeseess 209 Chart Speed oesicistnacrsteatiinicneaneieinenanuaieen 108 Clear All Messages Event Effect srrncnmsan arune nnmn 104 323 Commenting in Scripts u 285 Comms Internet Security Settings OPC Interface Web Browser Comms Logging Realtime xiceiceaceceecacieictetecentctied fuccvh besiesiesdieedins Comms Server Add a Database Add a Database Server Add a Deyice asies Add a new Device Add Pens for Logging Administration Client Connections COMMS P rts seison tosiinsa Configure Database Logging oo ee 197 Connect to a Database o eceecececececeeeeeeeeeeeee 200 Connect to a Database Server o e 197 Database sicivedsciecdessescesidensdeecdesstssesi tsisineoesensvavossosss Database Logging Database Servers Delete a Database Delete a Device Diagnostics ne Edit a Device oe Logging Configuration Network Settings oo eeeeeseseeseseeeeesseneens SEUD caise onne i ERE RNR Status Screen eessseseseseresesiereresesereresrereresreresesrers Summary of Logging Changes 0 ee 207 Comms Server Start Up s 44 193 Comms Server Database uiceccccccccccccccscceevceeeee 211 COMMS Server OVETVIOW ss 193 Comms Server Status Screen rcccceccoeeccerveees 208 Communications Email Setup 0 0 00 Ethernet ou Modbus Master Network Admin Peer
227. eccseseccssssssescsssssescssesssssessesesssesseeseees 193 Comms Server OVErView ssssssssssssssssssssecscessessessescesecssessessessessessessessesseseassaesesasses 193 Database Size Management siscssssesesssssesssscrcsecsscecsessssscsscessessscsssesesssssssesessesseseses 199 Comms Server Setup ssssscsscsscsscsscsscsecsscsccsccscssessessessessessessessessessessessessessessessessesses 200 Comms Server Logging ssssssssscssssssssssssscvcescescescesssscsscssessessessessessessessessssseeseeseses 205 Comms Server Database scssssssssssesssscssssersssersesessesesseseseesessesessesesseseesers 211 System SCtup ssssesecsecsecseercercessescessesscsscsscsscsscsssesssssssessessssssssessessescessessesseseeseeseessess 211 Shutdown Server rccccccsssssssscsscsscsssssssscssssssscessesessnessecssssssssssscssssssoscessessesees 211 Chapter 9 Graphing in the TrendManager Suite 213 GaPhIN es Kvssdescasvssecssasacssscnctacsensiscscdsus oicessivesnssscessobes seas Gouseasescssacusbdsucesacsd sauce 213 Graph list r kas tl soededeva des coe o EESTE ae 213 Add New Graph lt 25282 Sunes socotscessvsiatewssszeossiapsscesctscedvatusebeseaccztedescasehasssensataseessetse soars 213 Graph VECOVTACT sisssssssssssseessesesseesessesecsvessessessescessessessesecsscsscsscssessessssssssssessssseaes 214 Traces ON Graphs osineen aiii A e E E EEE E 214 COPY agta phe aare aa A A EAA E E R 214 Graph with EVents nismranarnarrann ennn oia 214 GYGDIG Baith
228. ecessary Eg 1 5 3 evaluates to 18 If two operators have equal precedence they are evaluated from left to right Eg 6 4 2 3 8 multiply first then from left to right for the equal values The same equation with parenthesis can change what you calculate first Eg 6 4 2 3 12 brackets first then muliply then the equal values from left to right NOTE Round brackets are for precedence and square brackets are for functions Examples of expressions set up for Pen 1 LOG P2 30 The logarithmic value to base 10 of Pen 2 is then multiplyed by 30 P3 P4 100 The value of Pen 3 and 4 are added together then the Modulus function is applied This is where the sum is divided by 100 and only the remainder will be displayed ABS COS P2 30 100 The Cosine of Pen 2 divided by 30 is then multiplyed by 100 Then the Absolute function is applied if the result is positive or negative absolute will always display as a positive 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Precedence order Function Expression Associativity SQRT Square Root operator SQ Square operator ABS Absolute i operator amp left to right RECIPROCAL Reciprocal operator LOG Logarithm operator POWER Power operator right to left ROOT Root operator negate unary minus left to right MODULUS Modulus operator Divide operator left to right j Multiply operator Subtra
229. ecks for using Trend Server Pro sssssssesssssssssssessssscsesssesssesessees 27 TrendManager Suite User Groups after Migration ssssssssessessessecseseeees 28 Troubleshooting for TrendManager Suite Application csssssssesssesseees 31 Installation or Migration of TTENAVIEW Historian ccccsccsesecsesesesesees 34 Security Configuration Utility csscsscssscssssssssssssssssssssssssssssesessssssecnseess 36 Access OPC DA HDA Server rscsscsssssssosssscsccnsssscescssscssessesscssessessssnssserseees 38 Firewall settings on Windows 7 ssssssssssscseressessssssscssscsscscsssssessscessesssssssssessssesseees 39 Report Generation TOOL sesccssescoresaveesscesspienseveceneedsersebee sis coegeeesvivbeoenatsctestdeseetoen sense 44 Trend view Historidh cccceccvccsasseesasscassascateavegesavancentoa ce ssesssstusteocestenceotesaensosasnsecaessees 44 Start UP scasissseessisiesSsav sav sev ssssscscssecu ste esses des sed sussdseudsves sus ses sase da ass sddsganvansaadassancascenes Help sescasvsscessesesstesrsstsaessessesuessesensens ous ous ousoussosensss ses sescedaeseosabssesssscssessess SN a ES System Requirements Operation 49 Operation scesssrssssvecdesssvcrescdeceessansseesse cesses svonsoaseesdsedseaceseswase soevadedsens ST OTOS SSES 49 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Chapter 5 Help in the TrendManager Suite 51 Help Files TrendManager Suite seseeseeoeseeseseeoeseesoeoesoeeoeseeoeseeoeseeee
230. ect from None Single Point or Dual Point compensation Sensor Compensation may be required to improve accuracy on a sub range This is an adjustment to the value of the signal input on each channel based on the Engineering units settings 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Single Point Set the Comp Type to Single Point to adjust the signal input reading by an offset amount determined by the user Enter the Eng Offset adjustment required and this is added or subtracted for all future readings Dual Point Select Dual Point to change two points on the signal input reading The Dual Point adjust ment works in the same way but at two different points on the signal input The two points must be more than 50 of the engineering units away from each other Low Eng Set the low limit for the engineering units e e Low Offset enter an offset value that is offset against the low eng value e High Eng Set the high limit for the engineering units e High Offset enter an offset value that is offset against the high eng value High Limit Available when Range Type is set to User Defined Select and enter the high limit value e Lower Limit Available when Range Type is set to User Defined Select and enter the lower limit value RT Type Only available when Type is set to RT Resistance Thermometer Select this for a list of available RT types e Burnout Type Only available when Type is set to T
231. ed except for the Local Server 200 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Add a Device There are three ways to add a device they all deliver the same dialog box 1 Use the device icon in the top left of the comms server window 2 Right click on a selected Comms port in the left window COM1 to COM8 or Ethernet and select Add Device from the resulting menu 3 Select a Comms port and right click in a blank space in the top window and select Add Device from the resulting menu Add a Device via Ethernet Now the recorder must be added To do this click the add new device button The first in the row of three This will bring up the Device Details box All these methods will produce the Add Device Details box Areas of the box become greyed out as the selections are made For X Series and GRdevices the process of adding a device has been made very simple Use the Find Device button at the bottom of the dialog to see a list of available devices When you add a device using this method it will automatically populate the dialog with the recorder details See Find Device on page 203 Protocol 7 Modbus Profile Multitrend GR SX ID 1 hd Communications Port Slave ID Recorder Name Inactive Protocol For active Modbus devices the recorder name and protocol variant can be changed Modbus vs Modbus X For an inactive Modbus device the device profile can also be changed 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue
232. een added to TMSApplicationAc cessGroup TMSApplicationAccessGroup Properties General Be TMSApplicationAccessGroup Description Members A lamTMS RECORDER Operator 155 Changes to a user s group membership are not effective until the next time the user logs on a NOTE Ensure below steps once user is added to TMSApplicationAccessGroup to access TrendManager Suite application 1 Check for TrendManager Suite TMP and CommsServ folders are present in the virtual store of given user After locating the given folders in virtual store take backup and delete those folders from virtual store The virtual store is applicable for Windows Server 2012 Windows Server 2008 Windows 8 and Windows 7 2 Any user trying to use the TrendManager Suite Application from remote machine should be part of the TMSApplicationAccessGroup on the remote system 3 For ex lf TrendServer Pro is running under Domain User1 user on Machine A wants to access communications server of TrendServer Pro running under Domain User2 user on Machine B Then Domain User1 should be part of TMSApplicationAccessGroup of Machine B 4 lf a local user does not exists on the remote system then a new user with same user name and password can be created on the remote system and be added to the TMSApplicationAccess Group of the remote system in order to access communica tions server of the remote system 43 TV
233. eens are similar with a few additions to the TUS Furnace see below Setup Window Analogue In Analogue Out Alarm Dig IO Pulse In Linearisation AMS2750 TUS Furnace D i Name Furnace eej i Manufacturer D Model No Cass pa Mat Type Parts gt Shape Rectangular v Meas Units Feet gt Height 5 0 Feet F Recording Width 5 0 Feet E Transfer nepih ree ere Hardware Into cyde at 110 0 Deg C Out of cyde at 90 0 Deg C Reports Name Name or tag used to identify this furnace 40 characters of Alphanumeric Manufacturer Enter the manufacturer of the furnace Model No Unique Model or Serial number of this furnace 20 characters Alphanumeric e Class Enter the Furnace class 1 to 6 numeric Mat Type Enter the type of material or load Parts or Raw material furnace Shape Furnace shape rectangular cylindrical or other TUS mode only Meas Units Furnace measurement units Metres and millimetres or feet and inches TUS mode only Height Width Depth Furnace dimensions dependent on shape TUS mode only Note these are the dimensions for the qualified working area Inst Type A to E Refer to AMS2750 Process mode only Into cycle at used to define a temperature cycle for a certain number of uses When the fur nace has reached the high temperature set here and then falls below the Low temperature set in the menu below this is a complet
234. eir OPC demo software 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 239 Honeywell can be downloaded for free at httos www matrikonopc com downloads 145 specifica tions index aspx This example goes through the set up of the Matrikon OPC HDA Client and how to view historical data from the system where TrendManager Suite software is installed Retrieving Data from TrendView Historian Server Steps to retrieve historical data In Figure 10 2 only synchronous functionality is explained since Matrikon only support Synchronous interfaces For Asynchronous functionality use any other OPC client e g OSI PI HDA client 1 Start the Matrikon OPC HDA Explorer Client Matrikon OPC HDA Explorer screen is shown below FIGURE 10 2 MatrikonOPC HDA Explorer Client Startup Screen MatrikonOPC HDA Explorer 10 x File Server Function View Help Hei Trendiew Historian eee saa E 240 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell 2 To Connect the TrendView Historian Server on the local system click on the HDA Server list dropdown list and select Hci TrendView Historian Server For connecting to the TrendView His torian on a Remote system go to Step 4 FIGURE 10 3 Select Hci TrendView Historian Server from Server List MatrikonOPC HDA Explorer File Server Function Yiew Help Eci Trendview Historan eela em daze aa E 3 Click t Connect button to connect to the Hci TrendView Historian Server A
235. eld IO Setup X Series s 65 Foldet esses teases onsustasorited ennas Add a Folder Copy a Folder Delete a Folder Graph Folders Move a Graph between Folders ou 154 Rename a Folder oo cccececesseseseseseseeeeseeneseesees 154 From Network Setup sssri 159 FTP Comms X Series cc 94 F l Maths gsesnevsssesusssiownanionio 280 Full Maths amp Script Processing 271 Function Codes and Memory Maps 297 Fuzzy Logging sisses 79 Fuzzy Logging Setup u 130 Fuzzy Logging Appendix C ceeccccccccceee 287 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell G General Recorder Setup sses 127 General Recorder Setup X Series 58 CHOSSOIYV sesicsncrtaituseeaomidabomndanuaeentea Golden Batch nnns Graph a Recorder eeseccsssesssssssssssisssssissssvisssssseee Graph Button sss Graph Data Viewer M Graph Pen Data Source Viewer ec 233 Graph Set Time Span nsise 222 Graph Settings secschcnscicosasniccncaRnndnenn 121 Graph with Events ss 214 Graphing a Batch sss 226 Graphing a Batch Retrospectively 229 Graphing Events Groups X Series H Hardware Change sosser Hardware Setup sn Hardware Setup X Series a Help BUON snesena nannaa Historidh seksmecseiiannoumannieiani ens Hot Button Event Cause User Action I Import Button sssr 50 Import Data from a Recorder 150 Importing Data Setup Importing and Exporting Setups Impo
236. ell Table 6 3 Events Cause and Effect State Change T C Burn Out Analogue Input Scheduled Once Interval Specific Days Month End User Counters User Counter Max Mins Reset Reset Max Min values Power On Setup Change systern Internal Mem Low Export Mem Low FTP Mem Low User Action Mark Chart Hot Buttons x4 Batch Start Batch Stop Batch Pause Batch TUS Start Stop AMS2750 Timer TC Timers Process Timers Cause Effect Into Alarm Alarm Out of Alarm Mark on Chart Acknowledge Alarm Logging Start Stop Totaliser Totalisers Reset Digital Outputs Rollover Alarm Acknowledge On Digital Inputs Off Eman Screen Change Print Screen Counters Max Mins Reset Chart Control Clear All Messages Delayed Event Script Timers Play Sound Display Alert Batch Reports Update Tabular Readings Enter Replay Screen Exit replay Screen Change Chart Speed For Maths variable for counters see Maths Variable and Function Tables on page 272 When selecting Totalisers and Alarms etc ensure they are enabled and configured in the Pens tab 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Setting up an Event Setup Window Events Counters Preset Markers TimeSync General Ae ete ch WARNING en Field 10 Select an Event from the Events list and click in the Enabled bo
237. elling the system to process the information for Pen 2 and add it to the marker lt ILP2U gt means add Pen 2 as a label plus the units of measurement to the marker This will insert the values of Pen 1 with the Units for Pen 1 and the value of Pen 2 and the Units Pen 2 into the marker A tag must be placed within the text to ensure the recorder information e g the Pen value is inserted When the marker text is finished click on the Add Tag button and click Done when all markers are com plete For help on setting up markers use the Marker tables only available for Honeywell V5 recorders on page 141 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 43 TV 25 11 Honeywell Marker tables only available for Honeywell V5 recorders Embedded parameter tags lt gt Conirol Type Variable Type Process Pens Pen number Digital Inputs Digital number Relays Relay number Totals Counters Sub type Event Event number Alarm Alarm number Digital Digital number User Conirol Type Variable Name Comms port System Disk usage PC card usage Memory usage ASCII Input Front RS232 Rear RS485 Rear RS232 Conirol Type Variable Type Label Label Pens Pen number Tag Description Units Scale Digital Inputs Digital number Tag State text
238. elong to the batch that is controlled by Group 1 Screens can now be set to display groups in this mode only messages associated with that group i e pens within that group or batch messages for that group will be shown on the chart Remember when you have set up your batch requirements you need to assign pens to the batch group Group name Enter the group name for the batch run e Batch name Enter the name of the batch name and setup a list of additional names to appear as a pick list as a part of the Batch Control screen 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 119 120 Honeywell e User ID Enable this to make this a requirement when starting a new batch The User ID display name can be renamed and a list of additional names can be setup to appear as a pick list during the Batch Control setup If Passwords are active on the recorder then the User ID page will be skipped for user entry and the name of the person logged in through the password system will be automatically entered e Field 1 Defaults to Lot Enable this to make this a requirement when starting a new batch The Lot number display name can be renamed and a list of additional names can be setup to appear as a pick list during the Batch Control setup The addition list names will not appear in a drop down list in the Batch Control screen unless you enable Show n List in the group properties menu e Field 2 Defaults to Description Enable this to make this a requ
239. en displaying data on a chart and touch the screen This will activate the Settings menu in the top right of the screen select this to display the 3 categories set Recording tab Scheduled Use this screen to set up a scheduled export of data e Schedule Export Tick to enable e Export Device Select the device you wish to export data to USB1 is the first USB device to be fitted and USB2 is the second one fitted front or rear of the recorder Compact Flash not available for the eZtrend QXe and the rear USB port is only available as an option For Multitrend GR2 and Minitrend GR3 recorder configuration via front SD card is supported DR Graphic USB ports are internal to the recorder and can be accessed by opening the door e Update Period Select how often you wish data to be exported from the list provided 10 minutes to 24 hours e Log Messages Tick to add a message to the messages list when a scheduled export has been performed 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell e Mark Chart Only active when Log Messages is enabled Tick to mark the chart when a scheduled export has been performed Setup Window Scheduled Storage Alarm Pre Trigger Schedule Export Export Device USB1 Update Period 12 Hours hd Log Messages Mark Chart Storage Alarm The storage alarm function is linked to the Error Alert system when there is a requirement for a time period to be set to alert the user before the storag
240. ent 1 5 per month or partial month dur ing which such amount was owed and unpaid or the highest rate allowed by law from the date such amount originally became due until finally paid If the audit reveals that Licensee has underpaid Honeywell by five percent 5 or more of the amount owed Licensee shall immediately reimburse Honeywell for its reasonable costs and expenses associated with such audit 9 LIMITED WARRANTY WARRANTY DISCLAIMER 9 1 Limited Warranty If the license to the Licensed Software was purchased from a party other than Honeywell Honeywell disclaims all warranties for the Licensed Software as further described in Section 9 2 and the warranty if any shall be provided solely by the party from which the license was purchased If the license to the Licensed Software was pur chased directly from Honeywell Honeywell warrants that the media on which the Licensed Software is delivered will be free from defects in materials or workmanship for a period of ninety 90 days from the date of shipment of such media to Licensee Warranty Period If during the Warranty Period the media on which Licensed Software is delivered proves to be defective Honeywell will repair or replace such media at Honeywell s option as Licen see s sole remedy for any breach of warranty hereunder Licensee assumes full responsibil ity for i the selection of the Licensed Software ii the proper installation and use of the Licensed Software
241. eoeseeoeseeee 51 Context sensitive help files Howto do things cccrcveccocstenccizcsccascccsevesssosseseuds csarcccsovsbovtssadcvatad eovecseevsvecadsecsneeteresees P rts of the proram siesisesraoesiet ian ians aas onosai naei Esinsin sianie Technical papers Searching in Help FING a a RAET EAA E A OO EEEE R RRR Help Topics Baek r nee E A AE E E A a E E Ea Print saesse sacSeussosausesssbdsu5 e TESE SEISTE EEr EASTEN SEESE s E R ER SS ODUONS soosoo rri a a ri AE iera ERER EEA A R E E RER Chapter 6 Recorder Configuration from TrendManager Suite 53 X Series and GR Recorders rccsssssssssssssssssssesssssesessesecsssssssesesssesesevevees 53 Recorder Setup iorri n E E E E E S 53 Adad New Device iecascassicssacecvadesdctscadcisesncotscuceveesssesuscussceveveccauntseiasts cue ssaseversbessesetes es 53 SetuP WINGOW sccscsssssodadsdensossdocconsnnssenssocsesensnssn dessa EE E ESEE EDETS 57 General Setup srren iiinis ine artise ERS ETit r SNAS 57 Field IO PONS ecssessesses sdseasveses cae oea boa soa es soesdesestoessesesiestessee TS vE PERTE vE Sea SoSo Stoi VEn ETS EES S ses Comms Events Cou nterS casssssssassatsessussaseuson son seesossdstossesseesesseonessessesssssessessodseseassuseasensosssnses 95 COUNLELS Vacs E A yea seabidesa E cosbesdsassbesiea 105 Preset Markers sereni oii e EEE EEE O spuds ceccesssden te A 105 TIME SYNC sistit inode N AE RR E 106 VETEEN arnai a E E E T E E E E E E E E 106 RECOVAING AD
242. eports To oN OFF User Messages and Chart v Honeywell For all cards select each Alarm Digital to display the configuration Each channel has a list of items to be configured Enabled Tick to enable Digital Type This is set to Output Relay contact Power for the Alarm Relay cards Tog gle between Input and Output or Pulse Input for the Digital IO card On the 4 Relay Alarm card only output type is available Channels 1 to 6 on the 8 Alarm Relay card are outputs channels 7 amp 8 can be either inputs or outputs Note Pulse Input only available on channels 1 to 4 for slot G 14 to 20 for slot H and 33 to 36 for slot e Output Output only The relay outputs can be set to be either Latched or Single Pulse A Latched relay will be maintained in its active state until the trigger source has returned to a non alarm state For Single Pulse the relay will go active for a period of time specified by the user then return to a non active state The time out period remains independent of the length of time the active state remains If the output is set to Single Pulse when the alarm is activated the signal will display a single pulse for the duration set See Pulse Duration The alarm will trigger again when it goes into an active alarm state NOTICE Outputs that are set to Single Pulse should not be used as a part of a maths expression as it can cause spurious values 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 Decembe
243. er defined 1g a pean ID or can be added as a part of a Marker Places a Marker on its own plus a user defined 19 HL Lot number Lot information or can be added as a part of a Marker Places a Marker on its own plus a user defined 20 iC Comment Comments or can be added as a part of a Marker Pause can be de activated by using E End Batch R Resume or A Abort It is recommended that the Batch name or number be added to S E and A to identify the batch Examples of Batch Event markers 1 S 240 Roger C Start Event Count lt PCE1 gt 2 P 240 C Pause for reading lt PCE1 gt 3 A 240 Roger lt PCE1 gt 4 E 240 Roger C End Event Count lt PCE1 gt Marker number 1 S Start Batch 240 is the Batch name l ID of User Roger C Comment Start Event Counter lt PCE1 gt Process Counter Event1 To increment batch numbers use the Counters feature See Event Counter Setup on page 143 142 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 43 TV 25 11 Honeywell Markers on the Recorder When Event Batch markers have been set up they can be up loaded into the recorder using the FTP facility See Importing Data via FTP or Secure Communication Interface on page 157 Markers can also be entered into the recorder via the keypad on the front of the recorder Turn the thum bwheel to produce an arrow press to select The chart menu will appear select t
244. ere the user can also see which server the comms server is using which pens are avail able on each recorder and the comms server status Realtime 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 49 50 Honeywell Import button Use the Import button to retrieve data or import a setup from an external storage device only This button will implement the Import Settings Window which will allow the user to browse for network data or data from a device media disk and import into a database Before importing a setup or data please read Importing on page 155 For TrendServer only the facility to Import data from other recorders using TCP IP Ethernet connection is available see Importing via FTP or Secure Communications Interface on page 157 Import Data Conversion Tool The Import function has a built in Data Conversion Tool facility that allows the data to be imported from other Honeywell devices for use in the TrendManager Suite See Importing Data from other Honeywell devices on page 156 Help button The TrendManager Suite Help Index contains everything you need to know for configuring the recorder including a How to do things section Parts of the program plus Technical papers and Contact information This Help button will access the general help file For recorder specific help select the item on the screen under enquiry and press F1 on the keyboard See Help Files TrendManager Suite on page 51 Help
245. erties menu See General Batch Properties Group on page 61 60 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell General Batch Properties Group Automated batch counters Each group can maintain its own batch counter this can be configured to start at any desired value and be incremented by any set amount The batch counter can be included in the batch name which itself can contain additional information e Auto Pop Wizard When enabled this will automatically populate the Batch Control screen with the properties entered into that specific Group e Auto Pop Name This is the name of the group that will have it s properties populate the Batch Control screen e Zero Pad Count This refers to the amount of zeros that will be added to the embedded batch counter Eg BATCH 2 GC 000001 This has to have the same amount of digits to accommodate the largest number the counter will reach which will be the Rollover value If this is not enabled the leading zeros will not be shown e Ctr Start This refers to the number at which the batch counter will start e Ctr Increment This is how much the counter will increase or increment by e Ctr Rollover Enter the number at which you want the counter to reach before it starts again Show name List only appears when Auto Pop Wizard is off Enable this to allow any additional list item names to appear in a drop down list in the Batch Control screen See belo
246. es that support an OPC client This provides a realtime interface between servers and clients The OPC Server in the TrendServer Pro software is OPC 2 0 DA compliant and for the X Series recorders use a OPC 3 0DA and Alarm amp Events 1 1 OPC Server for direct connection to the recorders OPC is a firmware option that can be activated using the credit system in the X Series recorders OPC Server The OPC Server is automatically registered when the package is installed and is available from within the client package as Trendview OPC 1 When using an OPC Client to connect to the TrendServer OPC Server Version 100 1 0 or higher you will need to add the OPC client user to the TMSApplicationAccessGroup if this has not already been done Refer to Chapter 3 Installation for more details To construct a Pen tag the user can browse if available with the client package The recorders will be grouped under the communications port that they are connected to COM 1 to 8 and Ethernet A list of recorders will be displayed under each port and within each recorder list of available pens Constructed port recorder pen tag e g Ethernet Rec 0002 Pen 1 CV Please refer to 43 TV 25 41 Trendview Historian User Guide for information on the TrendviewHistorian software which uses OPC HDA to obtain data Each pen has 6 Tags available which are CV the current process value Zero Bottom of scale in engineering units Span Top of scale in engineeri
247. esescescescescssescsscescescescescescessessessesseeseeces Batch Mod vvsissstvscecssdectesescssssiecesistesscocssvcssscseusessosetucacdessegusesassestusecesseosnes 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK v Honeywell Exporting data to a spreadsheet e seeeessesessesosseeoeseeoeseeeoroesoeoesoeoonseeoeseeoeseseeee 178 System status Password Status E Mail Realtime SEINER x Sesser ES ES E suns eadsscecuae sodeeceauesussesbetengasaasecvassnasscoacesoasaan Archive Database Server Adda Remote Server merrnin eetas a O ER R RR a Delete a servera arano E VE S ASEE ETE eh Change the current Server Passwords woisssrsossrsssssssososessossssosssssssesesorossssdosseepessoosvtors socos ooi ss otos os sosoo P ssword Control rzneminnenarniasn a na devs epbaptesaetenabebeey Change Password Jeanann aa ia a i Password User Manager Passwordiaccess table arien a E cased a RR E R Audit Manager wissssrsersersersesscrscsscsscescesees Trend Server Pro with OPC Server essesssssonoseesosesouecovossosesossssosssesesosossessoss 189 OPC Server OPC Clients OPC Interface Open Process Control e eeseseseeoeseseeesosoeceoesesecosoesesesosoeoceesese 190 Web BrowSer ssssccsrsssessersrcsereessccersccenescsescsnsccseescssescesseesscesessessssscsssseseesesess 191 Internet Security Settings susscscssessssesescscescscescsscscssscssescescescescessessesseesesssessses 192 Chapter 8 Comms Server 193 Communications Server csccccsssssscesscc
248. essage will appear and the Communication Service will start Subsequently the Communication Service UI will also appear Ci TMS Communications Service successfully started Select No and no further action will be taken 194 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell If the TrendServer software is not running when the Communication Service Ul is open per forming any activity in Communication Service UI will appear with the following message i Communications ServiceUI A Connection to Communications Server could not be established Select Comms Server UI from the menu to start Open Comms UI Start Server Shutdown Server About Versions Preferences pmm mm e pem O T eS Y If the Communication Service UI is open with Non Admin privileges the following message will pop up Communication Service failed to start ea 1 TMS Communications Service is not installed or Failed to open the S service If the Communication Service UI is open with Administrative privileges the following message will pop up and the Communication Service will start i TMS Communications Service successfully started 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 195 Honeywell at the bottom right of the screen Double click or right click to open loads au tomatically with TrendServer The comms server manages the communica tions status of devices on a serial port RS485
249. et Relay Close relay output s Clear Relay Counter Control Open relay output s Add to or Reset a counter Event Trigger another event s Chart Control Chart control method Pause Resume or Tog gle E mail E mail a message to a user Flush Data Flush all logging data to Disk or PC card Reset Max Mins Resets visible max mins 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Cause and Effect X and GR Series Table 16 Cause X and GR Series Recorders Method Description Into Alarm When alarm state is entered Out of Alarm When alarm state is exited Acknowledge Alarm Acknowledge an active alarm latched or normal Totaliser Start When totaliser is started Totaliser Stop When totaliser is stopped or paused Totaliser Reset When a totaliser is reset Totaliser Rollover When a totaliser rollover occurs Digital Inputs On A digital input has been applied Digital Inputs Off A digital input has been removed Digital Input State Change When a digital input has changed state On or Off TC Burn Out Scheduled When a Thermocouple is in burn out state Setup a Schedule on a timed Interval on Specific days or at the Month End or just Once User Counters User Counter Max Mins Reset Reset max Min values Power On Setup Change Int Mem Low Exp Mem Low system FTP Mem Low User
250. etwork ID Slave ID Recorder Name Status Socket raj os 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Modbus X v XXXXXX XXX v 0 a 0 XS Active ee ee 309 310 Honeywell Print Profile The Print Profile function can be found in the File drop down menu There are two options e Current View This will print exactly what you can see on the Profile Workspace window at the time you select the Current View option e Full View This will print the full contents of the Profile window showing each Group Channel etc completely expanded through all levels Figure 18 3 shows the two print options available Current View on the left and Full View on the right FIGURE 18 3 Print Profile options Current and Full View Profile Workspace Profile Workspace E Profile Name Henry 2 XX ID 1 E Profile Name Henry 2 XX ID 1 Description MiniTrend Description MiniTrend Input Registers Input Registers E Group 1 16 Channels starting address Group 1 16 Channels starting add MODBUS register address MODBUS register address NumberOfChannels 6337 Channel 1 Pen 1 Temp 0 000000 NumberOfChannels Channel 2 Pen 2 0 000000 50 00 16 Channel 3 Pen 3 3 6 Log Channel 1 Pen 1 Temp 0 000 Channel 4 Pen 4 0 000000 100 0 B Channel Name Channel 5 Pen 5 0 000000 50 00 Pen 1 Temp Channel 6 Pen 6 0 000000 200 0 Channel 7 Pen 7 0 000000 100 0 Channel 8 Pen 8 0 000000 10
251. f flow meter 3 is more than 1 2 and 4 GLBV1 3 If yes then set display indicator to meter 3 return A3 And return the current flow reading else If none of the above are true then 4 is biggest GLBV1 4 So set display indicator to meter 4 return A4 And return the current flow reading In this application the flow meters are connected to inputs 1 2 3 and 4 at the rear of the re corder and these are recorded on Pens 1 to 4 P1 A1 P2 A2 P3 A3 P4 A4 Pen 5 has the script above which records and displays the highest flow rate of the four Pen 6 is set to record and display the input between 1 and 4 that is the highest rate P6 GLBV1 NOTICE Please note Pn is not entered in the Maths Block and is assumed by the Recorder e g To enter the equation P2 A2 the user would just type A2 Example 2 In the same application as above the user has noticed that whilst flow meter 2 normally has the highest flow rate on occasion a surge in flow meter 3 causes problems down stream The user needs to monitor the two inputs and count the number of times flow meter 3 reading ex ceeds that of flow meter 2 The code consists of the two flow meter readings and a change counter that totals the number of times that flow 3 exceeds that of flow 2 The pseudo code is written as If flow meter 3 has a larger reading than flow meter 2 check to ensure that it was already great er than meter 2 if it was return the latest c
252. f the chart has been stopped ee Prefill this will clear the chart and then fill it with the current reading Setup Window WARNING Events are credit controlled Eventi Changes here may not be reflected on the recorder gt Enabled m Recording s Type a Chart Action 210 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Comms Server Database On system start up the Communications Service will start automatically This service is responsible for launching database related components System Setup The system can be set up two ways 1 For customers who are setting up in preparation for the arrival of their devices Using the TrendServer and Comms Server software create a database for the device s and configure each device for logging using the comms server When the devices are in place and connected check the IP address for Ethernet devices only and the device ID is cor rect 2 For larger networks Set up the hardware first noting each devices ID and IP address Use the comms server software to set up the devices on a database and configure log ging for each device The devices will need to be set up on the TrendServer software before the connections can be tested and become active Shutdown Server The Communications Server appears as an icon in the Windows system bar at the bottom right of the screen Right click on that icon and you will see the pop up below Open Comms UI Start Server
253. fa Shared Folders Users C Groups Performance ga Device Manager E Storage Ey Services and Applications 4 Local Users and Groups Name Full Name Description New User User name Full name Description Password Confirm password 7 User must change password at next logon User cannot change password Password never expires Account is disabled d Provide User Name and Password The new user will get created h The Administrator Non Administrator users who are not part of TMSServiceAccess Group or TMSApplicationAccessGroup will be able to use the TrendManager Suite application if they are already configured with required settings like Windows privileges folder access permissions and DCOM access permissions similar to the configured set tings during TrendManager Suite application installation i During uninstallation the TMSServiceAccessGroup and TMSApplicationAccess Group are not deleted Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Migration Migration of TrendManager Suite Prerequisites e Close all the Windows applications before starting TrendManager Suite e It is not recommended to load multiple installation programs on the same PC You must be a member of Administrators group to install uninstall TrendManager Suite Migration of TrendManager Suite e Load the DVD into the drive and wait for the autorun sequence to start If the autorun does not commence follow these
254. ft on any TC 76 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Pens Select the Pens tab to display all the pens available and the associated pen tabs including General Enter individual pen information See General tab on page 77 Scales Set up scale parameters for each pen See Scales tab on page 78 Logging Set up logging configuration for each pen See Logging tab on page 79 Maths Edit the maths or this particular pen See Maths tab on page 80 Totals Set up Totaliser settings for each pen See Totals tab on page 82 Alarms Set up the alarm profiles for each pen See Alarms tab on page 84 RAV This will display the Rolling Average for this pen See RAV on page 86 General tab Enabled Tick to enable e Tag Select and use the on screen keyboard to type in an identifier for the pen Up to 48 characters e Description Screen Designer screens only Enter a screen description in this field that will then be displayed on the Screen Designer screen e Group This pen can be allocated to a group of pens If you select a group here this pen will be added to it The group can then be renamed to rename these groups see Groups tab on page 59 The AMS2750 screen has a group name selection where you can select the groups 1 to 6 Screen setup is done in the recorder Groups 1 to 6 relate directly to furnaces 1 to 6 e Line Options Select and set the Trace Width for t
255. ft to right this screen shows if the pen is enabled the Pen name the Logging Type logging Rate logging Method and the Units of measure for each pen Setup Window cS General Pens Groups Batch Credits Printer Error Alert i Field 10 El Temp Continuous 10 Min Sample i Pen 2 Continuous 1Min Sample Pen 3 Continuous 2Min Sample N Pen 4 Continuous 30 Sec Sample i Pen 5 Continuous 10 Min Sample YI Pen 6 Continuous 1Min Sample i Pen 7 Continuous 30 Sec Sample Events Counters YI Pens Continuous 30 Sec Sample i Pen 9 Continuous 100ms 10Hz Sample Screens YI Pen 10 Continuous 100ms 10Hz Sample 7i Pen 11 Continuous 100ms 10Hz Sample Recording YI Pen 12 Continuous 100ms 10Hz Sample i Pen 13 Continuous 10 Sec Sample YI Pen 14 Continuous 10 Sec Sample i Pen 15 Continuous 10 Sec Sample YI Pen 16 Continuous 10 Sec Sample rata Hardware N Zero Line Continuous 100ms 10Hz Sample YI Event Test Continuous 100ms 10Hz Sample Reports 7il Batch Test Continuous 100ms 10Hz Sample i Totals Test Continuous 10 Sec Sample 3 Comms v m ki 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 43 TV 25 11 Honeywell Groups tab This menu is used for re naming the groups The same pen can only be associated in one group To add a pen to a group see Pens on page 77 You may want to create groups of pens in order to e Acknowledge Alarms by pen groups e Reset Max Min Reset Max or Reset Min b
256. g overloaded by events from within the script system each time an event is triggered from within a script it will apply a 1 second automatic lock preventing the same event from being triggered more then once a second irrispective of the CLRE x being called for that event Damping examples Example 1 if P1 was measuring degrees C the expression P1 damp A1 P1 3 will damp the signal with changes up to 3 degrees C any change over 3 degrees between readings will be damped but by a small amount Example 2 P5 damp A2 P5 A3 will damp the A2 input up to a level determined by input A3 note the reference parameter P5 is always the same as the pen it is being used in this should always be the case Table 13 9 Compare amp Convert Syntax Description RHc rhe x y Returns Relative Humidity with y as the dry bulb temperature in degrees C and x the wet bulb tem perature in degrees C RHf rhf x y Returns Relative Humidity with y as the dry bulb temperature in degrees F and x the wet bulb tem perature in degrees F C2f c2f x Converts a temperature in C to one in F F2c f2c x Converts a temperature in F to one in C Hi hi x y Returns the larger value of x amp y Hi4 hi4 x y x1 y1 Returns the larger value of x y x1 y1 Inside inside x y Z Returns x if between y amp z otherwise returns 0 Lo lo x y Returns the lower value of x amp y Lo4 lo4 x y x1 y1 Returns the lower value of x y
257. g test a slide out pane from which further selections W 0118 Events test can be made D 0109 Rogers Recor The Graphs button in TrendViewer will reveal a E co00 digital vO Te slide out pane from which further selections can be made To show one graph Realtime available on TrendServer lists recorders available on the communications server Both the Import and the Help button will produce message boxes The System and Server buttons available on TrendServer only Graphs button Activate this button to show the Graphs Slide out Pane From here graphs can be added and stored Click on Add new Graph and instructions will appear Click on the Folders heading and a further slide out bar appears This is a list of Folders in which the user can organise their graphs Recorder button The recorder button activates the Recorders Slide out Pane which is the main area of control for the recorder and databases Click on Add New Recorder and a Select new device box will appear Click on the Database Recorder heading and select Add New Database a message box will appear for the new details to be entered This will help the user organise their recorders Realtime Communications Available with TrendServer only ee E E Left click on the Realtime icon from the tool bar down the left side of the main screen This will produce the Recorders pane displaying the record ers that are available on the communications server From h
258. ged off from the system NB Only Ethernet communications is available on the eZtrend V5 RS485 communications is available on the eZtrend as an option A communications card and an expansion card must be fitted in the recorder See Appendix E Ethernet amp E mail on page 295 for more information Communications Server The Comms server software manages the communications status of a recorder across a comms port connection Data can be configured for logging to a database and realtime data transferred direct through a client connection such as TrendServer software Note The Comms Server is launched as a Service and need to make sure it is running to get real time and FTP data Recorders are added to the comms server via connections to communications ports When recorders are entered they can be configured for logging data to a database When the data is logging the recorder will appear in the database list Databases can be added using the Database server Realtime data is setup through the comms server showing client connections i e the TrendServer software and comms port settings Realtime logging can be done through the TrendServer software or through the comms server All data logged or realtime can be interfaced directly from the comms server to the server application software client connection To access the Comms Server and Real time ensure the recorders required have been added into the comms server If Comms Server
259. ger Suite User has option to select a destination folder of his choice to backup The newer version of TMS maintains a single Master copy of data and configuration for all TMS users This is mandatory to prevent issues maintaining dataset for each TMS user The tool lets you backup the dataset for each TMS user in olders versions You can later choose a dataset of a particular user to make t as a Master copy Choose backup location Browse Folder ProgramData TrendManagerSuite_Backup PR Copy Status Not Started Note This operation may take long time depending on the size of the data extn Cory The tool has detected TMS data in the backup location Click on Continue to choose a master copy Click on Start Copy to start the backup once again e Click on Start Copy to initiate the backup of data e If there is not enough space on the destination to backup data there would be a noti fication to the user about the same and user needs to select a different location to backup data 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 25 Honeywell e Once backup is complete click on Continue button to launch Migration Window 26 The newer version of TMS maintains a single Master copy of data and configuration for al TMS users This is mandatory to prevent issues maintaining dataset for each TMS user to prevent iSsues and maintaining dataset The tool lets you backup the dataset for each TMS user in olders versions
260. ggle On to enable Slave Friendly name Enter a name to easily identify this slave device e ID This is to connect to slave ID e Port Select this for a list of available ports either Ethernet or RS485 For port configura tion see Ports on page 94 e Network Name Ethernet only Enter the recorders IP address or the Network name eg XS nnnnnn where nnnnnn is the recorder s 6 digit Serial number See TCP IP tab on page 92 for the recorder s IP address and serial number e Protocol Select this for a list of available protocols Modbus or Modbus X Modbus and Modbus X can both use Ethernet or RS485 Ports Protocols define the format in which the data is transferred from the recorder to a PC or transfer between other devices and peripherals FPLB Floating Point Little Endian Byte Swapped Format amp FP B Floating Point Big Endian Format are standard notations e Static Transaction 1 8 is a request for a register or set of contiguous registers Enabled Toggle On to enable the first transaction request Direction Direction for the data to flow In to or Out from the recorder Command This is the type of Registers used by the slave device Refer to the indi vidual memory map for the register type used for each type of device Data Type Refer to individual memory maps for each type of device to determine the type of data Eg signed 16 bit int unsigned 16 bit int or IEEE float X Series
261. hange count value 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell If it was not greater than meter 3 last time set a flag to indicate a change and increment the change counter by 1 then return the latest change counter If flow meter 3 is less than 2 simply return the change count value with no increment Pen 7 is used to implement this script and is implemented as follows if A3 gt A2 Tests if A3 is bigger than A2 if BLKV1 1 If it was then tests if A3 was bigger than A2 last time period return BLKV2 If it was return with the current change counter else If not then BLKV1 1 Set flag to show that A3 has just exceeded A2 BLKV2 BLKV2 1 Increment the change counter by 1 Return BLKV2 Return the new change counter total else If A3 is not bigger than A2 BLKV1 0 Set flag to show A2 is bigger than A3 this time Return BLKV2 Return current change counter With script above BLKV all Variables are used to maintain values It should be noted that BLKV s do not persist over a power removal and if the application were to require a non vol atile count then BLKVn should be substituted with PSTVn Example 3 The application described in Examples 2 and 3 is to be extended to totalise the amount of time that Input 1 is the highest of 1 2 3 amp 4 Again scripting can be used to easily solve this requirement The Pseudo code is written as If input 1 is indicated as the current highest value then display
262. hat understand the protocol Registers can be used as bitmasks for Discrete Inputs or Coils as well as 2 byte integer values or 4 byte floating point numbers In all a Modbus memory map can support 4 different sets of D o o register types being Discrete Inputs Coils Input Registers and Holding Registers TrendManager Software Suite supports command 04 input registers at 3xxxx and 03 command read holding registers at 4xxxx addresses in December 2006 release and later TrendManager Software Suite currently supports getting Input Registers as floating point values so it will obtain two 2 byte registers in order to get a 4 byte floating point num ber TrendManager Software Suite does not support programming writing register val ues in a device The default is N 8 1 which means no parity 8 data bits and 1 stop bit This is currently the only byte option supported by Comms Server In order for TrendManager Software Suite to talk to a Modbus enabled device it needs to know something about the Modbus memory map of that device Without knowledge of the Modbus memory map of a device Trend Manager Software Suite will not know what data it can get from the device and where it can get it from The proprietary protocol Trend bus used by Honeywell V5 devices allows a device setup to be transmitted in realtime to TrendManager Software Suite thus permitting instant setup of realtime data retrieval Th
263. he Mark on chart option from the menu using the thumbwheel Text can be entered using the thumbwheel creating a new mark on chart or editing existing markers For details on viewing recorder Events and Batch information see Recorder Event Batch Viewer on page 165 Barcodes for Batch Batch markers can be created using independent barcode software The barcodes can then be read using a barcode wand or reader Any type of Batch marker can be encoded into a barcode using the same control characters used to build up a batch marker HS 216 A Fred C Test This example shows a barcode encoded to start a batch S Start Batch 216 Batch name User ID is Fred IC Comment text is Test A barcode with up to 25 characters including spaces can be read into the recorder using the RS232 interface and suitable RS232 ASCII barcode reader Event Counter Setup The Event Counter option is not available on the eZtrend V5 The Counter system can be used as a Cause or an Effect The Counter Cause triggers an Effect when a Counter reaches a specified value The Counters can be reset using the Event Effect Counters as a Cause Under the Cause window click on Add select Counter as a Cause to produce the Counter Cause Setup box Enter the Type of counter from one of the four programmable counters Event Alarm Dig ital or User All except User are continually running in the background and are already enabled The User
264. he user can also set the above fields except Lot Number from a set of predefined list Groups must be set up see See Pens on page 77 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 59 Honeywell NOTICE List driven data fields The next 5 fields are available for data entry associated with a batch The names can be overridden to suite the end user application all fields are now 69 character long with the exception of the User ID which is 32 A pre defined list of up to 30 items can be config ured to allow users to select input for these fields from a list rather than type them in every time E g a user might have 8 different products running though the same process these can be pre configured so when starting a batch the user can pick from a list of products The pre defined lists have to be enabled in the individual group screen eg Show List A set of functions are available to retrieve the list index from within Maths allowing state based processing during user selection See Table 13 7 on page 272 Properties Name Props Enter the name of the batch name and setup a list of additional names to appear as a pick list as a part of the Batch Control screen in the recorder e User ID Props Enable this to make this a requirement when starting a new batch The User ID display name can be renamed and a list of additional names can be setup to appear as a pick list during the Batch Control setup If Passwords are active on the rec
265. he user to carry out numerous mathematical functions Some examples are shown below Table 13 14 Full Maths examples Full Maths examples P4 lo A1 A2 Pen 4 shows the result of the lowest of either A1 or A2 P3 A1 A2 SQRT A3 Pen 3 shows the result of Analogue input 1 added to Analogue input 2 all multiplied by the square root of Analogue input 3 P4 GLBV1 P4 shows the Global Variable 1 NOTICE Please note Pn is not entered in the Maths Block and is assumed by the Recorder e g To enter the equation P2 A2 the user would just type A2 Edit Maths E o 280 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Script Function Application Examples Scripting is not available on the eZtrend To enter a script for a Pen ensure that Maths Type in the Pen Menu is set to Scripting Example 1 4 flow meters are fed into the recorder to trend totalise and record daily flow The application requires that the user must know and record which flow meter is outputting the highest flow at any particular time This can of course be derived from the four lots of recorded data but not only is this extra analysis later but a real time display is required The application is easily solved by using the Script Function in the recorder represented in pseudo code the script is as follows If input 1 is bigger than all the others then make the global variable 1 equal to channel 1 a
266. heck all scale lines are visible if some scale lines are missing the scales cannot be in line To change the print settings have the graph open select Graph from the drop down menu running along the top of the screen and select Print Preferences Click in any area on the screen and press F1 on the keyboard to display the related help files FIGURE 9 13 PunpHowel Vdve 6 S5c555555 gt e PumpHowel Valve 5 PumpHoiwel Vave 7 oSBessessss PumpHousel Valve 2 PunpHowel Pen 14 8 000 00 ith it ae hid 1 PumpHouse Valve 4 PumpHouset Vave 6 f 0 10 DO Fri Mar 21 1 Defauklimsverth rightshift 103 PunpHousel Oetukurcucth ol ghestit Paimted tton Apr 03 D00 143001 Folder name Recorder Recorder Recorder Start and End time Pens displayed Graph name ID number name tag description and date of graph on graph and area displayed colour of traces 236 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Chapter 10 TrendView Historian Server Client Software Software License Agreement Refer to the Trend View Historian installer for the software license agreement On start up you will be required to agree to the Software License in order to proceed See Software License Agreement on page 237 TrendView Historian Support Information 1 TrendView Historian supports OPC Historical Data Access Specification 1 2 Any interfaces and functionality apart from specification 1 2 which are not supported
267. hen the Create Nominate and Delete Batch View button buttons are disabled However you can view the existing Golden Batches and perform the compare task The options include the following steps 1 Create a Golden Batch Nominate an existing batch as Golden Batch See Nominate as Golden Batch on page 171 Compare with other samples See Compare Batch Data on page 173 View Golden batches See View the Golden Batch List on page 172 Analyze and generate reports See Generate Graphs on page 175 and Generate Report on page 176 2 3 4 5 od Create a Golden Batch A Golden Batch can be created by using any one of the following methods e Creating a new Golden Batch on page 168 Creates a new Golden Batch trace e Nominate as Golden Batch on page 171 Nominates an existing batch as a Golden Batch Creating a new Golden Batch This utility allows you to create a golden pen trace manually The pen trace is saved as a list of segments For each segment a process set Create Golden Batch point and the ramp type can be specified To create a new Golden Batch 1 Import the data from the recorder See Import data from a recorder on page 150 2 In the left pane click Batch The Batch View for Initial Database Selected Database window appears 3 Select a batch from the list and click Create The Create Golden Trace window appears 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Create G
268. highest and lowest values So within the 0 to 150 scale the signal may have only measured between 30 and 60 on the scale Click on the Auto fit resize but ton to toggle the scale Full Pen Scale maiaa CT2 AIR IN DE GF Auto fit Scale a a t teao La ll C e hy z i e e 8 c e ce eeceeceeceeecoe O Lu Oo T N D The scale also has a Scale configuration button click on this and the change pen scale lim its box will appear In this box is displayed e Minimum and Maximum readings so far for this pen e Original span and zero scale limits e Current span and zero scale limits Set the scale limits using the Max Min Original or Current buttons or enter new span and zero scale limits in the boxes provided Click on OK when finished 220 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Arranging Scales Honeywell Scales can be moved manually or by using the Arrange button FIGURE 9 6 Grab in this area of the scale to move its position Resize handle Auto Arrange scales Scale panels can be arranged by placing the cur sor over the left hand side of each scale panel until a hand appears Holding down the left mouse button and drag the scale panel into the desired position then release the mouse button Remember the position of each scale panel determines the position within the graph win dow of its corresponding pen data Scale units will also be displayed where applicable If
269. his pen when it is displayed on a chart The default trace width is 1 with a maximum of 7 e Change Colour Each Pen has a Default Pen Colour but this can be changed if required Select and use the colour palette to set the pen colour 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 77 78 Honeywell Scales tab Individually configure each scale per pen in the scale menu Select a pen from the list of available pens Setup Window General Scales Logging Maths Totals Alarms Rav Scale Type Linear X Units v Add Unit Zero Span o o 350 0 Divisions Divs Select User Defined X Major Divs Minor Divs 50 0 10 0 Numb Format Hardware Notation Normal X Auto Auto After Decimal Scale Type Select this for a list of available scale types Linear or Logarithmic Log Units Scale measurement Units Select this and enter the units Up to 16 characters Zero This is the bottom of the scale Select and enter a Zero value Span This is the highest value of the scale Select and enter the Span value Divs Select Only available with Linear Scale Type Toggle between Auto or User Defined Major Divs Only available when Divs Select is set to User Defined Select and enter the major division position Minor Divs Only available when Divs Select is set to User Defined Select and enter the minor division position Start Decade Only available when the Scale Type is set to Log Select and enter
270. i cations Subnet Mask A single IP network can be divided into many subnets by using some of the MS bits of the host address portion of the IP address as a subnet A mask is simply a screen of numbers that tells you which number to look at underneath Using a mask saves the router having to handle the entire 32 bit address it can simply look at the bits selected by the mask Switching hub actually reads the destination address of each packet and then forwards the packet to the correct port Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP The standard procedure for regulating trans mission on the Internet Trendbus RS485 Custom protocol for connection and interaction or communications between computers and other peripherals providing high levels of functionality and security WAP Wireless Application Protocol Secure specification allows user access to information instantly via hand held devices such as mobile phones with displays for Internet access Windows NT Server Microsoft s premier server operating system ideal for running dedicated servers in small or large networks Win2K3 Windows 7 32 and 64 bit Professional Enterprise and Ultimate Edition Windows 8 32 and 64 bit Professional Enterprise and Ultimate Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2012 A mul tipurpose network operating system for running server applications and building internet capabilities as well as sharing files and printers etc
271. icon from the tool bar down the left side of the main screen This will produce the Recorders pane displaying the recorders that are available Click on the Comms server tab to view a list of the servers The Pens tab will display which pens are available on the recorder e Either select the recorder from the list and drag it across the screen into the blank graph area this will display all the pens on the recorder Or alternatively select the Pens label at the top of the Recorders pane and select individual pens and drag them on to the blank graph area e Maximise the graph EI and use the Arrange button at the bottom of the graph screen to organise the pen traces and scales The graph is split into two areas The area to the right with a blue tint is the realtime graph area The white area between the scale and the realtime graph area is for graphing logged or historical data See Graphing Realtime Data on page 231 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 231 232 Honeywell e lf there is no data being displayed in the realtime graph area check the comms server is active then check the comms server status to see if the recorder is Talking or Wait ing lf there is still no realtime data being graphed check to see if the pause button at the bottom of the realtime graph area has been activated if so click to deactivate e Data will graph across the screen from right to left the furthest point to the right show ing the cur
272. if the chart has been stopped the displayed data will display a gap in data until it is resumed Clear this will clear all the data being displayed Data will not be cleared if the chart has been stopped ee Prefill this will clear the chart and then fill it with the current reading Clear All Messages this will clear all the messages in the message list Delayed Event This will allow one event to trigger one or more other events after a spec ified period of time The time period can be set in seconds from 1 to 3600 1 hour Select Delayed Event and select the event s this will apply to Enter the time delay Script Timerst Script timers provide 20 independent timers to be used as desired previ ously control and access of script timers was limited to maths functions for use in script but this has now been extended allowing the timers to be controlled using the event sys tem allowing them to be stopped started and reset Access to timers via the Maths script ing feature is still available see Figure 13 10 Timers on page 277 Play Sound Sound effects can be used to alert the user that an event effect has occurred Set the Sub Type to Start to reveal two more menu options Sound name and Play Mode The user can pick from a list of 20 different sounds these can be configured to play a single time or repeat continuously Please be aware that continuous mode will repeat continuously until a corresponding stop event
273. ification Ser Monitors system eve Started S Task Scheduler Enables a user to con Started S TCP IP NetBIOS Helper Provides supportfor Started Gh Themes Provides user experie Started TMS Communicatic started Sh User Profile Service This service is respon Started Gh VMware Tools Service Provides supportfor Started Si Windows Audio Manages audiofor Started G Windows Audio Endpoint Bui Manages audio devic Started Sh Windows Event Log This service manages Started S Windows Firewall Windows Firewall hel Started Sh Windows Management Instru Provides a common i Started Sh Workstation Creates and maintain Started S5 Security Center The WSCSVC Windo Started Gh Software Protection Enables the downloa Started Windows Defender Protection against sp Started Started G Windows Search Provides content ind lation For more details refer to Security Configuration Utility on page 36 e Click Next The below Ready to Install the Program Window appears e Click Install The setup starts installing all the prerequisites if they are not installed The Setup Status page appears displaying the installation status After the installa tion is complete the Setup complete page appears Click Finish Issue 29 December 2014 UK 35 Honeywell Security Configuration Utility 36 This utility is available as part of the installation of TendManager Pro and TrendServer
274. ill be present Or in case of 64 bit this will be Pro gram Files x86 TrendManager Suite TMP5DB e After locating them take backup and delete the folders TrendManager Suite TMP and Commsserv from virtual store 2 Please logoff and login into the machine to access TrendManager Suite application g Any user trying to use the TrendManager Suite Application from remote machine should be part of the TMSApplicationAccessGroup on the remote system For ex If TrendServer Pro is running under Domain User1 user on Machine A wants to access communications server of TrendServer Pro running under Domain User2 user on Machine B Then Domain User1 should be part of TMSApplicationAccess Group of Machine B If a local user does not exists on the remote system then a new user with same user name and password can be created on the remote system and be added to the TMSApplicationAccessGroup of the remote system in order to access communica tions server of the remote system 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 43 TV 25 11 GLO Steps to create a new user Honeywell a Please go to Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Computer Management b Select Local Users and Groups c Right click on Users and Select New User Below New User dialog appears File Action View Help e 9 2G oc el EA WE Computer Management Local a Syster Tools D Task Scheduler Event Viewer
275. ill show a legend on pen scale i e Historical Real time Logged data or data from disk will have a completely white scale this is data that has been transferred or imported from a disk or via FTP Logged data scales will show a legend on pen scale i e Historical Ftp Time adjustment pen scales have a grey strip down the left side this is data from pens that have had a time adjustment due to day light saving time Realtime data and Historic data should be transferred via the comms server The historic data is stored in a data base and both sets of data can be displayed at the same time First make sure the comms server is active See Graphing Realtime Data on page 231 Time adjustment pen There may be occasions when it is required to adjust the time on the recorder such as day light saving time When this occurs and there is an overlap of data this is recorded on a duplicate pen scale panel hiding behind the original These can be identified by a grey strip down the left hand side of the scale panel and will show a legend on pen scale i e Time Adjustment see Pen Scales on page 220 This is viewed best in Tile or Strip mode where the Trace is shown continuous The time adjustment pen only shows the data that has overlapped the trace will continue on the original pen 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 217 Honeywell Pre Trigger Data Data imported that includes Pre Trigger pens will be displayed as overlapped
276. ime date Batch Details New Batch graph Events Batch details dis played in the Batch tab hu 03 Mar 2005 06 06 40 Thu 03 Mar 2005 06 23 48 Wed 02 Mar 2005 23 48 20 Thu 03 Mar 2005 00 00 44 Wed 02 Mar 2005 09 99 47 Wed 02 Mar 2005 23 43 20 Wed 02 Mar 2005 09 04 54 Wed 02 Mar 2005 09 06 35 Wed 02 Mar 2005 09 02 49 Wed 02 Mar 2005 09 04 54 Wed 02 Mar 2005 09 02 06 Wed 02 Mar 2005 09 02 31 Wed 02 Mar 2005 09 01 06 Wed 02 Mar 2005 09 02 06 Wed 02 Mar 2005 08 59 06 Wed 02 Mar 2005 09 01 06 Wed 02 Mar 2005 98 52 28 Wed 02 Mar 2005 08 59 06 Wed 02 Mar 2005 08 35 48 Wed 02 Mar 2005 08 49 17 Wed 02 Mar 2009 08 19 08 Wed 02 Mar 2005 08 32 37 Wed 02 Mar 200 08 02 28 Wed 02 Mar 2005 08 15 57 Added Tue Mat 08 2005 15 04 50 Start Old Data New Batch Added Tue MF 08 2005 15 05 37 User ID Add User ID June Added Tue Mar 08 2005 15 05 56 Comment Add a Comment Added Tue Mar 08 2005 15 06 49 Pause add in other Events Added Wed Mar 09 2005 14 53 18 Resume resume 229 Honeywell Realtime Graphing 230 Default GRAPHOO3 H raph Window Help Realtime Graphing To graph real time data on TrendServer Pro press the Real time button located on the left hand side This will list all the recorders currently connected The recorder set up on Mod bus will be in the list The recorder will be in the list under the name that you gave it when entering the device details Either click and drag th
277. ime for both Synchronous and Asynchronous interfaces for retrieving data at a particular timestamp 8 Quality in the case of synchronous and Asynchronous call will be set to Good i e OPC_QUALITY_GOOD by Default 9 The Maximum returned values in Asynchronous and Synchronous call will be 20000 This means that OPC HDA client will get a maximum of 20000 pen values in one call at a time 10 Clarification on most used methods and their usage 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 237 238 Honeywell AdviseRaw in Asynchronous will get all the historical data as well as updated from last updated interval till the current time It means if the client has set interval of 10 seconds then AdviseRaw will be called every 10 seconds to get the data from the HDA server ReadRaw in Asynchronous and will give data to the client in chunks maximum limit of items at a time until there is no data in HDA server e g If there are 1000 values in the Trend View Historian and if the setting is configured to get the maximum up to 100 values in one read operation then it will retrieve the first 100 values to client and will continue to get next 100 values untill it reaches 1000 at which time it will stop OPC client will be responsive to user actions while performing this operation and getting data from the server meaning that user can perform any action on the client even if client is busy getting data from the server In the case of Synchronou
278. in Scripts This is an example of how commenting can be used in scripts you can use the standard C commenting inline comments use for example if A1 gt 10 return 9 f A1 greater then 10 return 9 or for block single or multiline commenting the to open and to close these are C style comments and work as follows if A1 gt 10 return 9 If A1 greater then 10 return 9 for single line or if A1 gt 10 if A1 is greater then 10 then return 9 return 9 these are also useful for commenting out code to try different things for example if A1 gt 10 return 9 JE else return 20 Wi return A1 Here the else statement is commented out so it won t be included but can easily be re intro duced if required Maths Error Messages When the Maths functionality is processing through the scrips you have written it will carry out Syntax and other checks When it comes across operations functions brackets etc not expected or permitted it will report an error However the fault being reported may be on a previous line caused by the missing or incorrect function Refer to Application Note 43 TV 07 32 on your CD or web site for a list of scripting error messages 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 285 286 Honeywell 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Appendix C Fuzzy Logging What is Fuzzy Logging What s it for Fuzzy Logging is a
279. in the left window or a device in the top window displaying the device for that port Connect to a new Database Server Use this icon button to connect to a database server either a Local or Remote Server that has been added to the database servers list Connection can be made by selecting Database Servers in the left window and then right clicking in a clear space in the top window displaying the database servers list 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 197 198 Honeywell Communication Ports The Communication Ports is a list of ports available COM1 to COM8 and Ethernet As de vices are added they are displayed under the port name Click on Communication Ports to display a list of all the ports in the main window tick the required port to enable Click on a port and the main window splits into two windows top and bottom The top window displays details of the devices using that port including device ID No de vice Name Mode and Status show if the device is connected how many Channels the de vice has enabled an Active button to activate the device and the device s IP Address As devices get added to each port they will display in the list for that particular port The default is N 8 1 which means no parity 8 data bits and 1 stop bit This is currently the only byte op tion supported by Comms Server Database Servers The Database Server will list databases and display the devices within each database as the
280. ing button In applications where the measured process is new or the ideal scan rate is unknown Fuzzy Logging is ideal as it adapts the log rate to the input signal and can therefore find the opti mum logging rate for you Tolerance band widths Tolerance band width can be set as a percentage of the scale range allowed above and below the input signal A second band width can be set this is where a tighter tolerance can be specified which must be set within the limits of Band 1 Specify as a percentage of the scale range the tolerance band allowed above and below the input signal Figure 14 1 Fuzzy logging tolerance settings Band 1 A Band 2 T race lt q Band 2 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Appendix D Events Cause and Effect The following is a list of all conditions and operations that are logged as Events It provides a description of the Event followed by a description of the Cause and the Effect tables For X Series and GR recorders Table 16 on page 293 and Table 17 on page 293 Not available on the eZtrend V5 Table 14 Cause Honeywell V5recorders only Method Description Into Alarm When alarm state is entered Out Alarm When alarm state is exited Counter When a counter reaches a specified value Logging When logging starts stops Change Set up When a set up is changed Disk Card Full When
281. ing time e Rate Units Set the Units for the logging rate to be displayed Select and choose the log ging rate units from the drop down menu e Rate This is the speed at which data is required to be logged If the Millisecond option is selected as the Rate Units for the logging then a drop down menu of options will appear When all other Rate Units are selected a keypad will appear for user entry Fast est rate is 20mS and slowest is 60 hours Alarm Rate Units Set the Units for the Alarm Rate Logging to be displayed Select and choose the alarm logging rate units from the drop down menu e Alarm Rate This is the new logging rate used when this pen goes into an active alarm state To enable this feature to change the logging rate in an alarm state see Change Log in the Alarms menu Change Log must be active in the Alarms tab If the Millisecond option is selected as the Alarm Rate Units for the logging then a drop down menu of options will appear When all other Alarm Rate Units are selected a keypad will appear for user entry Method Only available if the logging Type is set to Continuous Select from a list of Methods e Sample logs the last sampled reading Average logs the average of all the samples taken since the last log e Max Min logs the highest and the lowest of the sampled readings since the last log 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 79 Honeywell Align Only available if the l
282. input Scale Mapping Diagram displays graphical examples of the Input scale the Engineering scale and the Pen scale The first is the Input Scale for Current mA Voltage inputs V amp mV Select the input range and enter the top and bottom values of that input range Figure 6 17 shows a Voltage range of 10V but this scale has been manual changed to 0 to 10V The full scale still shows the 10 to 10 range with zero in the middle The Eng Scale becomes active when the Tie To option has not been selected Enter the top and bottom limits of the Eng scale to the part of the Input you want to display Engineering scale label enter text here for the engineering label Engineering span this is the highest value of the engineering range and corresponds to the top of the input range Engineering zero this is the bottom of the engineering scale and represents the bottom of the input scale In Figure 6 12 the Pen scale is displaying only the part of the input range as specified by the values entered in the Eng scale 134 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Setup Window al Analogue General Analogue Scales A input type FIGURE 6 11 ess Shows P1 is selected F m To al and the Eng scale is Pim locked to the pen SE the engineering to the pen scale Pens using this input scale r Scale Mapping Diagram Input Scale Eng Scale Pen Scale Log 107 IO o Pi 1 x woal 3 1 09 Digitals Events
283. instructions Go to My Computer gt DVD ROM drive e Right Click setup exe For Windows 7 Windows 8 Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2012 a Click on Open if you are logged on with Administrative privileges b Or click on Run as Administrator N Which user account do you want to use to run this program Current user RECORDER Ope c Protect my computer and data from unauthorized program activity This option can prevent computer viruses from harming your computer or personal data but selecting it might cause the program to Function improperly The Following user Or provide the Administrative privileges for the The following user option The TrendManager Suite InstallShield Wizard appears e Click Next and accept the terms of License Agreement of Trend Manager Suite to proceed further e Click Next The Choose Destination Location window appears displaying informa tion about the default destination folder If you want to change the default destination folder click on Browse to specify a different destination folder e Click Next The Language window appears displaying default English language Other languages supported are German and French Choose the appropriate lan guage pack 20 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell e Click Next The Package Selection window appears TrendManager Suite 100 1 0 Setup Package Selection Select TrendManager Suite
284. ion 1024x768 minimum requirement high colour ee Windows 8 32 bit Enterprise Professional and Ultimate Edition 64 bit Windows server 2008 and Windows Server 2012 Window 7 32 and 64 bit Pro fessional Enterprise and Ultimate Edition Windows Server 2008 ee 4GB or more of SRAM min 4GB recommended for generating QOQ reports e 2 Gbyte hard drive free disk space TCP IP installed e Flash card reader or USB port for X Series recorders e 3 5 floppy disk drive or PCMCIA for V5 recorders Note For TrendServer only 1 Secure Communications Interface is supported by Windows 7 and higher This Secure Communica tion Interface only work with GR Series recorders with SecureWSD credit option enable 2 For Windows 7 We need Win 7 SP1 32 bit Enterprise Ultimate Professional 64bit as a prereq uisite for Secure Communications Interface 3 To use Secure Communications Interface we need to download the required OS 32 or 64 bit patch as per your machine OS from the link http support microsoft com kb 2860842 and install it Below are two links to Microsoft Patch s for Secure Communication between recorders and TrendManager Suite These need to be installed on Win 7 SP1 Once the installation is completed on Win 7 PC this patch needs to be installed 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 45 46 Honeywell Microsoft Link to download the patch http support microsoft com kb 2860842 After downloa
285. ion allows the user to browse a recorder on the web provided the recorder has been saved to a database with a configured IP Address The recorder 3 will have had an Ethernet card fitted to configure the IP Address To browse multi ple recorders IE8 or higher version is required Browse Open the recorder by double or right clicking to reveal the browse button Activate this button to generate a web browser window The recorder will automatically be dialled up for viewing on a web page See Web Browser on page 191 Upload button Available on TrendServer only and if Ethernet is set up in the Hardware Wizard see Edit a recorder on page 150 Setups can be loaded from a PC to a recorder via Ethernet An Ethernet card must be fitted as an option to the recorder The recorder must be saved to a database with a configured IP Address In the recorder slide out pane double left click or right click on a recorder to open it The Upload button will appear if a recorder has been saved to a data base and has an IP Address This button will upload a setup from the PC to a recorder Activate this button to produce the select setup box the set up will now proceed via Ethernet connection NOTE The above features are not available for the recorders which are part of Archived Data base Recorder clash list A dialog box is produced on import only if multiple devices already exist with matching device ID num ber or serial numbers
286. ion checks for using Trend Server Pro 1 Ensure that Communications Service has started 2 Launch the TrendServer Pro and check for configured database servers and realtime comms servers And also check for the configured FTP schedulers If you are not able to see the above configuration then follow the below steps e Shut down Communications Service please refer Shutdown Server for more details e To restore the backedup files by following the below steps e Start the Communications Service by opening Comms UI 3 Check for Archive Database Server feature in database server list Steps to check for Archive Database Server feature a Launch Trend Server Pro UI b Click on Servers button c We will see Archive Database Server along with Local Server See the image below Databases i gt Add New Database There are no databases to show in this wew If Archive Database Server is not shown please do the below steps 1 Shut down Communications Service please refer Shutdown Server for more details 2 Start the Communications Service by opening Comms UI 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 27 28 Honeywell TrendManager Suite User Groups after Migration During TrendManager Suite installation it creates one common group for all the variants i e TMSApplicationAccessGroup and for TrendServer Pro it creates another group called TMSServiceAccessGroup NOTE For TrendServe
287. irement when starting a new batch The Description display name can be renamed and a list of additional names can be setup to appear as a pick list during the Batch Control setup The addition list names will not appear in a drop down list in the Batch Control screen unless you enable Show n List in the group properties menu e Field 3 Defaults to Comment Enable this to make this a requirement when starting a new batch The Comment display name can be renamed and a list of additional names can be setup to appear as a pick list during the Batch Control setup The addition list names will not appear in a drop down list in the Batch Control screen unless you enable Show n List in the group properties menu Peerservices Batch Settings Group name Group Name Reset to default Batch name Batch Name Reset to default User ID User ID Reset to default Field 1 Lot Number Reset to default Field 2 Description Reset to default Field 3 Comment Reset to default NOTICE List driven data fields The next 5 fields are available for data entry associated with a batch The names can be overridden to suite the end user application all fields are now 69 character long with the exception of the User ID which is 32 A pre defined list of up to 30 items can be configured to allow users to select input for these fields from a list rather than type them in every time E g a user might have 8 different products running though the sa
288. is 15 02 40 0000 min reading can all be viewed by the Data Viewer using 1 15 03 19 9999 max reading Actual logged Data Mode The Overview mode gives a minimum and maximum read Pixel 2 width ing per pixel effectively compressing all the 2 15 03 20 0000 min reading data points in the pixel On the Overview 15 03 99 9999 max reading mode the time between each reading is Pixel 3 width divided up evenly from the width of the graph 3 15 04 00 0000 min reading Each of the other columns represents an indi 15 04 39 9999 max reading vidual pen trace on the graph If there is no data available a dash will appear Single data values will be present in the column unless the pen trace is only logging Min Max data values in which case there will be two values in the column separated by a comma Even if the data has not been set up to log min max readings the data viewer will do this in the Overview Mode If an asterisk is displayed after the value in overview mode this indicates that the data values have changed from the previous line If an asterisk is displayed in actual data mode the value was sampled at the time specified on that line 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 233 234 Data Viewer in Overview mode Remove recorder name from columns Actual logged data Select all Copy selected data to the clipboard Print the selected data FIGURE 9 11 Data Viewer in Actual Logged Data mode Displaying data fr
289. is is not supported by Modbus messaging which means that realtime communications with Modbus will not happen out of the box This is where the concept of a Modbus device profile comes in which is aimed at making the setup of realtime communications with Modbus devices in TrendManager Software Suite as straight forward as possible A Modbus device profile or Modbus profile for short encapsulates the key information that TrendManager Software Suite needs in order to obtain data from a Modbus enabled device TrendManager Software Suite will generate a Modbus profile automatically whenever data or a setup is imported into a database in TrendServer from an X Series and GRre corder or a Honeywell V5 recorder although it will not do so when pen data is imported via FTP If a more recent setup is imported into a database either imported directly as a setup or imported as a part of logged data then the Modbus profile for the associated device is automatically updated without any user intervention required When Comms Server is first started up and if no data or setups have been imported into a database in TrendServer then no Modbus profiles will be available for selection when adding a device The only exception to this is if some standard Modbus profiles for Honeywell devices have been imported into the system 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 301 Honeywell Once data has been imported into TrendManager Software Suite Modbus p
290. isplayed It is also possible to view the most recent data using the Go to Last drop down box Select any option from Go To Last drop down box and click ok it will show the below mes sage TrendServer Pro The set time span is outside the Graph plot data Hence Time span has he been auto adjusted Do you want to continue Press Yes to keep the auto adjustment Press No to Modify the time span manually 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Graphing Events To display Events on a graph activate the Events button below the win dow displaying the graphed scales This will enable a blue events bar at the top of the graph area The events bar displays single icons represent ing one type of event or a grey numbered tile which indicates multiple events have occurred A green numbered tile also indicates multiple events but one or more of the events is the start of a batch If gt 100 is displayed in a number tile this means 100 or more events have occurred during its span These can only be viewed when the box reads lt 100 This is done by zooming in on the graph using the eyeglass cursor that appears in the Time Date bar and clicking the left mouse button or by using the Event filter Click on an icon in the Events bar to display details of that particular event Click on the grey numbered tile to produce the Select Events box This displays all the events within that tile span Select an event from the li
291. it already knows the previous logged readings it can calculate where the next point should be assuming it s on a straight line if the measured value does not equal the predicted value the point is logged as it no longer forms part of the straight line Fuzzy Logging looks for straight lines at any angle Not just on the horizontal I m convinced Do you have any examples Example 1 Flow amp Pressure Measurement of Mains Water Pressure A recorder was installed to monitor the flow of a mains water supply At peak demand the mains pressure had been subject to sharp drops in pressure and flow rate and it was nec essary to find the cause of the problem The recorder had to have a fast scan rate in order to capture the glitches e The recording period would be over many days if not weeks so storage capacity was at a premium A fast scan rate using the standard sampling method would result in a disk life of about a day which was not acceptable As this application consists of long periods of little activity relatively constant flow rate and short periods of high activity rapidly changing flow rate it is an ideally suited to Fuzzy Logging During the hours of stable flow where the flow rate remained more or less constant the Fuzzy Logging technique would give compression ratios up to 100 times However as soon as a glitch appeared the fast sampling rate was able to capture and store all the points Exa
292. items are displayed To close the list click on the sign Comms Server Administration and Toolbar Database Servers Communications Ports Figure 8 11 Comms Server Overview 196 a Communications Server ga ap ji Database Servers IP Address Description Connection Status Communication Ports oe COM1 x com2 x COM3 oe com4 x COMS x come x COM7 x coms 47 Ethernet Database Servers 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Administration The Administration button appears in the top left of the comms server it contains e Preferences The General Settings tab has an option to minimise the Server when it is opened The Diagnostics option that will produce an additional tab to the bottom window this will display properties and values of a selected device Send Recorder Events is an option that needs to be enabled to allow event data to be exported when the export data func tion is performed and this will also allow event chart controls to be enabled The Clear Setup Cache button will remove all setup files Network Settings is for PC s with more than one network card fitted to access devices on other networks The network cards are displayed here for selection If the Use NIC Default IP Address Selection is ticked then the first network card that was added to the list will always be selected Timing Setups tab displays the cur rent timings for the current co
293. its you measure in to the units you want to totalise in Use the Totalise Helper to assist in setting up these measurements and working out the totalising factor NOTE Totalisers do not work on a logarithmic scale a warning message will be activated to notify the user Additional Controls Ignore back flow When enabled any negative values are ignored and the total value will be held and never decrease Restrict range Activates min max ranges Standard form Displays totalised values in standard form e g 2 76823e 09 regardless of length of the number Carry on rollover Only active when the Restrict Range option is ticked and min max ranges are set This function allows any amount that goes over the maximum scale range Max to be added to the minimum scale range set Start When this is not active the reading will return to the minimum scale range set Alarms The unit must have an alarm card or a digital Input Output card fitted The Pen Alarms Setup window is where the alarm levels for each pen are configured Alarms can be set to trigger events such as log events set relays change log rate or flush data etc See Setting up Events on page 137 Alarm Controls The first box marked Alarm has a drop down box containing currently available alarms for that pen If no alarms have been configured the box will show None To add an alarm select New this will automati cally be assigned a name The Delete alarm butt
294. ks another one and so on until the correct IP address is returned E mail Correspondence or data transmitted over computer telephone lines to a recipient via network lines or a service provider Ethernet The worlds most popular network standard A local area networking protocol for connection and interaction or communication between computers Trendbus is transmitted over an Ethernet connection Ethertalk What you call Ethernet when you use it on a Macintosh Fast Ethernet An Ethernet standard which operates at 100Mbps rather than 10Mbps File server A network computer containing disk drives that are available to network users A computer library that stores a library of program and data files for a number of network users File Transfer Protocol FTP A method of retrieving information from the internet FTP are the rules that govern the transfer of data files within a computer or between computers FIXED Fixed IP Resolution specified by user Enter known IP address and Subnet Mask FPLB Floating Point Little Endian Byte Swapped Format FP B Floating Point Big Endian Format Golden Batch Defines a standard Golden Batch by creating a pen trace golden pen trace or identify from an existing list of samples Handshaking The protocol for identification and communication between two pieces of equipment Host The home or controlling computer in a network of computers or printers Hub A common connection point for
295. ks called packets or frames The size and makeup of a packet is determined by the protocol used Parity This ensures data is transmitted accurately and transfers correctly The parity bit is added to every data unit typically 7 or 8 bits that are transmitted The parity is set to either odd or even Both the transmitting and receiving device must be set up the same Passive hub A passive hub serves simply as a conduit for the data enabling it to go from one device or segment to another Peer to peer network A network in which any computer can be a server A scheme in which networks computers share resources each work station may either be client or server See also Dedicated network PPP Point to Point Protocol This is an Internet protocol IP which packages the computers TCP IP pack ets and forwards them to the Server From the Server they can actually be put on the Internet PPP has error detection and is preferred over SLIP Protocol The rules of the network game governing the transfer of data between a computer and peripher als Protocols define standardisation formats for data packets techniques for detecting and correcting errors Realtime data Logging or graphing realtime data means that the software and the recorder have been syn chronised in time to communicate the transfer of actual current happening now data Remote Database Server Referred to in this manual as a database or server that is not directly
296. l 35 0 Tag P1iAlm 1 Allow Change B Relays Out None Latched Change Log Mark Chart Email Alarm Iv Set View Recipients Hysteresis IV Hyst Level Damping J Damping Time Reflash MV Reflash Time Secs 60 e Enabled Select Enable to see a list of ways to enable or disable the alarm Disable Ena bled Always or Dig Enabled e Enabled by Digital Only available when Enabled is set to Dig Enabled Select and choose which digital signal s will enable this alarm on this pen only e Type Select this to display a list of different types of Alarms High Low Deviation Rate Up or Rate Down Set a High alarm to activate when the signal goes above the Alarm Level or set a Low alarm to activate when the signal goes below the Alarm Level Devia 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell tion is the how far this pen can deviate from the Ref Pen before triggering an alarm See Deviation Level and Ref Pen Rate Up and Rate Down Alarms are used to trigger an alarm when the signal changes a defined amount over a specified time See Deviation Level and Time Period e Level Select and enter a figure at which the alarm is to be triggered e Deviation Level Only available when Alarm Type is set to Deviation Rate Up or Rate Down Select and use the numeric keypad to enter the amount of deviation in engineering units For Deviation enter the amount of deviation allowed on a designated pen Ref Pen before an
297. l Server pen 1 New pen 2 Database1 pen 3 pen 4 pen 6 rec 3 pen 7 New re i pen 1 Database 2 2 TrendServer pen pen 1 rec 1 pen 2 Initial pen 3 Remote Database pen 4 Server 1 1 rec 2 Pen pen 2 New reci pen 5 Archive Database 1 pen 6 Database 1 Server pen rec 1 Coe Initial pen 3 Remote Database pen 4 Server 2 rec 2 pen pen 2 New eci pen 5 Database 1 pen 6 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 153 Honeywell Folders Graph Folders This is a list of folders in which the user can organise graphs FIGURE 7 3 Graphs and Folders Gane Folders Graphs Add New Folder W A lt j Folder Graphs AAEM uo A Add New Graph a GRAFH Retro grap Recorder Realtime Add a folder Go to the Folders list under the Graphs slide out pane e Click Add new folder enter a name and click OK Move a graph between folders e Go to the Folders list in the Graphs slide out pane e Select a graph and drag it into the destination folder Delete a folder e Go to the Folders list under the Graphs slide out pane Drag and drop over a trash can to delete Copy a folder Go to the Folders list under the Graphs slide out pane e Drag the folder onto a blank area of the folders pane or double click and select copy Rename a folder e Go to the Folders list in the Graphs slide out pane e Double click on the folder to bring up the control panel and click on the rename button All the areas liste
298. l be displayed in a setup window Press OK and this recorder setup will be added to the recorder list Note The recorder will be added to the list under the Recorder Name as set in the recorder itself This is the name that appears in the top right corner of the recorder screen when in normal logging mode NOT the name you gave the recorder when setting up the FTP 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 159 160 Honeywell Batch set up Use the Batch button to select a number of recorders required for importing via Network All available recorders are displayed in the Batch Setup page click on the Available Recorders in the window on the left use the Add button to transfer that recorder to the Recorders in Batch window Select OK when your selection for the batch list is complete To start download return to the External Import box select from the drop down list and click on Yes Schedule Setup Use the Schedule button to produce the Schedule Setup box Use this to manage and download a list of selected recorders at specific times This box will be empty on first use click on Add for a new entry This will generate the Schedule settings box used for adding and editing schedules Existing sched ules cannot be edited whist the schedule is active FIGURE 7 6 Schedule Settings Schedule settings Description Destination database Select the recorders you wish to add to the download from the left list and add them to the right
299. l configured as an output is set to 0 EC1 to EC 20 EC1 Event Counters 1 to 20 File Transfer Protocol FTPHRS Returns the number of hours of safe record recording hours left ing time available Glbv GLBVx Get the global variable x This is a global varia ble accessible to all scripts There is a maxi mum of 200 global variables 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Table 13 7 Maths Variable Table Maths Variables Syntax Description HPC1 to HPC48 HPC1 High Pulse count using Pulse cards Internal memory hours left INTHRS Returns the amount of hours left until the inter nal memory starts to recycle over write IOC1 to 1OC48 IOC1 Digital Input Output counters for Digital in and relay out LPC1 to LPC48 LPC1 Low Pulse count using Digital IO cards in pulse count mode Pen Pn Get the value of Pen n 1 to 96 Pen Minimum Value PnMINU Gets the Pen Minimum value n 1 to 96 Pen Maximum Value PnMAXU Gets the Pen Maximum value n 1 to 96 Pen report Maximum Value prmax x y z Gets the Pen Maximum value for a report x pen number 1 to 96 y period 1 hour 2 day 3 week 4 month z report set 1 current 2 previous completed Pen report Minimum Value prmin x y z Gets the Pen Minimum value for a report x pen number 1 to 96 y period 1 hour 2 day 3 week 4 month z report set 1 current 2 previous completed
300. l in that group can be set up The name graphing span unit of measure ment and colour of each channel can be configured separately When values are not specified for the channel default attributes will be used if not by the Modbus Profile Tool then by TrendServer Pro software when the Comms Server reads the Modbus profile 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Channel number Channel 1 of 16 in Group 1 Channel s register address Channel name Pen 1 Temp 0 000000 O 90 000000 degC a Choose Color Linear Logarithmic Channel s register number This is the register address number allocated to this chan nel Channel name This displays the channel information made up from the register type group number and the channel number within the group This can be changed as required Zero Enter the zero or bottom limit of the pen channel scale Span Enter the Span or top limit of the pen channel scale Unit Select the units of measure to be used for the scale Colour This will always display the channel colour as red for new profiles If an existing profile is used then the colours from the recorder s setup will display Scale type Select a Linear or Logarithmic scale The profile can be saved and will be automatically be available to use with devices in Comms Server Comms Server has a Test Dialog when setting up devices that commu nicate over Modbus that c
301. l influences The Threshold level or depth of the pulse is entered as a percentage of the span The span is defined by the Engineering span e g Eng Zero 10 Eng Span 10 Enter pulse depth as a percent age of span 20 If the signal is within 20 of span the point will be logged if the signal is outside the 20 of span the signal will be logged as the previous point Square Root Extraction tick this box if you require a non linear signal to be converted into a linear scale Analogue Scales tab Use this section to enter set up information for the Analogue scales Select the Analogue Input Type of signal coming into this port Current Volts or Thermocouple Resistance Thermometer if fitted Current and Voltage inputs are linked to the first scale in the Scale Mapping Diagram When the Tie To is set to a Pen eg P1 from the drop down list then the Eng scale is tied to P1 pen scale This is to force the engineering scale to be linked to and be the same as the pen scale This means the engineering scale is not changeable because it is locked to the pen scale Set this option to None and the Eng scale is no longer tied to the pen scale If there are no pens available that means that no pens are associated to that particular Analogue Input Go to the Pens tabs and select Maths eg against P1 enter A1 Now when you go return to this tab Pen 1 will appear in the Tie To drop down list Dependencies lists all pens which refer to this
302. l the Historical data in the time span will be returned To view the maximum number Historical data that can be returned by the server see Get Server Status on page 257 Note The server returns the data with a timestamp of the recorder i e local timestamp Some OPC HDA client considers timestamp as GMT converted into local timestamp which may cause it to return invalid historical data It is suggested that you should add or subtract the time difference to the start time and end time timestamp while viewing historical data 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 249 Honeywell 14 Clicking Read Raw will close the Read Raw Dialog All the values will show in the right hand side list box The number of Historical data values returned is shown above the list box You can view the associated historical data with another pen by selecting the tab associated to it FIGURE 10 15 Showing Historical Data Associated with Pen M MatrikonOPC HDA Explorer lol xi Eie Server Function View He HeiTrendViewHistoen MSS ol SETS all ttlnitiel Datebase FPC GY TS 150T_P FTP mported Datat360 tflnitic 4 gt 250 Initial Database FPC GY TS 150T_P FTP Imported Da Initial Database FPC GY TS 150T_P FTP Imported Da 2010 09 15 16 00 31 5 2010 09 15 16 43 01 5 2010 09 15 17 25 31 5 2010 09 15 17 53 51 5 2010 09 15 17 54 01 5 2010 09 15 18 29 31 5 2010 09 15 18 30 38 5 2010 09 15 19 10 48 5 2010 09 15 19 10 58 5
303. le The key information required in order to setup a new Modbus profile is the Modbus memory map of the target device specifically the floating point input registers that it supports An example of an existing profile is shown in Figure 18 1 Existing Profile on page 307 Modbus Profile Editor window Enter profile details Profile Details Profile name Profile description Device XM Register type Input Registers Profile Details e Profile name This field will be populated when the profile is saved and the profile is named e Profile description Enter the description of your device e Register type Input registers 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 303 304 Honeywell Input Registers In the Profiler references to channels refers to input registers e Number of channel groups Enter the number of groups determined by the division of your input registers Groups are required for each register or sets of registers that do not occur contiguously in the memory map For example Group 1 may consist of Channels 1 to 16 using pens 1 to 16 if there is a gap between the pen numbers a second group is required for channels 1 to 4 using pens 49 to 52 Be aware that the more groups in the Modbus profile the less efficient communication will be when connecting to a device This is because each Modbus profile group requires a separate Modbus message to be made When the number of groups has been set the gro
304. le Message Transfer Protocol to send the message to the e mail server SMTP allows the recorder to send messages to an e mail server without having its own e mail address because of this the e mail server will not be able to send any reply back to the recorder When setting up the e mail address list it is important to include the e mail administrator address The Administrator e mail address is the e mail address to where the e mail server will respond in the event of any problems with the delivery of e mail messages The Administrator will also appear to be the source of any e mail messages sent by the recorder Most e mail systems require a Reply To address as part of an e mail mes sage since the recorder does not have its own e mail address it uses the e mail admin istrator as the Reply To address Any e mail message will consist of a delivery list recipients a subject and an optional message body The message body may be omitted for very short messages or where the message is to be sent to a paging system The e mail subject may be either one of the existing event markers or one of the two e mail subjects The e mail message body may be either one of the existing event mark ers or one of the two e mail message blocks Event markers are restricted to 80 charac ters each The two e mail message blocks are restricted to just over 1000 characters each Both the message subject and body may contain embedded marker tags as u
305. le a File and Printer Sharing LLMNR UDP In Filea File and Printer Sharing LLMNR UDP In Filea File and Printer Sharing LLMNR UDP In File a Machine Name The Machine name Computer name can be found by going to the computer properties On your PC go to Start gt Control Panel gt System This will produce the Computer proper ties screen On this screen you will see the Computer name Machine name Eg IE1FLT4XDW9R1 Documentation A full set of manuals for the software and the recorders including some language versions are available on the DVD provided and from our website www honeywellprocess com Also Application Notes and Installation Instructions first time password setup and database tool information Batch Mode The Batch Mode functionality will automatically install as a part of TrendManager Pro and TrendServer Pro Batch is a firmware option that can be activated using the credit system in the X Series and GR Series recorders The Batch function allows the user to segment portions of data for further analysis Setting up a batch requires information to identify and control batches of data Batch data can also be paused for viewing and resumed Batch mode allows concurrent batches where each batch is associated with a group so all pens within Group 1 will belong to the batch that is controlled by Group 1 Concurrent batch is not available on V5 recorders Database Management Tool The Database Man
306. lectrical values Batch Mode BATMD Returns 1 batch running 2 batch stopped or 3 batch paused Batch comment list blcomm x Get index of Batch comment list entered on batch start where X is the group number 1 6 Batch description list bldesc x Get index of Batch description list entered on batch start where X is the group number 1 6 Batch lot number list bllot x Get index of Batch lot No list entered on batch start where X is the group number 1 6 Batch name list Biname x Get the index of Batch name list entered at batch start Where x is the group 1 6 Batch user list Bluser x Get the index of Batch user list entered at batch start Where x is the group 1 6 Blkv BLKVx Get the local variable x This variable is local to this script There is a maximum of 20 local var iables per script Compact Flash or SD card CFFREE Returns the percentage of free storage space free storage space available on the Compact Flash or SD card CJC CJCn Get the Board CJC value N 1 to 6 Returns value in Degrees F C or K depending on the localisation setting CJC in Degrees C CJCnC Get the Board CJC value N 1 to 6 Always returns value in degrees C Comms Variables CVn Get the Comms variable n 1 to 96 Digitals Dn Get the value of Digital Input n 1 to 48 Digital Input bit pattern DIOn Get the 16 bit pattern from the DIO slots where n 1 2 or 3 Slot G H amp respectively Returned as a 16 bit word 0 to 65535 A channe
307. lems with the delivery of E mail messages The Administrator will also appear to be the source of any E mail messages sent by the recorder Most E mail systems require a Reply To address as part of an E mail message since the recorder does not have its own E mail address it uses the E mail administrator as the Reply To address Any E mail message will consist of a delivery list recipients a subject and an optional message body The message body may be omitted for very short messages or where the message is to be sent to a paging system 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 145 Honeywell Setup Auto E mailing The E mail Subject may be either one of the existing Event Markers or one of the two E mail subjects E mail subjects can be preset into the E mail system e g a Report required to log the same information as a regular event E mails can be made up from 1 One of the two standard messages preset into the E mail system 2 Markers preset up in the Marker set up system 3 Text Or combinations of 1 2 and 3 The E mail message body may be either one of the existing event markers or one of the two E mail message blocks Event Markers are restricted to 80 characters each The two E mail message blocks are restricted to just over 1000 characters each Both the message subject and body may contain embedded marker tags as used in the event markers When the recorder sends an E mail message that includes a messag
308. llover at Example Figure 6 18 ft f0000 C Done FIGURE6 18 Configure Pen 2 to have a high alarm at 95 set up Event 1 with a Counter as the cause The counter value is set to 5 so when Pen 5 goes into alarm for the fifth time an Effect is triggered A tag can be added to appear on the recorder screen when the counter has reached its value and the event has been triggered Counter as an Effect Resets or increments User Alarm Digital or Event Counters Select the type of Counter effect User Alarm Digital or Event Select a counter from the drop down menu Only the User counter will enable the option to Reset to or Increment By and a value to be entered 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Using Viewing Counter Values The value of a Count can be used in Maths Markers or E mail messages Display or log through the maths expression For details on using counters as part of a Maths expression see See Appendix A Maths Expressions for Honeywell V5 recorders on page 263 e CUn Counter User where n is the User counter number e CAn Counter Alarms where n is the Alarm number e CEn Counter Events where n is the Event number e CDn Counter Digitals where n is the Digital input number Click in any area on the screen and press F1 on the keyboard to display the related help files Event Email setup The E mail Event is an effect triggered when a particular cause is executed Setu
309. lso you can con nect from the menu Server gt Connect The Hci Trend View Historian Server will get added under LocalHost Now Move to step 7 FIGURE 10 4 Hci TrendView Historian gets added under LocalHost M Matrikon0PC HDA Explorer File Server Function view Help Hei TrendView Historian JOs slax olmi A Ta 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 241 Honeywell 4 For connecting a remote Trend View Historian Server Go to Server menu gt Connect Remote or click lal Connect Remote button on screen It will open Add Remote Server Dialog FIGURE 10 5 Connect Remote to connecting remote Server Z MatrikonOPC HDA Explorer 5 x File Server Function View Help r aml halal else so es Server Status 5 In Add Remote Server Dialog Select Manual radio control for the HDA Server and enter Hci Trend View Historian Select UNC Name in Remote Computer and select the remote sys tem name where OPC TrendView is installed Click Connect to connect with Remote OPC TrendView Historian Server FIGURE 10 6 Add Remote Server Dialog V MatrikonOPC HDA Explorer ms O x File Server Function View Help AdvosolHDA SampleFW2 Jeca wll Bale RAT Bie Be Bhs OEL 6 e Add Remote Server l x HDA Server ExistngID Advosol HDA SampleF W2 242 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell 6 After clicking the Connec
310. mation using the same degree of care which Licensee uses with respect to its own proprietary information but in no event with safeguards less than a reasonably prudent business would exercise under similar circumstances Licensee shall take prompt and appro priate action to prevent unauthorized use or disclosure of the Confidential Information 6 TERM AND TERMINATION This Agreement shall continue for so long as Licensee uses the Licensed Software provided that this Agreement will immediately terminate upon Licensee s entry into bankruptcy receivership insolvency or dissolution proceedings or upon Licensee s breach of this Agreement unless Licensee cures such breach within ten 10 days after Hon eywell provides written notice of such breach Upon termination Licensee agrees i not to use the Licensed Software for any purpose whatsoever ii to return or destroy the Licensed Software and any copy then in Licensee s possession at the direction of Honeywell and iii to certify to Honeywell that such destruction has taken place Upon termination Honeywell may repossess all copies of the Licensed Software then in Licensee s possession or control These remedies shall be cumulative and in addition to any other remedies available to Honey well The following Sections shall survive any termination of this Agreement Sections 1 3 1 3 3 4 5 6 8 9 2 10 11 and 12 7 SUPPORT The Software license fees do not include support install
311. mber x Glbv Glbv x Get the value of global variable number x Locv Locv x Get the value of local variable number x Pen Pen x Get the value of Pen number x Tot TOT x Get the current value of totaliser x 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 277 278 Honeywell Table 13 12 Boolean Operators Syntax Description AND amp amp Returns a true or false result from testing if two tests are both true e g IF A1 GLBV1 amp amp A2 GLBV2 Assign Assigns one variable to another e g GLBV1 A1 GLBV1 becomes the value of A1 Equal to Returns a true or false result from testing if two variables are equal to each other e g IF A1 GLBV1 Greater than Greater than or equal to Less than Less than and equal to Returns a true or false result from testing if one variable is greater than another Returns a true or false result from testing if one variable is greater or equal to than another Returns a true or false result from testing if one variable is less than another Returns a true or false result from testing if one variable is less than or equal to another NOT Returns true if the result is 0 otherwise returns false Not equal to l Returns a true or false result from testing if two variables are not equal to each other e g IF A1 GLBV1 OR II Returns a true or false result from testing if one or other or both tests are true e g IF A1
312. me and date of the occurrence Subsequently events can be reviewed in a list or represented on a graph An event is made up from a Cause and an Effect Set up a cause such as Pen 1 going into an alarm state and the effect of this could be to start a totaliser or acknowledge the alarm Select the first available event eg Event 1 Tick to Enable and change the Event Tag if required Each Event has two Causes and two Effects available these can be used in different combinations An event can have up to 4 causes that triggers just one effect eg A pen going into alarm a Totaliser starts Max Mins reset and a Batch starts This could have the effect of starting Logging e An event can have one cause that has up to 4 effects eg A pen could go into alarm and the effects could be that the alarm is acknowledged and a Totaliser is started there is a Mark placed on the chart and an Alarm is sounded e An event can have up to 4 causes that have up to 4 effects eg A pen goes into alarm and a Totalisers is started A scheduled export starts and Max Min values are reset The effects could be the alarm is acknowledged and a mark on chart is displayed to show the start of the totaliser an Email is sent to notify a scheduled export has been made and a sound effect is played to identify the Max Min values have been reset In summary Cause 1 2 3 or Cause 4 will trigger Effect 1 2 3 and Effect 4 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 95 Honeyw
313. me process these can be pre configured so when start ing a batch the user can pick from a list of products The pre defined lists have to be enabled in the indi vidual group screen eg Show List 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Graph Settings Use this screen to set the configuration for new graphs In TrendServer Pro Go To Edit gt Preference the Dialog will open Select Tab Graph Settings Change the settings in Graph Settings for new Graph Click OK Peer services Batch Settings Graph Settings Graph Opening Maximized v MV Show Events Scale Arrangement Strip v Zoom Level Show 7 Day s v Reset to default Last Time Real Time Speed 5 Sec s Graph Opening Options available for graph openings are 1 Maximized 2 Normal 3 Minimized New graph default setting is set to Maximize all the graph Scale Arrangement This acts in the same way as the Arrange Button in any Graph Options avail able for Scale Arrangements are 1 Tile 2 Strip 3 Best Fit 4 Minimize Scale and 5 Default Scale arrangement will operate as given below e drag single pen into newly created graph then scale will rearrange again to change the default preference as shown in figure above in between adding pen on the graph the scale will rearrange with new preference E g created new graph with as Tile as default scale arrangement in Graph Settings as shown in above figure Add Pen 1 and Pen 2
314. mmunications setup These entries should be configured cor rectly and not require any changes by the user e Port Configuration these are the Modbus port settings The Peer to Peer communications function sets up the recorder so it can be recognised on a network If lots of recorders are on the same network they can be easily identified and connected to Modbus port Default port number 502 e Peer Services TCP Port Transfer Control Protocol Default port number 8955 e Peer Services UDP Port User Datagram Protocol Default port number 8956 The TCP and UDP port numbers have been specially selected for his type of network communica tions It is recommended that the TCP and UDP ports are not changed unless specifically requested by your IT network administrator e Contents Enables the Help files About Communications Server Gives the version of the software Add a new Device to a communications port TIT Use this icon button as one way of adding a device to the Communications port Oth er ways of adding a device are to right click on the desired port in the left window ie Ethernet and select the Add Device option Or select a comms port in the left window right click in a clear space in the top window and select Add Device ow Configure Database Logging jit Use this icon button to configure a device for logging channels to a database Other ways to configure logging are to right click on a comms port or a device
315. mp On and Off State could be labelled Pump Off Use the On Off state to enable each digital Specify the Direction of the line select either an Digital Input or a Relay Output There is a Fail Safe option which can be activated on the relay output direction this holds the relay in an energised state until triggered by an alarm when the relay is de energised Any power failure will cause the same result When using fail safe with a maths expression refer to Maths and Fail Safe on page 270 Choose the Log to event window this will prompt a message to appear in the events list window when the digitals change state Check the Place a mark on the chart box to place a notification mark onto the chart when the digital changes state Click in any area on the screen and press F1 on the keyboard to display the related help files Events System To use the Events system with the recorder the Events option must be active on the recorder The Events option can be added to the recorder at any time Events are certain conditions or operations which can be setup and logged according to the time and date of the occurrence subsequently they can be reviewed in a list or represented on a graph Click on the Events button from the side bar and select an event number from a list of up to 32 separate events Tick Enabled to activate the screen Each event can be named for identification purposes Click in any area on the screen and press F1 on th
316. mpact flash devices To distinguish them a new branch has been added into the tree The details are given below e Real Time Logged Data Real time data logged by communication server in TrendManager Suite software If you make changes to the time in the system where the communication server is logging real time data then Historian Data after the time change will be shown in Real Time Logged Data and Historian data before the time change will be shown in Real Time Logged Data 1 The number will keep increasing for each change in the time e FTP Imported Data Data imported from FTP using SD card Compact Flash or USB Drive If you make changes to the time in the recorder while logging data in the recorder then the Historian data after the time change will be shown in FTP Imported 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Data while historian data before the time change is shown in FTP Imported Data 1 branch 9 Double click on the pen with the historical data you want to retrieve Double click on the pen ID and it will show in the Item Id edit box Pen 430 has been selected in this example FIGURE 10 10 Select the pen for insertion MatrikonOPC HDA Explorer loj x File Server Function View Help HeiT aetna A isch a corfesocderretenrd el ssl iret g c1 1 re Insert Item J xj aA dha dead he Itemid JT_PIFTP Imported Datal430 r Browse FTP B Initial Database B FPC GV TS 150T_P g FTP mpotted Data LOCAL TIF M
317. mple 2 Cold Storage Temperature Measurement A recorder was required to help track random and rapid temperature changes within the cold storage rooms Conventional sample recording had shown that temperature variations were present but was not of high enough resolution to pin point the cause Again as in example 1 the measured inputs would show long periods of stable constant readings interspersed with small sharp increases in temperature In order to track the cause of these variations it was necessary to maximise the time resolution of the data This application was ideally suited to the Fuzzy Logging data storage technique as the periods of inactivity would result in compression rates of over 50 times Example 3 Logged Data Example The diagram below is a sample of actual logged data in both the Fuzzy Logging method top and Sample Logging method bottom derived from the same analogue input It provides an excellent illustration of how less data points can be used to construct an iden tical trace 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 289 290 Honeywell Fuzzy Logged Sample Logged Diagram 2 NB This data extract was taken from a 56 hour temperature run which resulted in approx imately 1 Mbyte of sample data and approximately 40 Kbyte of Fuzzy Logged data A compression ratio of 25 times Anything else it can do Yes Fuzzy Logging can be used as a One Hit record
318. n below Start gt All Programs gt TrendViewRecorders gt TrendServer Pro Select Communications Server then once opened it will appear as an icon in the system task bar in the bottom right of the PC Screen Note Data will not be gathered until the Comms Server is activated from the Start Menu m Startup Toppi 1 Control Panel Devices and Printers g Communications Server Default Programs Trend Server Pro d Viewer Central Inc Help and Support i wes 4 Back Run 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 193 Honeywell If the Comms Server related services does not start and if the Communications Service Ul is not open while starting the Communications Service UI User Interface a covering window in task bar will appear Subsequently after few seconds an error message box shown below will appear Py Could not establish connection to Local Communications Server Please check if TMSService is running You must open Comms Ul with administrator privilege to start TMSService Do you want to start TMSService a G Select Yes in the above window If the Communication Service UI is open with Non Administrative privileges the following message will appear and the Communication Service will fail to start e TMS Communications Service is not installed or Failed to open the P service If the Communication Service UI is open with Administrative privileges the following m
319. n by default after installation of TrendServer NOTE There can be multiple databases with the name initial database under the Archive Database Server This occurs because when the database is archived using the Database Management Tool the default database name is not modified To modify the default database name please use the Data base Management Tool After adding archive databases if any new database folder is added to the same path it will not be reflect automatically in the Trend Manager Suite user interface You will need to close and launch TrendManager Suite user interface to see the newly added database Add a Remote Server e Go to the Server List in the Server slide out pane only connected servers listed e Click Add new server e Enter the remote machine s IP address and name into the dialogue box Or use this but ton Look up the IP address from the machine name to translate a name to an address Click on OK If the new server icon appears with a red cross on it this means that there has been a link problem Verify that the IP address is correct and the machine is turned on See the message window at the bot tom of the screen for details Double click on the server icon to retry the connection Double click on the server icon to reload all of that server s databases Depending on your version of Microsoft windows some settings in the permissions parameters might be necessary Please refer to the application
320. n embedded variable Other information can be accessed by exchanging the Pn with the following variables see Figure 6 6 In Mark on Chart enter name v P1 T is P1 V P1 U Setup Window P Events Counters Preset Markers TimeSync General iV coy Field IO WARNING Events are credit controlled Eventi Changes here may not be reflected on the recorder 7 Scheduled set effect1 MarkChart Dore M Mams Set cf M MarkChart se 1 Nams O set erreta M Maka set Screens Details of Effect 1 Enabled Recording Type Transfer Marker Type Hardware Mark Chart Text Reports Iv Mark Chart X User Defined F name P1 T P 1 4 P1 0 Embedded variable must be in CAPITALS spaces are allowed 102 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Event Effects continued If the recorder name is Furnace1 Tag is Temperature the current value is 14 81 and the Unit text is Deg C The recorder will insert the name pen tag current pen value and units into the Mark on chart The Mark on Chart will display Furnace 1 Temp 41 81 deg C Logging Is an event effect that can Start or Stop logging enter which one in Sub Type From Selection Type choose either Multiple pens Pen group or All Pens and select the relevant pen s below Totaliser Is an event effect that can Start Stop Reset or Reset and Start a Totaliser in Sub Type From Selection Type
321. n is going to Source or or igin of the data channel or event Rate and Type of data sampling being communicated Keep power saving options of the PC disabled if enable it will turn off display and put compu ter to sleep which will stop real time data logging 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Database Logging This tab will display information on what is currently being logged to a database for the device that is selected in the top window its Destination or where the information is going to Source or origin of the data channel or event Rate and Type of data sampling being communicated A third tab Diagnostics can be enabled using the Administration button and selecting Pref erences Send Recorder Events Comms Server has a set of chart controls that can control the chart on the recorder from your PC This can be done in Realtime chart controls on page 209 or can be setup as an Effect of an Event see Event chart controls on page 209 Furnace 1 Edit Device Configure Logging Delete Device Send Recorder Event Recorder Chart Functions Properties ast Prefill Chart v Fast Prefill Chart Normal Chart Pause Chart Richt click on an active recorder to produce the drop down menu Realtime chart controls Right click on an active recorder in Comms Server Ethernet or RS485 either from the recorders listed in the left hand window or from recorders in the main wi
322. n page 62 Notes e if elseif amp else are followed by expressions in curly brackets e lines within the curly brackets always end in semicolon e g every execution path must have a return statement e every expression within curly brackets must include a return e Small values fractions entered into a maths expression will require a zero before the dec imal point Eg 0 5 e Outputs that are set to Single Pulse should not be used as a part of a maths expression as it Can cause spurious values e No white spaces e Syntax is not case sensitive 500 character limit for scripting NOTICE Full Maths and Scripting functions are Options and must be enable using the Credit System Be sure to enable these options in the recorder or they will not be available See Credits tab on page 62 All of the following tables display functions available in Full and Scripting Maths unless otherwise stated 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 271 272 Honeywell Maths Variable and Function Tables Table 13 7 Maths Variable Table Maths Variables Syntax Description Alarm Level PnAxL Gets the Alarm Level n is Pen number 1 to 96 and x is alarm number 1 to 6 Analogue Input Eng values An Get the value of Analogue n 1 to 48 in Engi neering units Analogue Raw Electrical RAn Get the value of Raw Analogue n 1 to 48 in values E
323. n readable form that is not suitable for machine execution without the intervening steps of interpretation or compila tion 1 14 Unlicensed Software means Software that may be included on electronic storage media containing the Licensed Software provided by Honeywell that Licensee is not author ized to access or use under this Agreement 2 LICENSE GRANT Subject to Licensee s compliance with the terms and conditions of this Agreement and payment of any applicable fees Honeywell hereby grants to Licensee and Licensee accepts a restricted personal non transferable non exclusive internal use only license without the right to sublicense to i use Licensed Software solely for Licensee s internal purposes in accordance with the Licensed Use on Licensed Processor s at the Licensed Site and ii make up to two 2 copies or the number of copies allowed under applicable law of the Licensed Software in non printed machine readable form to be used solely for archival or backup purposes Archival Copies Licensee shall include all copyright and trade secret notices and serial numbers on the Archival Copies which shall be owned solely by Honeywell or its third party suppliers 3 RESTRICTIONS 3 1 General Except as expressly permitted by this Agreement Licensee may not i modify the Licensed Software ii translate reverse engineer decompile disassemble except to the extent applicable laws specifically prohibit such
324. n the Logging Configuration box is empty check the Comms Server software to see if the connection is active between the recorder and the Comms server For more detailed information on the Comms Server refer to Comms Server on page 193 For more information on Modbus communication refer to Appendix G Modbus Communications and Modbus Profile Tool on page 301 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 163 Honeywell e The Database Configuration displays the Database Servers that are connected and the database currently being or to be logged to Archived data server is not available for data logging hence no logging in Archived database they are just for viewing and analysing e A list of Channels available to be logged will be displayed for that recorder each channel can be added individually for logging or select all channels for logging If all channels are selected then the log rate and the type of logging will be set the same for all unless indi vidually edited afterwards Please ensure the log rate is set within the span allowed Tick the right hand box if you require events to be logged to the database also e When the channels are selected for logging they will appear in the bottom window dis playing their log rate and the type of logging To change this first select a channel and click on the Edit Channel button to produce Logging Channel Configuration box click OK The Delete button will take the channel out of this win
325. n the graph is represented by two values min and max If the spread sheet should exceed over ten thousand lines a warning box will appear User Defined Select a sample period from the drop down box The export function will look for multiple readings over the selected time Export Values Max Min Default setting which will log the Max and Min values since the last log Average Can be set to take an average of all the samples taken since the last log Export Events Export with Pen Event information will be exported to the same spreadsheet as the data Separate Sheet List of Events exported to a separate spreadsheet CSV Delimiter Comma Separated Variable CSV is used to identify breaks between values so they can be displayed correctly If local values already use commas as a part of a currency format then change the setting to a semicolon The software will detect which local cur rency format is in use Pens Order Set the order of the pens when doing an export in TrendManager software Ascending Ascending will display the Pen Number Pen Name as per selection in Ascending order Descending Descending will display the Pen Number Pen Name as per selection in Descending order Pen Number Pen Number allows the user to arrange pen data as per pen Number Pen name Pen Name allows the user to arrange pen data as per Pen Name Click in any area on the screen and press F1 on the keyboard to display the related help files 43 TV 25
326. n will log the maximum and the minimum values since the last log There are a list of rules concerning priorities for data rate and data type when accessing a recorder on line Refer to the Communications manual for Honeywell V5recorders for X Series and GR recorders refer to the Comms section in the User manual For more detailed information on the Comms Server refer to the Communications manual for Honey well V5 recorders for X Series and GR recorders refer to the Comms section in the User man ual 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Server Available only on TrendServer All the areas listed below are covered in the TrendManager Suite Help and in the TrendManager Suite User manual Click on this button to produce the LocalServer Archive Database Server both by default and Remote database server list if any added From here the user can access the Database list by clicking on Databases Select a server and close the list all the recorders and databases that will be displayed will be held on that selected database server For more information on server access refer to the Server access table on page 153 Archive Database Server This server will allow a user to add databases which are archived using the Data Management Tool This server will allow the flexibility to add archive databases located across the network machines even though TrendServer is not installed in those machines This server will happe
327. nd display and record input 1 If input 2 is bigger than all the others then make the global variable 1 equal to channel 2 and display and record input 2 If input 3 is bigger than all the others then make the global variable 1 equal to channel 3 and display and record input 3 If none of the above are correct then Input 4 must be the highest so make the global variable 1 equal to channel 4 and display and record input 4 Display the global variable 1 on another pen to show which channel is biggest at any given time Pen 5 is chosen to record the highest channel input and channel 6 is chosen to record which input is the highest The greater than gt is used the AND amp amp Boolean is also used and the global variable GLBV1 is used to hold the current highest channel number Converting this to an actual script gives the following If A1 gt A2 amp amp A1 gt A3 amp amp A1 gt A4 This tests if flow meter 1 is more than 2 3 and 4 GLBV1 1 If yes then set display indicator to meter 1 return A1 And return the current flow reading elseif A2 gt A1 amp amp A2 gt A3 amp amp A2 gt A4 This tests if flow meter 2 is more than 1 3 and 4 GLBV1 2 If yes then set display indicator to meter 2 return A2 And return the current flow reading 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 281 282 Honeywell elseif A8 gt A1 amp amp A3 gt A2 amp amp A3 gt A4 This tests i
328. ndServer Pro i Warning there is too much data to load all of it into memory Please refine the time span of your graph Printing graphs To Print a graph simply click on the print icon and select either standard print or legend print or select print from the graph drop down menu running along the top of the screen The latter gives you the option of print preview where the graphs can be viewed in both forms The standard print will print the graph as displayed on the screen Legend print adds an information box at the bottom of the graph identifying the graph name recorder ID number recorder name and recorder description Also displayed are all the pens used showing each pen trace in colour with the pen tag name and pen description The legend print shows exact start and stop time and dates The legend details are taken from information entered during the recorder pen and graph set ups Both graphs will print vertical background lines according to the time span and horizontal lines depicting the scale range With different scale ranges the horizontal lines displayed are from the scales nearest to the right hand edge of the scale area The scale lines are determined by the major grads as defined in the setup of the recorder 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 235 Honeywell Use the Arrange button to ensure the scales down the right hand edge of the scale area are exactly in line Go to Graph Print preview to c
329. ndow e From the list select Send Recorder Events and the Recorder Chart Functions box will appear If the option is not in the list go to Preferences in Administration on page 197 Select a chart control function for immediate effect on the recorder Because TrendServer Pro is graphing the data that is being transferred in realtime the recorders running on TrendServer Pro will not be affected Event chart controls The same set of chart controls can be activated using the event system in TrendServer Pro Chart controls can be used as an effect of an event happening In the Events tab in TrendServer Pro set up a cause to trigger the effect of a chart control ee Pause this will pause the chart until it is resumed Resuming a paused chart will display continuous chart data from when it had been paused The chart can be stopped if in a paused state 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 209 Honeywell ee Stop this will stop the chart and no chart data will be displayed for the length of time the chart is stopped If a stopped chart is resumed there will be a gap in the displayed chart data e e Resume this can be used after the chart has been stopped or paused The chart data will continue from where it has been paused with no gaps displayed But if the chart has been stopped the displayed data will display a gap in data until it is resumed ee Clear this will clear all the data being displayed Data will not be cleared i
330. nect from server FIGURE 10 25 Select Disconnect Server Ww MatrikonOPC HDA Explorer 3 i lB xj File Server Function View Help Hci TrendView Historian S u fice IRE Ske Salsa Sol Ca E Localhost adici Disconnec OPCHDA_DATA_TYPE Penll 2011 01 13 17 36 38 667 OPCHDA_DESCRIPTI 2011 01 13 17 36 38 667 OPCHDA_ENG UNITS Pen 11 2011 01 13 17 36 38 667 OPCHDA_SOURCE_N 100 2011 01 13 17 36 38 667 OPCHDA_ITEMID 0 2011 01 13 17 36 38 667 4FTP Multitrend SX6 FTP Imported DatatPen 11 FF TP Multitrend SX6 FTP Imported DatatPen 95 Constraints e In Hci TrendView Historian Server insert and replace data functionality is not sup ported You will not able to modify historical data in TrendView historical server e In Hci TrendView Historian Server Read Modified and Read at Time functionality of any data is not supported 258 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Chapter 11 Glossary Explanation of terms relating to the TrendManager Suite 10baseT Network cable and connections Twisted pair cable the most commonly used for Ethernet net works The 10 means 10 Mbps refers to the transmission speed 10 100 Either 10 base or 100 base 100mbps Address Resolution Protocol ARP Used for mapping an IP Address to a physical machine address that is recognised in a local network such as an Ethernet Address AMS2750 is the specification that covers pyrometric requirements for thermal
331. nel 3 Pen 3 3 6 Log Channel 4 Pen 4 0 000000 100 000000 Linear Channel 5 Pen 5 0 000000 50 000000 Linear Channel 6 Pen 6 0 000000 200 000000 Linear Channel 7 Pen 7 0 000000 100 000000 Linear Channel 8 Pen 8 0 000000 100 000000 Linear Channel 9 Pen 9 0 000000 6 000000 Linear Channel 10 Pen 10 0 000000 100 000000 Linear Channel 11 Pen 11 0 000000 100 000000 Linear Channel 12 Pen 12 0 000000 100 000000 Linear Channel 13 Pen 13 0 000000 100 000000 Linear hannal 14 Dan 14 9 NNNMNNN 190 NNNMNNN Linnnel New Profile Ctrl N Open Profile Ctrl O Save Profile Ctrl s Save Profile As Print Profile gt Import Profile s Ctrl I Export Profile s Ctrl Exit Ctrl X 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Use an Existing Modbus Profile To open and use an existing Modbus profile either go to File gt Open or select the yellow folder in the toolbar Select a profile to match your recorder from the list provided The attributes that can be modified are described in Create a new Modbus profile on page 303 When the modified profile is complete it can be overwritten by selecting Save Profile or to save as a new profile select Save Profile As from the File menu The new saved profile will appear in the Comms Server list FIGURE 18 1 Existing Profile Z MODBUS Profile Editor Henry 2 OX ID 1 Ea vif 2 Profile
332. nfigured to allow between 1 and 10 minutes at whole minute increments of pre trigger data to be stored for each pen each pen will store the same time span The default will be set to 5 minutes e Post Trigger Time specified in seconds from 0 disabled and the default to 3600 for 1 hour of post trigger time extending the alarm log rate for all pre trigger pens by the speci fied time after the last pre trigger pen alarm has cleared Acquiring In the running state the pre trigger buffers are being filled with pen readings dependant on the alarm logging rate when no pre trigger pen alarms are asserted The buffer will cycle when they reach the maximum pre trigger time as configured If power is lost when the pre trigger is acquiring then the pre trigger information will be lost Event processing All pens enabled for pre trigger will be put into their alarm logging rate and remain in the alarm logging rate while any pre trigger pen alarm is asserted Once one or more alarms on a pre trigger enabled pen s fire the readings in the pre triggered buffers will be saved to internal flash memory The pre trigger system will request an export to be performed if scheduled export is enabled If Post trigger is enabled the alarm log rate will continue for this period after all alarms have cleared 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 43 TV 25 11 Honeywell If during the post trigger time a pre trigger alarm re occurs but the previous p
333. ng units Low EU Absolute bottom of engineering scale inc 4 under range High EU Absolute top engineering scale inc 4 over range oa fF ON gt Units Units of engineering values as Text field Both Asynchronous and Synchronous modes are supported OPC Clients An OPC client can be used instead of the TrendServer software It is a user software appli cation for realtime interface between servers and clients Information from our comms server which is OPC compliant uses an industry standard method of uniform data inter change The OPC client can then export realtime communications to other applications eg Microsoft Excel OPC clients must be version 3 compatible For more information refer to Application Note 4 OPC Access GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 189 Honeywell OPC Interface Open Process Control 190 OPC Server connection must be enabled in the recorder by selecting the OPC option in Credits tab on page 62 Many types of OPC Server software packages are available and are compatible with the recorders OPC server supports OPC DA version 3 and OPC AE Alarm and Events Use the name of the OPC server as it appears in the client software OPC limitations Technically speaking there are no restrictions on the number of clients that can connect to OPC DA or OPC A amp E servers Some software limits are in place OPC DA Server Maximum number of groups that can be added per client is 3 Maximum num
334. nning it should be changed using the Security Configuration Utility to make them run under that user account NOTE Re start of the system is mandatory to apply above changes 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 37 Honeywell Access OPC DA HDA Server 38 TrendServer Pro has an OPC DA Server named TrendView OPC 1 and TrendView Historian has an OPC HDA server named Hci Trend View Historian Follow below steps to connect to either of these servers using an OPC Client 1 Ifthe OPC client is installed on the TrendServer Pro machine ensure that the windows user try ing to launch OPC client is added to TMSApplicationAccessGroup Refer to TrendManager Suite User Groups for more details 2 Ifthe OPC client is trying to connect to the OPC server from a remote machine please follow guide lines provided by OPC vendor The following additional steps should be completed before accessing OPC server NOTE For Matrikon OPC Client the documents and guidelines can be found at following location http www matrikonopc com dcom configuration opc aspx a Add OPC client users to TMSApplicationAccessGroup on the TrendServer Pro TrendView Historian Server machine Refer to TrendManager Suite User Groups after Installation on page 15 for more details b If OPC client is still not able to access OPC server please refer to Troubleshooting for TrendManager Suite Application on page 31 43 TV
335. notes if necessary for more details Delete a server e Go to the Server list in the Server slide out pane e Either drag and drop the selected server icon over the nearest Trash can or right click and select delete e Archived Database Server cannot be deleted Change the current Server e Go to the Server list in the Server slide out pane e Click on the desired server this will now be the currently selected server 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 183 Honeywell Passwords 184 Only available from TrendServer setting up passwords allows the user to restrict access to certain parts of the program Click in any area on the screen and press F1 on the keyboard to display the related help files Click on the System button to reveal the System list select the Password icon If the passwords have not been used before the user will be prompted with the Initial Password Setup box Enter a pass word of your choice twice Press OK and the Password Control box will appear Password Control Enter your user ID as Administrator and your password then select Logon The maximum number of characters is 20 it is case sensitive and it can be alpha numeric From this screen the Administrator can Logoff Change Password select the User Manager or deselect the box to disable the password system FIGURE 7 10 Password Settings Administrator Password Password Control Enter Administrator Password You are currently logged in
336. nt Batch Viewer on page 165 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 43 TV 25 11 Honeywell Importing via FTP or Secure Communications Interface Available on TrendServer ONLY TrendServer uses FTP IP File Transfer Protocol Internet Protocol this is the transfer of data between a computer and a recorder or between two or more computers Every Windows PC has FTP capability built in TrendServerSIREC ServerTrend Server has a Secure Comms feature which provides for the secure transfer of data between a computer and a GR Series recorder provided SecureWSD is be enabled and the credit option in the recorder is enabled It uses authentication certificates that have been installed on the recorders and TrendServer for this secure communications The GR Seriesrecorders support a Credit enabled function for doing secure FTP data transfers since the nor mal FTP protocol is an unsecure protocol TrendServer offers the ability to import data from recorders via an Ethernet connection This is stan dard on all recorders with an Ethernet card Due to the potential of large amounts of data that may be available it is not recommended to use FTP and Realtime at the same time For import via FTP select FromNetwork FTP as a Source Location This will reveal more of the box giving download information see From Network Setup on page 159 Importing Data via FTP or Secure Communication Interface Select type of import either Data or
337. nt any provision of this Agreement is determined to be ille gal invalid or unenforceable the validity and enforceability of the remaining provisions of this Agreement will not be affected and in lieu of such illegal invalid or unenforceable pro vision there will be added as part of this Agreement one or more provisions as similar in terms as may be legal valid and enforceable under applicable law 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell 12 8 Headings The section headings appearing in this Agreement are inserted only as a matter of convenience and in no way define limit construe or describe the scope or extent of such section or in any way affect this Agreement 12 9 Government End Users The Software is a commercial item as that term is defined in 48 C F R 2 101 consisting of commercial computer software and commercial computer software documentation as such terms are used in 48 C F R 12 212 Consistent with 48 C F R 12 212 and 48 C F R 227 7202 1 through 227 7202 4 Licensee will provide the Software to U S Government End Users only pursuant to the terms and conditions therein and herein 12 10 Assignment Licensee may not delegate assign or transfer this Agreement the license s granted or any of Licensee s rights or duties hereunder including by way of merger regardless of whether Licensee is the surviving entity or acquisition and any attempt to do so without Honeywell s express prior w
338. nts tab The Events tab contains all recorded events for the selected recorder The list contains an icon to show the type of Event the Date Time and Details of each Event r World icon button All events oye Recorder icon button System messages general messages diagnostics FAN Exclamation mark in a triangle System warning events Red circle with a red line through it System warning critical events A Flag icon button Automated messages shows only automatic markers Head icon button Manually entered shows only user defined messages A Yellow bell icon Alarm events On or Off yellow is an active alarm g Light bulb button Digital and relay input events Barcode icon Batch event has occurred see Batch tab 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 165 166 Honeywell The columns within the window can be resized by placing the cursor between the two columns in the headings the cursor will change to a double arrow then drag the cursor to the desired column width There is an arrow next to the Date heading that will reconfigure the list from ascending to descending date time order and vice versa To view the full Events list drag the vertical scroll bar up and down or use the up and down arrows at the top and bottom of the scroll bar Alternatively use the arrow up and down arrow keys on your PC keyboard FIGURE 7 7 Event Tab Event Batch View for chair ish the memory Events l Batch
339. nywhere on the graph Each text box has a grab handle in the top left corner and a close box X in the top right corner Hovering the cursor over the grab handle will cause it to changes to a white hand A dotted leader line will appear from the Event box to where the event occurred on the graph the Event box can now be repositioned on the graph The leader line can be moved in the vertical plane by clicking and holding the end bar For alarms the dotted line will point to the place where the pen was triggered User text boxes will be saved to all recorders being graphed in that window 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 225 226 Honeywell Events Filter Use the Events Filter to display only the type of event you want to view such as Alarm User or Batch Figure 9 7 on ee ee Add Batch Start Event page 225 Add Batch End Event Right click on the Events bar at the top of the graph to pro ae RTEEaETE duce the Events Filter menu By default all the events are Events Filter all set to be active Click on the events to deactivate these v System Events will not be displayed in the Event bar Click directly on an v Alarm Events event icon e g the bell icon represents the event is an Digital Events alarm this will select that particular event indicated by a v User Events tick Once selected it will always be displayed even when Ep a that type of event has been filtered out Add User Text Event This is selectable by
340. o set up each channel profile e Enabled Tick to Enable e Update Rate Fixed at 1Hz Label Select and enter an identification label for the pulse input Select and enter a label Up to 16 characters Alarm Digital IO tab The Alarm Digital IO button will display all the digital inputs outputs available Click on each individual Alarm IO or Digital IO number to set up each channel profile 2 types of Alarm Relay cards 4 Alarm Relay Output card and an 8 Alarm Relay Output with 2 Digital Inputs card 2 types of Digital IO cards 8 Digital Inputs or Outputs card and a 16 Digital Inputs or Outputs card Not available for the eZtrend recorder Alarm Relay Card 4 Alarm relay output card or 8 Alarm relay Output with 2 Digital Inputs 6 fixed outputs and 2 configurable Digital Input or output cards Digital IO Card There are 8 or 16 Digital channels per card that can be setup as inputs or outputs The Digital I O card also has 4 channels that can be set as pulse inputs channels 1 to 4 The operating frequency for pulse inputs on the Digital I O card is 1kHz max To view and log a channel selected as a Pulse input set up an extra pen with a Maths function of LPULn in Edit Maths in the Pens menu 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Setup Window lig Alarm Dig IO Li eati Enabled Digital Type Output v 7 Latched v Pulse Duration Secs Failsafe Label Acti Digital 1 0 16 soske Inactive Label R
341. obsolete e Factory laboratory and office applications can all access the same data e Reliable data as any number of OPC software applications can simultaneously read a device e Single industry standard data interface Web Browser The Web Browse function can be enabled disabled from the recorder The web function can be password protected if passwords are enabled To access the web page type the device s IP address in to a web browser such as Internet Explorer If Microsoft WINS system Windows Internet Name Service is available then the device name can be used to search for the device web page The recorder will automatically register a unique Network ID using the serial number The for mat is xs nnnnnn where nnnnnn is the serial number of the recorder This allows you to browse the recorder if you are using DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol A Login Screen will appear for recorders with Password functionality enabled Enter the pass word protected User name and Password supplied to log in here For Users without Password security just choose a language option to access the web page IP Address Troubleshooting If your recorder s IP address begins 169 this means there is no DHCP Server Dy namic Host Configuration Protocol available to create a dynamic IP address Either make a DHCP server available or allocate a Static IP address see TCP IP tab on page 92 The recorders IP address can also be
342. ogging Type is set to Continuous Select and enter a value from the list to align the logging at specified intervals This will hold the start of logging until the aligned time selected occurs based on the recorders real time clock PreTrigger activate pre triggering for that pen any alarm on that pen will cause the pre trigger system to be activated Only the first 16 pens can be configured for pre triggering For details on the Pre Trigger function and configuration for the pre trigger time is held in the recording menu in the setup configuration see Pre Trigger on page 110 The alarm rate for each pen will be used for the pre trigger rate The alarm rate must be set to less than 10 seconds per sample for pre triggering to operate Pre trigger will only operate when the logging is in continuous sample mode pre triggering will not be available with fuzzy logging or MaxMin Auto Fit Only available if the logging Type is set to Fuzzy Toggles On and Off AutoFit ensures that the last sampled data point is logged before the signal goes out of the toler ance set in Band 1 or Band 2 When displayed on a graph the input signal will automati Cally fit to this last logged point This gives a better fit for stepped input changes Band 1 Only available if the logging Type is set to Fuzzy This is where the tolerance is set for the input signal Specify as a percentage of the scale range the tolerance band allowed above and below the inp
343. oldenTrace Honeywell Segment Segment Type SetPoint Description Log Rate Total Duration DO HH MM SS 2 Close 4 Provide details for the following parameters Batch Name Enter a name for the new Golden Batch Description Enter the description Eng Units Enter the engineering units based of the batch to be traced Log Rate Rate at which the recorder acquires data Batch Span Enter the span range start and end point on the Y axis NOTE In order to compare a batch with this golden trace the golden trace must have the same log rate and span as the batch in comparison e Total duration read only Displays the total duration of the new pen trace This is cal culated automatically based on the segments created e Segment Type Ramp Down Graph decreases linearly and reaches the setpoint value The Initial Value must be greater than the Set Point Value for the first time e Ramp Up Graph elevates from the setpoint value The Initial Value must be lesser than the Set Point Value for the first time e Soak Graph remains constant during the specified segment duration e Segment Duration Enter the length of the segment which can be expressed in hh mm ss hour minute seconds format Initial Value Enter the initial process value 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 169 Honeywell e Set Point Enter the set point value the process must re
344. om the same graph and time as the overview mode FIGURE 9 12 Data Yiewer Time Batch Test Pen 7 Batch Test Pen6 Batch Test Pen5 Honeywell Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 29 0000 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 30 0000 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 31 0000 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 32 0000 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 33 0000 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 34 0000 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 35 0000 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 36 0000 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 37 0000 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 38 0000 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 39 0000 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 40 0000 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 41 0000 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 42 0000 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 43 0000 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 44 0000 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 45 0000 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 46 0000 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 47 0000 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 48 0000 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 49 0000 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 50 0000 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 51 0000 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 52 0000 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 53 0000 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 54 0000 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 55 0000 Thu Jan 20 2005 09 39 56 0000 Data iewer 50 3 49 71 50 3 43 71 50 3 49 71 50 3 49 71 50 3 49 71 50 3 49 71 50 3 49 71 50 3 49 71 50 3 43 71 50 3 49 71 50 86 50 3 50 86 50 3 50 86 50 3 50 86 50 3 50 86 50 3 50 86 50 3 50 86 50 3 50 86 50 3 50 86 50 3 50 86 50 3 51 4 50 86 51 4 50 86 51 4 50 86 51 4 50 86 51 4 50 86 51 4 50 86 52 3 52 18 52 42 52 3 52 53 52 42 52 65 52 53 52 76 52 65 52 87 52 76
345. ommunications status of recorders on a serial port RS485 or through an Ethernet connection Honeywell V5 recorders with an RS485 card can use an RS485 to RS232 converter eg Westermo Model No MA42 Serial No 4908 for RS232 Recorders are held on databases and the databases are held on servers By accessing other comms servers remotely it is possible to receive data from other recorders held on databases on other servers known as remote servers The comms server uses IP Addresses to locate recorders on local and remote servers All logging configuration for comms logging and logging to a database is set up from the Comms Server Recorder data can be entered into any PC on the LAN Local Area Networks and auto matically viewed and graphed at any other PC TrendServer offers the ability to down load and import data from Ethernet connected remote recorders GR Series recorders Honeywell X Series and GR Series recorders have Modbus and Modbus X capabili ties via Ethernet and RS485 comms OPC 2 0 DA and A amp E server are provided for third party clients to get the real time data and events NB Only Ethernet communications available as standard on the eZtrend V5 IQOQ Protocol Document Custom built IQOQ reports can be gererated based on the configuration of the recorder The configuration can be validated as a process of confirming that a piece of equipment or process meets the stated requirements to produce a regulated product Se
346. ompleted 33 sec remaining approx ce Cancel Export 6 Click on Cancel Export if export operation need to be cancelled 7 Once on export complete export progress will show it is completed 8 Click on Close on Export Data to Spreadsheet window to close the window 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 181 Honeywell System status 182 All the areas listed below are covered in the TrendManager Suite Help P Available only on TrendServer System Activate this button to reveal four more options Password Password control allows an Administrator to manage password accounts These accounts have a user name and password with different levels of authority which restrict access to the more system orien tated areas of the program For more information see Passwords on page 184 Status The status button toggles the system information panel on or off this shows a list of text messages linked reporting major events in the system E Mail The E mail function is for setting up default accounts and destinations for any part of the program that uses E mail This is for use when exporting to spreadsheets Also see Event Email setup on page 145 Realtime This is the Realtime Pen Settings dialogue box configuring pens for realtime logging Enter the Data Rate and the Type of data to be logged either Sample or MaxMin Sample data will log the actual data value of the last imported reading Max Mi
347. on TrendManager and TrendServer The Spreadsheet Export button is found on the left side of any graph and will allow the user to export data from a graph to a spreadsheet package such as Excel or to an E mail Data can be exported from any existing graph Historic FTP or Historic Realtime or a specific Batch graph Only the data displayed in the graph area will be exported to the spread sheet A graph can be created by dragging a recorder from the recorders list onto the graphing area or by dragging a Batch from the Batch Viewer 1 Click on Spreadsheet Export button Click on Yes to start preparing export summary and produce the Export Data to Spreadsheet window FIGURE 7 9 Export to Spreadsheet settings Export Data to Spreadsheet Export pen readings in Comma Separated Variable CSV format The File name will be in the format of Prefix csy where the user is asked for the prefix Event data shall be exported alongside the pen data Time D ate in normal format The data shall be exported using a user defined sample period This may produce large amounts of data Data selected for export is from Thursday January 05 2006 9 40 00 000 4M To Wednesday January 18 2006 12 40 00 000 AM Recorder Minitrend GR ID 0001 Serial Number 999103 Pen Pen 4 Units Recorder Minitrend GR ID 0001 Serial Number 999103 Pen Pen 3 Uni 4 Recorder Minitrend GR ID 0001 Serial Number 999103 Pen
348. on Utility which is a part of the TrendManager Suite installation For more details refer to the Security Configuration Utility on page 36 e Click Next The Start Copying Files window appears for reviewing the settings before starting the copy of files e Users should be part of TMSApplictaionAccessGroup to access TrendManager Suite TrendManager Suite Admin Console window will allow to add new users Click on the Add Users button to add new users Click on Skip to continue with installation TMS Admin Console To access TMS Users need to be part of TMSApplicationsAccessGroup Click on Add Users to add users to users group or click on Skip to proceed e Click Add Users to launch Configure Users window to add users to TMSApplica tionAccessGroup 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK A s Theat Manager Suite cals P EEE I L EE OE EEE this machine are shown below Select the TMS users from the below list and add to TMS Honeywell The users and groups on ApplicationAccessGroup Note To add users or groups not listed enter the user name manually in the text box below For adding domain usemame format user specify the usemame in domain Users Groups admin ASPNET epo Guest HON_ADMIN htsladmin SQLDebugger TMSUser TMSUserl TMSUser2 TMSUser4 Add a user TMSApplicationAccessGroup Administrators PACRIM1 E811063 TMSUser TMSUser1 Select a
349. on colour multi channel paperless chart recorder Recorders slide oye Cancel out pane Add a recorder See Add New Device on page 53 and Add New Recorder on page 123 for instructions on how to set up a new recorder Delete a recorder Go to Recorders list in the Recorders slide out pane e Drag and drop the desired recorder icon over a Trash can or right click and select Delete Note this deletes all the data associated with this recorder 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 149 150 Honeywell Copy a recorder This copies only a recorder setup not the data associated with this recorder e Go to the Recorders list in the Recorders slide out pane e Right click on the icon and select copy e Select the desired setup from the setups list and click OK Edit a recorder e Go to the Recorder list in the Recorders slide out pane e Double click or right click on desired recorder icon e Click on open Select the desired setup from the Setups list and click OK e Make any changes click OK Follow any further instructions e Click Ok and confirm changes Import data from a recorder For importing and exporting setups see mporting on page 155 For FTP transfer see Importing via FTP or Secure Communications Interface on page 157 Browse a recorder Available with TrendServer only and if Ethernet is set up in the hardware Wizard see Edit a recorder on page 150 This funct
350. on removes the currently selected alarm from the list If there are no alarms showing check the alarms have been configured in the Hardware wizard See Add New Recorder on page 123 When an alarm is allocated to a pen it is given the next available number e g If Pen 1 has 2 alarms 1 and 2 then if an alarm is set up for Pen 2 the next available alarm number would be 3 If the user then went back to add another alarm to Pen 1 this would be alarm 4 and so on Alarms allocated to a pen can be graphed using Maths See Maths on page 130 and See Appen dix A Maths Expressions for Honeywell V5 recorders on page 263 NOTE Alarms are based on linear input values apart from when the pen scale is logarithmic then the alarm threshold is based on the exponent of the log scale When an alarm is created on a logarithmic scale a warning message will be activated to notify the user Enabling Controls Enable as Always makes the alarm always active continually checking and ready to be triggered 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 43 TV 25 11 Honeywell The By Digitals option is only available if the recorder has an alarm card fitted which has the digital input output function It is necessary to setup the digital I O card before this option shows as available To configure the digital I O click on the Hardware Button to add a alarm card with digital I O capability if fitted in the unit as an option See Digital input
351. oolean expressions can be performed using Relay output O and Digital input I vari ables At a basic level AND and OR functions can be performed by using the and opera tors respectively between the above variables More significantly these variables and operators can be used to enable or disable certain segments of a maths expression as illustrated in the following example Example The temperatures of two adjacent kilns are being monitored Kiln 1 is being monitored on Analogue Input 1 of a recorder and Kiln 2 on Analogue Input 2 It is notice able that when Kiln 1 reaches a temperature above 750 C the Kiln 2 temperature increases by 2 of the Kiln 1 temperature How can the recorder be set up so that this 2 increase is ignored 1 A high alarm on Analogue Input 1 is set so that when the temperature reaches above 750 C Relay output 1 is activated 2 Set the maths expression for Analogue Input 2 as P2 A2 A1 50 O1 This means that when the temperature of Kiln 1 is below 750 C O1 0 so the above expression will be P2 A2 When the temperature is above 75 0 C O1 1 so the term A1 50 which is 2 of the value of A1 will be subtracted from the value of A2 This will give the temperature of Kiln 2 as it would be without the effect of Kiln 1 Maths and Fail Safe When using output relays in a maths expression be aware the maths is reporting the literal state of the relay If Pen 1 P1 equals output channel
352. option not available on the eZtrend Refer to Credits tab on page 62 for Firmware options Range Ohms Volts and Amps only Toggle between Preset and User Defined The Pre set option will make available a list of Range Types or select User Defined to specify High and Lower Limits Range Type Ohms Volts and Amps only Only available when Range is set to Preset Select for a list of available ranges The factory default range is 12V Damp Level Ohms Volts and Amps only Damping filters for noise reduction to smooth any significant or sudden change in the signal Damping looks at the previous and current readings executes an algorithm depending on how large the difference is between the two readings and then calculates a new position immediately Damping is only enabled when a thermocouple or RT is selected Enter the Damp level in Engineering Units 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 65 Setup Window Events Counters Honeywell Analogue In Alarm Dig 10 Linearisation Analog In 1 Iv he rots 242 so0ms z Range Preset gt esv zl foo Sample Rate Range Type Analog In 12 Analog In 13 Damp Level Analog In 14 Screen Analog In 15 Analog In 16 Recording Linearisation Table Eng Span Units No Tables v Use pen scale 100 0 Eng Zero None 0 0 l a Transfer Reports Cancel 66 X Add Unit Label fa SQRT Extract Iv Low Eng foo
353. or Prefill chart Clear All Messages Clear all messages from the message list Delayed Event Delay an event by a specific amount of time Script Timers 20 independent timers can be controlled Stop Start Reset or Reset and Start Start or Stop a sound used to alert the user that Pay sound an event effect has occurred Display Alert used to display a preset or user defined marker Batch used to Start Stop or Pause a batch Reports generates a report Update Tabular Readings updates the tabular screen with latest readings 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Appendix E Ethernet amp E mail Ethernet Ethernet is a local area network LAN technology that transmits information between computers and other devices at speeds of 10 to 100 million bits per second Mbps Each Ethernet equipped device operates independently of all other devices on the net work All devices attached to an Ethernet are connected to a shared signalling system Ether net signals are transmitted serially one bit at a time over the shared signal channel attached to each device It is up to the high level protocol that is sending data over the network to make sure that the data is correctly received at the destination device Devices attached to an Ethernet can send application data to one another using high level protocol software such as TCP IP protocol suite High level protocols have their own
354. or copyright and indemnify for any final judgment assessed against Licensee resulting from such suit provided that Licensee notifies Honeywell at such time as it is apprised of the third party claim and agrees to give sole and complete authority informa tion and assistance at Honeywell s expense for the defence and disposition of the claim Honeywell will not be responsible for any compromise or settlement made without Honeywell s consent The foregoing notwithstanding Honeywell shall have no liability for any claim of infringement based on a use of other than the current release of the Licensed Software if such claim would have been avoided by the use of the then current release provided Honey well has announced the release prior to the initiation of the infringement claim b any modifi cation of the Licensed Software by an entity other than Honeywell c any use or combination of the Licensed Software with any program data or equipment not supplied by Honeywell d any use of the Licensed Software other than as expressly permitted in this Agreement e products or processes developed pursuant to Licensee s direction design or specification or f any settlement or compromise of such claim made without Honeywell s written consent Further Licensee agrees to indemnify and defend Honeywell to the same extent and subject to the same restrictions set forth in Honeywell s obligations to Licensee as set forth in this Infringement
355. order then the User ID page will be skipped for user entry and the name of the person logged in through the password system will be automatically entered e Field 1 Props Defaults to Lot No Enable this to make this a requirement when starting a new batch The Lot number display name can be renamed and a list of additional names can be setup to appear as a pick list during the Batch Control setup The addition list names will not appear in a drop down list in the Batch Control screen unless you enable Show n List in the group properties menu See General Batch Properties Group on page 61 Field 2 Props Defaults to Description Enable this to make this a requirement when starting a new batch The Description display name can be renamed and a list of addi tional names can be setup to appear as a pick list during the Batch Control setup The addition list names will not appear in a drop down list in the Batch Control screen unless you enable Show n List in the group properties menu See General Batch Proper ties Group on page 61 e Field 3 Props Defaults to Comment Enable this to make this a requirement when start ing a new batch The Comment display name can be renamed and a list of additional names can be setup to appear as a pick list during the Batch Control setup The addition list names will not appear in a drop down list in the Batch Control screen unless you ena ble Show n List in the group prop
356. ormation on the Test button see above Click on the OK button and the changes are saved 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Delete a Device Select the Comms port containing the device to be deleted and right click on the device either in the left or top window Select Delete Device from the resulting menu The Delete Device Details dialog box will appear showing the details of that particular device Check this is the correct device for deletion then click on the OK button and the device is removed otherwise the operation can be cancelled Comms Server Logging To set up logging you must first decide where to store the data A database must be set up The database can either be on the PC running Comms Server or on another networked de vice There will be a database already set up by default on your PC when TrendServer Pro was loaded This will be called Initial database To set up a database on the PC click the Database Servers icon this will expand to show local Servers i e databases on that PC Click local servers to expand out to show all da tabases Communications Server Communications Server ji Database Servers ji Database Servers Communication Ports 98 Local Server x COM1 Initial Database x com2 June FTP x COM3 o i x CoM4 x COMS In the example shown there are two available databases The default database called Initial
357. ort will be run on Totals Select this to include the Total values of each selected pen All pens or group of pens depending what has been chosen in the Selection Type option The report can give you the pen Total value for every Hour Day Week Month the Current total pen value or Do Not In clude Total values Totaliser Pens only available when Multiple Pens is selected for Selection Type This will display any pens that have been set up as a totaliser pen Messages Select this to include the Messages of each selected pen All pens or group of pens depending what has been chosen in the Selection Type option The report can give you the pen Messages for the Last Hour Last Day Last Week Last Month All messages or Do Not Include Messages Message Lists only available when batch is selected in Style Select which type of mes sages are required for your report Alarm System Diagnostic Security or User messages One or more selections can be made Counters Select which type of Counters are required for your report Alarm User Event Digital Digital Input Relay Output or Pulse One or more selections can be made For more information see Counters on page 105 Footer Style Choose between one or two lines of footer at the end of the report Include Digital Inputs Select to Include or Do Not Include this option Include Digital Outputs Select to Include or Do Not Include this option Email Tick to enable the Em
358. ous page or the next page Help can be set on top or not on top e Use system colours will require help to be re started 52 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Chapter 6 Recorder Configuration from TrendManager Suite X Series and GR Recorders TrendManager Suite allows you to set up a recorder from your PC NB If any function is denied by a flashing padlock this is because a password is required to be entered to proceed any further see Passwords on page 184 All areas are covered in the TrendManager Suite Help Click in any area on the screen and press F1 on the keyboard to display the related help files Recorder Setup With the software open the main screen will be blank with a tool bar down the left hand side To start a new recorder configuration first select the Recorder button on the main button bar down the left side of the screen An empty recorders pane will be displayed Click on Add New Recorder Add New Device Select Add New Device from the Recorders pane and select an X Series and GRdevice from the list of all types and press OK the Add New Device box will appear Enter the Device Name and Description in the boxes provided to identify the recorder setup The D number of the unit must be set by the user If this setup is going to be transferred to a recorder enter the same ID number as the recorder It is important that all of the user s recorders have different ID numbers Ad
359. ow be logged to a database by using the Configure log ging screen and setting up channels for logging with the log rate and type and setting up a destination database See Logging Configuration on page 206 5 When the realtime data is being run eg graphed to the application server software or an OPC client this will enable the bottom window that will display details of the data Keep power saving options of the PC disabled if enable it will turn off display and put computer to sleep which will stop real time data logging Add a Database To add a database to a server right click on the server eg Local Server select Add Database and complete the dialog box details for the name and description of the device Add a Database Server 1 Use the database icon with a sign in the top left of the comms server window 2 Right click on Database Servers in the top left window Connect to a Database Server 1 Select Database Servers in the left window and then right click on the server to be con nected in the servers list in the main window 2 Connect to database server dialog box will appear enter an IP address and a description to identify the database server Delete a Database Server 1 Right click on the database server to be removed and select the delete option 2 Adialog box will appear with the IP address of the database server to be deleted If this is correct click on OK All database servers can be remov
360. p pre set E mail addresses and messages for use with the Events System The E mail Setup button is at the bottom of the main events screen Up to 8 destination E mail addresses can be entered including 1 Administrator addresses for when mail is unsuccessfully delivered The administrator address also acts as a source of the E mail e Enter the recipient s name and E mail address not forgetting an E mail address for the Administrator e Select a message number and subject e Type the message information to be E mailed in the Message text box Click on Done when complete The message is now in place and can be used on any event where the E mail option is selected as an effect General operation of the E mail system The recorder sends messages for distribution by an E mail Server The E mail server is located by its IP Address as set up in the communications set up options When the recorder sends an E mail mes sage it locates the E mail server and uses SMTP Simple Message Transfer Protocol to send the mes sage to the E mail server SMTP allows the recorder to send messages to an E mail server without having its own E mail address because of this the E mail server will not be able to send any reply back to the recorder When setting up the E mail address list it is important to include the E mail administrator address The Administrator E mail Address is the E mail address to where the E mail server will respond in the event of any prob
361. perform the export procedure or lose the existing pre trigger information Importing Once exported the import into TrendManager Pro can be performed from removable media or via FTP the imported information will show the pre trigger pens as overlapped data this will automatically be displayed utilising the TrendManager Pro overlapped pens feature to clearly show the pre trig ger data See Pre Trigger Data on page 218 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 111 112 Honeywell Transfer This is where the Setup configuration can be imported from a recorder or exported to other recorders via removable media Click on the Transfer button and select either Import or Export To import a setup enter the location from where the imported setup file is to be extracted from in the Path box or use the Browse button to search for the location of the setup file to be imported To export a setup enter the location to where the setup is to be exported to in the Path box or use the Browse button to search for the location for the setup file to be exported to If importing data from removable media eg USB key SD memory card or Compact Flash card and there are multiple sub directories one for each recorder point at a specific sub directory to import just that recorder or the root to import all the recorders Choose a folder to import from or export to Compact Flash is not available on the eZtrend QXe SD Card is available as an option on the eZtren
362. pressions on page 270 e On The letter O followed by a number causes the P1 O1 state of a Relay output denoted by the number to be inserted in the maths expression A Relay out put is read as 1 when active and 0 when inactive e Operators can be either unary or binary A unary operator requires one operand after it to make a valid expression whereas a binary operator requires an oper and on either side For example is a unary operator as in 2 2 squared whereas is a binary operator as in 2 3 2 multiplied by 3 Not available on the eZtrend V5 e Another feature on the Minitrend V5 and the P1i MU Multitrend Plus V5 is MU Memory use DU E Disk use and PU PC card use gives a percent age reading of disk or memory space used Not available on the eZtrend V5 NB When entering the MU and DU feature using TrendManager Suite ensure the Complex Variables box is ticked 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 263 Honeywell The available functions and operators for maths expressions are described below Where a function and operator have the same effect they are listed together A U after the operator denotes a unary operator and a B denotes a binary operator NB Maths functions highlighted with a in the Example column are not available on the eZtrend V5 Add Operator B Analogue Input 1 added to Analogue Input 4 displayed on Pen 1 P1 A1 A4 EE
363. processing equipment used for heat treat ment ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange Represents characters as numbers for data transfer between computers Barcode A machine readable graphic image using pre defined patterns of linear bars or polygonal elements to encode typically all of ASCII character codes Batch Mode Management of sections of data Batch markers are setup by the user and are used to identify and analyse batches of data Baud rate Number of signalling elements that occur each second bps BOOTP Bootstrap Protocol is an Internet Protocol which allows a diskless workstation to discover its own Internet Address the IP address of a BOOTP server on the network and a file to be loaded into memory to boot the machine This enables a workstation to boot without requiring a hard or floppy drive Client connections realtime connections to local or remote servers eg TrendServer software or an OPC client Comms Server This is the communications server which manages the communications status of a recorder via a serial port or Ethernet connection Counters For a User Counter to be used as a Cause a User Counter must already be set up and be count ing something eg a User Counter as an Effect of another Event Counters can be used as an Effect of an Event to count an occurence or to reset different types of counters Database s A collection of information organised in such a way that a
364. puter Management b Select Local Users and Groups c Go to Groups And check for TMSApplicationAccessGroup 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 15 16 File Action View Help e 26 el uA Honeywell EN Computer Management Local 4 fi System Tools b Task Scheduler gt Gl Event Viewer gt G Shared Folders 4 Local Users and Groups E Users C Groups b Performance aay Device Manager 4 Storage f Disk Management gt Hy Services and Applications m MED Name J Administrators Z Backup Operators Cryptographic Operators amp Distributed COM Users Event Log Readers F Guests Z IS_IUSRS Network Configuration Operators Performance Log Users Performance Monitor Users Power Users Remote Desktop Users Replicator Users ConfigMgr Remote Control Users Debugger Users HelpLibraryUpdaters Z IS_WPG amp SQLServer2005MSSQLServerADHelperUserSIE1FLT583 LV Z sQLServer2005MSSQLUserSIELFLTS83LVQ1SMSSQLSERV amp SQLServer2005SQLBrowserUserSIELFLT583LVQ1 F SQLServerMSSQLServerADHelperUserSIE1FLT583LVQL Z sQLServerMSSQLUserSIELFLT583LVQ1SSQLEXPRESS J eveniet FLT583LVQ1SSQLEXPRESS TMSApplicationAccessGroup amp TMSServiceAccessGroup feu OLA Sh cS d Right click on TMSApplicationAccessGroup Description Backup Operators can over Members are authorized to Members are allowed to lau Members of
365. quired Select Aggregate from Aggregate box Click the Set Selected Item to add a pen with Aggregate The pen name and Aggregate will display in the list control in Aggregate Click the Read Processed button NOTE Support is provided for below aggregates only e AVERAGE The average aggregate adds up the values of all good raw data in a given interval and divides the sum by the number of good values e MAXIMUM The Maximum aggregate retrieves the maximum good raw value within the interval and returns timestamp which will always be the start of the interval for every interval e MINIMUM The Minimum aggregate retrieves the minimum good raw value within the interval and returns timestamp which will always be the start of the interval for every interval e eINTERPOLATIVE The Interpolative retrieves the data which is derived from the data in the database but for which there is no stored value This may be linearly derived from two stored data points on either side of the requested timestamp or it may be extrapolated from the data in the archive FIGURE 10 21 Selecting Aggregate and respective pen MatrikonOPC HDA Explorer _ an oj x Hci TrendView Historien r Start Time End Time r Resample Interval S i Localhost iaz 171372011 z ll 10 ME Hei Trendview Historian 24307 PM 30000PM Seconds fo ms fo ms m Aggregates Item ttFTPpMuttitrend SX6tF 7 HFT PiMultitrend FT PiMultitrend
366. r Users ConfigMgr Remote Control Users Debugger Users Fs HelpLibraryUpdaters Z IS WPG Z SQLServer2005MSSQLServerADHelperUserSIELFLT583LV SQLServer2005MSSQLUserSIE1 FLT583LVQ1SMSSQLSERV amp SQLServer2005SQLBrowserUserSIELFLT583LVQ1 amp SQLServerMSSQLServerADHelperUserSIE1 FLTS83LVQ1 Z SQLServerMSSQLUserSIELFLT583LVQ1SSQLEXPRESS J SOLSen ObirpemtblcacSIFI FLT583LVQ1SSQLEXPRESS TMSApplicationAccessGroup TMSServiceAccessGroup Backup Operators can over Members are authorized to Members are allowed to lau Members of this group can Guests have the same acces Built in group used by Inter Members in this group can Members of this group may Members of this group can Power Users are included fc Members in this group are Supports file replication in z Users are prevented from m Members in this group can Debugger Users are non adi IS Worker Process Group Members in the group have Members in the group have Members in the group have Members in the group have Members in the group have Members in the group have Visual Studio developers cai 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell d Right click on TMSApplicationAccessGroup e Select Properties A list of users will be populated who are authorized to access TrendManager Suite application f Add any user you want to give authorize to access TrendManager Suite application In below diagram Recorder Operator155 has b
367. r F f 5 x File Server Function View Help Hci TrendView Historian gt lam wll wg Bo fev 6 Localhost s Hci TrendVview Historian tInitial DatabasetFPC GY TS 1SOT_P FTP Impo Initial DatabasetFPC GY TS 1S0T_P FTP Impo Read Processed Read Attribute Read At Time Insert Replace Insert Replace Delete Raw Delete At Time Read Raw Data from selected HDA Items 248 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell 13 Set the Start Time End Time and Maximum Number of Values needed to be retrieved If Get Bound option is checked the data between Start Time and End time will be retrieved including start and end time boundaries If not it will just retrieve the data excluding start and end time bound aries Max Num Value option is the maximum number of Historical data points that can be obtained from server Clicking on Read Raw option will retrieve the historical data for the specified time FIGURE 10 14 ReadRaw Data File Serve ry nction View Help Hei TrendView Historian eee IB lee Sel else oe E Localhost s Hci TrendView Historian ST x m Max Num Values IV Get Bounds Initial Database FPC GV TS 1501 ime sock IM Lad 4Initial Database FPC GY TS 1501 ot ED Note If you specify 0 as Max Num Values then the maximum number of historical data specified will returned If the time span contains lesser values then the maximum number of historical data specified then al
368. r 2014 UK Honeywell Calculates the value of the Exp Expotential exponentional P1 EXP 2 P1 7 389056 FL Floor Rounds down to the nearest whole Pi FL x number CE Ceiling Rounds up to the nearest whole number P1 CE x Cold Junction P1 displays the value of the CJC CJC Compensator x is the board number from 1 to 4 P1 CJ cix Where x is the Alarm number CA Alarm counter at P1 will return the alarm count value P1 CAx CD Digital counter Where X is the Digital input number P1 Py CD will return the Digital count value X Where x is the Event number CE EVent COUNtEN P1 will return the Event count value P1 CEx CU User counter Where x is the User counter number P1 will return the User count value P1 CUx The value of P1 equals the inverse SIN ASIN Inverse of SIN of A1 A1 is in radians Pj ASINIA1 2pi radians in every 360 C The value of P1 equals the inverse COS ACOS Inverse of COS of Al A1 isin radians P1 ACOSJA1 2pi radians in every 3607C The value of P1 equals the inverse TAN ATAN Inverse of TAN of Al A1 is in radians Pj ATAN A1 2pi radians in every 3607C The value of P1 equals the hyperbolic SINH Hyperbolic SIN of x SIN of A1 A1 is in radians P1 SINH A1 2pi radians in every 360 C The value of P1 equals the hyperbolic COSH Hyperbolic COS of x COS of A1 A1 is in radians P1 COSH A1 2pi ra
369. r 2014 UK 69 Honeywell e Pulse Duration Output only Available when Single Pulse is selected Specify the pulse length in seconds from 0 1 100ms to 6480 108 minutes in 0 1 second increments Select and enter the pulse length e Fail Safe Output only Tick to enable Each relay channel can be independently selected with the fail safe option This will invert the state of the relay output With Fail Safe Off normally open NO relays have open contacts when the power is off and open contacts when there is no active alarm The contacts will close when an associated alarm goes active With Fail Safe On normally open relays have closed contacts when the recorder is powered on and there are no open active alarms and the contacts open with an alarm active or when the power is removed Table 6 2 Fail Safe Relay positions Trendview recorder Relay Positions no alarms active NO NC Normal Relay Output Power On Open Closed states Power Off Open Closed NO NC Failsafe Relay Output Power On Closed Open Prales Power Off Open Closed e Label Select and enter an identification label Select and enter a label Up to 16 charac ters e Active Label Input and Output only This is the label that is shown when an alarm becomes active Select and enter a label Not available for Pulse Input Up to 12 charac ters e Inactive Label Input and Output only This is the label that is shown
370. r Pro only TMSServiceAccessGroup is required for Communi cations Service and processes runs under it Do not delete this user group and also do not modify delete the user in the user group 1 The user account provided during installation should be part of TMSApplicationAccessGroup for TrendManager Pro and will be part of TMSServiceAccessGroup in case of TrendServer Pro 2 Any user who wants to access TrendManager Suite application or permissions to enable the communication across computers should be added to the TMSApplicationAccessGroup Steps to check the group and add user to TMSApplicationAccessGroup a Please go to Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Computer Management b Select Local Users and Groups c Go to Groups And check for TMSApplicationAccessGroup romm O a File Action View Help e 26b HB Computer Management Local Name Description i System Tools amp Administrators Task Scheduler d Event Viewer fa Shared Folders a Local Users and Groups Users C Groups Performance ey Device Manager a Storage f Disk Management E Services and Applications 4 w amp Backup Operators Cryptographic Operators Distributed COM Users amp Event Log Readers Guests Z IS_IUSRS Network Configuration Operators Z Performance Log Users Z Performance Monitor Users Power Users Remote Desktop Users Replicato
371. r would be a measure of flow rate ie In litres per second and the total amount that has flowed over a specified time period Multiple totalisations are possible with the use of extra pens firmware Credit option Totalisation values are 10 digits plus exponent Select a pen from the list e Enabled Tick to activate or de activate totalising for this pen e Type Select this for a list of Types of totalising Normal or Sterilisation Normal totaliser function is usually associated with flow monitoring applications See Sterilisation varia tions on page 83 Sterilisation is where items are subjected to heat over a period of time Each pen can be totalised according to the Fo or Po sterilisation function at 250 F 121 11 C The Stand ard Reference Temperature and Thermal Resistance Z Value are adjustable All temper ature limits are adjustable Start temp Reference temp and Z factor are all user defined allowing support for many different types of sterilisation applications See Sterilisation on page 84 e Tag Select and enter an identifier for the pen Up to 17 characters e Add to Msgs Toggles On and Off Select this to add a totaliser to the messages screen e Units Normal Totaliser only This is the Units of Measurement for the totaliser Select units from the drop down menu or click in the Units window and type in text Click on Add Units to add your units to the list up to 12 characters 82 43 TV 25 11 GL
372. re trigger event has not been exported then the post trigger timer will be reset and will start again after all pre trigger alarm have cleared Pre trigger information is only secure when it has been saved into the internal flash memory or exported If the power fails before the Pre Trigger alarm is activated data will be lost and the recorder will restart Export The pre trigger files are exported from the internal flash memory via the scheduled or manual export to the externally selected device OR when an FTP download occurs The pre trigger data is appended to the Pen data files during export It is recommended to set up a scheduled export as the pre trigger files will only be exported once and to the first device on which an export occurs following a pre trigger event occurring If power fails when the pre trigger information is waiting to be exported or is being exported then the system will restart into the export state allowing the files to be exported Restart Once the files for a pre trigger have been exported and all alarms on pre trigger enabled pens have cleared the pre trigger buffers are reset and the existing pre trigger information has been exported then the system returns to the acquiring state If a configuration change is performed then the pre trigger system will be restarted the user will be warned before committing that they will restart the pre trigger buffering if an export is pending they will also be asked to
373. re various clients like Matrikon Wonder ware OSI PI that are available that can be used for accessing historical data from the Trend View OPC Historian Server NOTE When using an OPC Historian Client to connect to the TrendServer OPC Historian Server Version 100 1 0 or higher you will need to add the OPC Historian client user to the TMSApplicationAccessGroup if this has not already been done Refer to Chapter 3 Installation for more details You can search for a remote machine where the TrendView OPC Historian server is present from the Client Once the server machine is found by the client application the OPC Client application may Connect to the TrendView OPC Historian server In the most user friendly client applications the data items for the server may be browsed by the cli ent for Tag selection into named data groups In other less user friendly OPC Client appli cations the data items for a group are entered as tags via defined text strings The tags defined then become OPC Tags in the application s database The recorder s OPC server provides access to each of the defined active Pens P1 to P96 Namespace for Trend View Historian is given below FIGURE 10 1 OPC Client application Figure 10 2 shows how an OPC client may be interfaced to the TrendView Historian Server This example uses an OPC HDA demo client from Matrikon which is one of a num ber of OPC developers for the industrial and process markets Th
374. recorder Alarm Digital IO Card Setup If fitted select the type of Alarm Digital IO cards that will match the recorder s set up Select the cor rect card description for each slot and the channel numbers if there is no card fitted select None 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 43 TV 25 11 Recommended Card Positions Table 6 1 Card Slot positions Honeywell Multitrend Slot position Card type Channel numbers Slot A 8 Analogue In 1 to 8 Pulse Input 1 to 4 Slot B 8 Analogue In 9to 16 Pulse Input 9to 12 Slot C 8 Analogue In 17 to 24 Pulse Input 17 to 20 Slot D 8 Analogue In 25 to 32 Pulse Input 25 to 28 Slot E 8 Analogue In 33 to 40 Pulse Input 33 to 36 4 Analogue Out 33 to 36 Slot F 8 Analogue In 41 to 48 Pulse Input 41 to 44 4 Analogue Out 41 to 44 Slot G 4 Relay Output 1to4 8 Relay 2 Digital In 1to8 8 Digital Input Output 1 to 8 16 Digital Input Output 1 to 16 Slot H 4 Relay Output 17 to 20 8 Relay 2 Digital In 17 to 24 8 Digital Input Output 17 to 24 16 Digital Input Output 17 to 32 Slot 4 Relay Output 33 to 36 8 Relay 2 Digital In 33 to 40 8 Digital Input Output 33 to 40 16 Digital Input Output 33 to 48 Minitrend Slot position Card type Channel numbers Slot A 8 Analogue In 1 to 8 Pulse Inputs 1 to 4 Slot B 8 Analogue In 9to 16 Pulse Inputs 9to 12 4 Analogue Out 9to 12 Slot G 4 Relay Output 1to4 8 Relay 2 Digital In 1 to 8 8 Digital
375. recorders Not available on the eZtrend V5 For RS232 configuration select either Front or Rear RS232 Port connections Choose the type of Pro tocol required to transmit the data between computers or peripherals either ASCII or None For more information See Glossary on page 259 Select the Baud Rate which is the speed at which the data will be transferred default is 1200bits sec Enter how many Data bits per character 5 6 7 or 8 Set the Parity to None Odd or Even The Stop bit signifies the end of the character enter 1 or 2 Serial port RS485 Not available on the eZtrend V5 Select the RS485 port and what type of Protocol The Baud rate is the speed at which the data is trans ferred default is 38400bits sec Click in any area on the screen and press F1 on the keyboard to display the related help files 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 127 128 Honeywell Ethernet Port The Ethernet settings on this tab are only available if the unit has been configured for an Ethernet card Enter the Ethernet information on the lower area of the comms tab Refer to Appendix E Ethernet amp E mail on page 295 for more information example shown is fora Minitrend V5 configuration FIGURE 6 9 General Setups Pon Surmsiy Correrurrcaiicne Seni Pon Pectoral Serial port setup for maa z re a RS232 front Baud Rate fis Data Bes RS232 rear fio Je J eo RS485 Eternel IPAddes ee ewe
376. refore access data from any OPC server device making individual drivers for each piece of equipment obsolete OPC enabled software include spread sheets databases virtual instruments and SCADA supervisory control and data acquisition interfaces These applications are known as OPC client software Each OPC server can simultaneously provide data for any number of OPC clients Likewise multiple clients can at the same moment access any server a robust method of communica tion With OPC measurement and control systems can share information and co operate with other installations across factories offices laboratories etc The same data is therefore read ily available to engineering maintenance management in fact to anyone that requires up to the minute data on which to base their decisions OPC allows plug and play All OPC devices will connect together and immediately work with the OPC client software This has the potential to massively reduce installation and system configuration time It also means that you can add devices without shutting down existing sys tems 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell OPC offers the following Combine different devices from different manufacturers in one system e Reduce installation time Add devices without stopping existing software and systems e Quickly replace a device from one vendor with one from another e Share information around networks e Device drivers rendered
377. rent time Place the cursor in the Date time bar running along the bottom of the graph area use the right and left mouse buttons to zoom in and out on the data Ensure the time is synchronised between the recorder and PC The time displayed on the graph is the time set on the recorder where ever in the world it may be See Real time graphing across Time Zones on page 232 e Right click in the graph area to produce the Digital Values cursor hold the right mouse button down to drag the cursor to any point in the graph area Batch Events in Realtime only available for Honeywell V5 recorders Adding Batch Events or User Text events to Realtime data can only be done in the historic data window Pause button The Pause button stops the automatic scrolling the data will continue to arrive in realtime but the current time will stop on the right side of the screen This is to help the user review the realtime data that has passed off the graph to the left The Hori zontal scroll bar at the bottom of the screen can be used to scroll back and survey the previous data To zoom in on a specific area of data left click the mouse button hold and drag over the selected area in the Time date zone at the bottom of the graph area When the pause button is deactivated the auto scrolling will resume and the current time will be displayed at the furthest point on the right side of the screen Only time is frozen no data is lost this includes event dat
378. restriction or attempt to derive the Source Code of Software provided to Licensee in Object Code or create deriva tive works of the Licensed Software or let any third party do any of the foregoing iii repro duce the Licensed Software other than as specified above iv sublicense rent lease loan timeshare sell distribute disclose publish assign or transfer any rights grant a security interest in transfer possession of the Licensed Software or electronically transfer the Licensed Software from one computer to another over a network other than Licensee s inter nal network as permitted under this Agreement or v alter or remove any of Honeywell or its licensors copyright or proprietary rights notices or legends appearing on or in the Licensed Software Licensee shall reproduce such notices on any copies of the Licensed Software Licensee is permitted to make Licensee is responsible for informing all Authorized Users of the restrictions set forth in this Agreement with respect to use of the Licensed Soft ware 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell 3 2 Keys and Access Honeywell agrees to provide to Licensee any Software keys necessary to permit Licensee to gain access to the Licensed Software contained on the media shipped to Licensee Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Agreement Licensee hereby acknowledges that Licensee shall have no right or license to any Unli censed Software that any Unlicense
379. ri lt cassascasesssstsavesstaxeeniaccasesssassanesuaseansdionsedsobseasicecdeonee Soasvssesnssdeosesseeees Importing and Exporting of Set upS ssssssesessessssessccssssscscsscessesssssssessssssssesessesees 147 Hardware Related Set upS ssssssscssesessssscsesscesssssessssssssssssessssssssssssssesssssesseseesesoes 147 Recorder configuration complete ssssscssssesscssssssscsessssssscscsssecssesssesssssssssssseseesesseses 147 Printing Setups sssaiscacosessseveseassasscesssssevsceassonssassess sosavoanssdesseoasussoasssassososesenss 147 Chapter 7 TrendManager Suite 149 RECOPdELS cesceussesieccevasocsassineseossasdennssaseuae cossond E EEE 149 AAG GVOCOTAE gt rescssatscedizensssseasssivs osebvdchestguesessesasesetents D ToS SE Eo SREI EN 149 Delete a recorder eet ane eek A ARARE RRE R 149 COPY arecorder orninn ninnan E EE E E R E T E E 150 Editarecorder EEEE E E SREE EAN TATS 150 Import data from reCOrder sisssiirisssriciiestassiirisesi nseri osersiiiosi essre 150 Browsed tecorder Aasers i R ERE TAR A saa R A R EE 150 Upload Dutton sscscisnss sec eibevich covsevensibedevsestastssdents ded tusevcet cavsdesecadscecseedhelenatyesiceeesess 150 RECOTAER CIGSN list civscvstecescescesceaccseiacsssinasscsasdasveevancedsensedseusssheitessessesseunesosseeseeste 150 Databases Add a Databaser uien aie stses E eoetecusas vas tee scons staat s cokues eps scespostengtveesseeceses Change the current Database sssisssessssercsersscrcsscseces
380. ritten consent which shall not be unreasonably withheld shall be void Honeywell may assign this Agreement and its rights and obligations hereunder in its sole discretion Any attempt to assign or delegate in viola tion of this clause will be void 12 11 Compliance with Laws Software and technical information delivered under this Agreement is subject to U S export control laws and may be subject to export or import reg ulations in other countries Licensee agrees to strictly comply with all such laws and regula tions Licensee will obtain import export re export approvals and licenses required for Software services and technical data delivered and will retain documentation to support compliance with those laws and regulations Honeywell will not be liable to Licensee for any failure to provide Software services transfers or technical data as a result of government actions that impact Honeywell s ability to perform including 1 the failure to provide or the cancellation of export or re export licenses 2 any subsequent interpretation of applicable import transfer or export law or regulation after the date of any order or commitment that has a material adverse effect on Honeywell s performance or 3 delays due to Licensee s failure to follow applicable import export transfer or re export laws and regulations Licen see shall not sell transfer export or re export any Software services or technical data for use in activities that
381. rofiles will be available for selection in Comms Server for setting up realtime data acquisition The Modbus profile names are based on the given name of the recorder it s ID number and the type of the recorder Multitrend or Minitrend When a Modbus profile is updated it will not automatically be used by Comms Server if it is currently connected to the device concerned It is only if that device is disabled then re enabled in Comms Server or if the device properties window also known as edit device dialog is opened for that device and committed with a press of the OK button that Comms Server will begin to use the updated Modbus profile In the case of wanting to connect with Comms Server to a device other than an X Series and GR recorder or an older Honeywell V5 recorder it may be necessary to manually create a Modbus profile which can be done with the Modbus Profile edit tool The Modbus Profile Tool 302 Installation The Modbus Profile Tool is available with TrendServer Pro It will install automatically and can be activated from the same location as TrendServer Pro software The Modbus Profile Tool can be opened by going to Start gt Programs gt Trendview Recorders Modbus Profile Tool The Modbus Profile Editor window will open with empty files ready for a new profile to be created A MODBUS Profile Editor Help ia wo Profile Workspace Profile Details Profile Name Profile name Profile description
382. rted to the external media The reports will be in RTF format for use in MS Word or other compatible word processors Before a report can be run the report menu must be configured here ae int x Enabled Iv Field IO Name Report 1 E D Pens Style Normal 7 Selection Type Pen Group rE Curr Pen Value Induded 7 Averages Hour xl Max Mins Hour Screens Totals Messages Last Hour x Message Lists None Counters Footer Style Two Lines ad Transfer Inc Dig In Do Not Include ad nan Hardware Inc Dig Outs Do Not Indude v Email Recipients june finch honeywell cor In the Reports Menu select the first or next available Report Enabled Set to a tick to enable Name Enter an identifiable name of your report Style Select Batch for running reports on current batches Select Normal to run reports on specific pens all pens or groups A TUS report is for a Temperature Uniformity Survey that can only be used if this option is enabled in the credits menu This type of TUS report is condensed and should not be used as the final report to comply with AMS2750 specifications The full report for a TUS should be generated using the TUS proce dure refer to the User manual Selection Type This will be set to Group if Batch is selected for the Style select which group of pens the report will be run on If the Style is set to Normal the following options will be avail able 43 TV 25
383. rting via FTP Importing Secure Comms I Face oo 157 Installation e 7 Installation of TrendManager Suite 7 Installation or Migration of TrendView Historian 34 Internet Security Settings ss 192 IP Address imsionncsernoauiuuniienoin 92 128 IP Address Troubleshooting cccsscccecceeee 191 L Linearisation X Series c 71 Logging saiccsomniaie Logging Method an Logging Rate sissie Logging Rate esiesrsesriiniieieniimee Logging Styles ca incanemnaimnnnnnae Logging Type X Series s 79 Logging X Series siicotsutsiatieimadiGuurninmusae 79 M Mail Server oeececcsssesssessssessssessssessssessscssssessssessseessses 128 Mark on Chart X Series Event Effet ecer tactile Marker tables Maths and Fail Safe Maths Error Messages ss 285 Maths Expressions Boolean Expressions 0 0 ceeeceeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeens 270 F l Maths 2 octscis oss sescsecteseacsarscveccseaticsesarsaseries wee 280 Full Maths amp Script Processing oseese 271 Maths Variable and Function Tables 272 Mats and Fail Safe oo ccceseeseeeeteteeeeseseees 270 Operator Precedence ou eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 268 Script Function Application Examples 281 Maths Expressions X Series cccccsssesssssessssees 271 Maths for Pens iin cettncdeannnenameuat 130 Maths for Pens X Series ccccccssccccsssssssssssssrsieee 80 Maths Variable and Function Tables 272 Max Mins Reset Event Effect oo
384. s tab Ensure Enable Distributed COM on this computer is checked Default Protocols COM Securty MSDTC Options Default Properties General E Enable COM Intemet Services on this computer Default Distributed COM Communication Properties The Authentication Level specifies security at the packet level Default Authentication Level Connect The impersonation level specifies whether applications can determine who is calling them and whether the application can do operations using the client s identity Default Impersonation Level Identify M Security for reference tracking can be provided f authentication is used and that the default impersonation level is not anonymous E Provide additional security for reference tracking Leam more about setting these properties cores Issue 29 December 2014 UK 31 32 Honeywell b Add TrendServer Pro client user or OPC client user to TMSApplicationAccess Group who wants to access TrendServer Pro or TrendViewHistorian server machine Refer to for more details c Try restarting both client and server a restart should not be necessary if only the fire wall option has changed but a restart is needed to ensure that any DCOM configuration changes have been applied d Temporarily switch off any firewall If a firewall is in use it must be restored after test ing Switching the firewall off will eliminate it is as a possi
385. s The recorder refers to a built in calendar and clock and will schedule the event to occur at mid night on the last day of each month 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Date Time Only available when Once is selected as a Sub Type Select the time and date for a one off occurrence e Period Only available when Interval is selected as a Sub Type Set the time interval for how often this event should occur eg every hour would be 1h 00m 00s e Alignment Only available when Interval is selected as a Sub Type Select and enter a value from the list to align the scheduled event at specific intervals For certain applications it maybe desirable for a relatively fast schedule interval event for example every 10 minutes to be aligned with a particular time For example on the hour When the alignment function is not used the schedule interval starts immediately on com mitting the configuration When the alignment function is used the schedule interval starts when the first interval event coincides with a subsequent interval that lines up with the desired alignment ie Top of the hour Figure 6 3 shows if a 10 minutes schedule is required to align with a whole hour and the configuration is committed at 17 minutes past the recorder will wait until 20 past before start ing the schedule interval As starting at 20 past with 10 minute increments will ensure align ment with a whole hour Figure 6 3 Interval alignment
386. s few as two or three users for example in a home network or many as thousands of users Local Database Referred to in this manual this means a database held on your own PC MODBUS Modbus Cis an industry standard protocol used in many SCADA packages for network control The recorders can be inserted into existing networks using Modbus or linked directly to a controller over an RS485 link Modbus TCP IP is available through the Ethernet interface MODBUS X Modbus X differs from the standard Modbus only by the 4 byte floating point order being reversed for application compatibility Mbps Million bits per second Transmission speed between computers and or other devices Network Two or more computers connected together by cable so that they can exchange information and resources A network may be made up of computers printers scanners or other devices Network drive A drive that resides somewhere in the network rather than on your own computer Network interface card NIC An adaptor card that lets the computer attach to a network cable Network server A computer that stores and manages programmes data and peripherals such as output devices for other computers and workstations connected through the network Also called a file server OPC client OLE Process Control A software application that can be used to interface realtime data via the comms server Packets Data is sent over a network in manageable chun
387. s call all 1000 values will be read at the same time The user has to wait till the client gets these values from server In other words client will be locked up while getting these values from the server ReadProcessed in Synchronous and Asynchronous this will return aggregates min max average interpolated to the OPC client AdviseProcessed in Asynchronous and will return aggregates min max average interpo lated to the OPC client Playback interface is same as Asynchronous AdviseRaw only difference is that it will only give historical data and not the latest value TrendView Historian Installation References for HDA Client and Supported Versions 1 Matrikon OPC HDA Explorer V1 1 2 Honeywell Experion PKS Honeywell OPC Validator V1 1 0000 3 Pl OPC HDA Client V 1 20 Reference Manuals OSlsotft OPC Data Access amp Historical Data Access Server for the PI System Vendor The OPC standards are freely available from the OPC Foundation at http www opcfoundation org Matrikon OPC HDA Explorer HDA Explorer is a free stand alone tool for verifying historical data through HDA testing HDA OPC Servers and troubleshooting connectivity to HDA OPC Servers www matrikonopc com 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell OPC Client Access to TrendView OPC Historian Server A Windows based Client application must be used to view and access historical data from TrendManager Suite software There a
388. s if there is a PC failure and the data is not backed up The PC s performance is dependant on the size of the database and the PC characteristics e g Performance Memory Hard drive space along with how many recorders are connected to it An initial recommendation would be that if your process involves archiving to removable media DVD for example then the Database should be kept to 4GB to ensure that it fits onto a DVD for long term storage This would provide good PC performance make archiving of the data easier and limit the risk of data loss between archives As with any recommendation you need evaluate this relative to your needs this is your data and it is important that a suitable process is put in place to ensure that it remains protected and secure while achieving ade quate process performance Maintenance It is strongly recommended that data on TrendServer Pro machine is backed up on a separate disk or media at regular intervals to avoid data loss due to PC crash or hard disk failures The data here refers to both data base files and other configuration information stored on disk Depending on the OS the following folders needs to be backed up Windows 7 Windows 8 Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2012 1 Data base backup using DB backup tool 2 TMP and CommsServ folders at C ProgramData Note After the prolonged usage if TrendServer Pro machine becomes slow the machine should be restarted As a bes
389. s y RS485 is available as an option on the eZtrend QXe not featured on the X Series and GR Series recorders Secure Communication Interface is supported by Windows 7 or higher 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Chapter 2 Introduction to the TrendManager Software Suite Introduction The TrendManager Suite software is a Windows based PC package which accompanies the Honeywell TrendView recorders as a data ne acquisition and configuration tool The mouse and keyboard operations are Windows orientated and this manual is written under the assumption that the user is familiar with Windows TrendManager Suite is designed and written for Windows 7 32 and 64 bit Profes sional Enterprise and Ultimate Edition Windows 8 32 and 64 bit Professional Enter prise and Ultimate Edition Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2012 Note Secure Communication Interface is supported by Windows 7 or higher Any technical terms peculiar to the Honeywell range of recorders should be referred to in the Glossary on page 259 Software Options TrendManager Suite software is available listed below The attributes of each level are listed in Features on page 1 TrendViewer This software is available free of charge and allows the user to view graph and print data from a Floppy disk or PCMCIA memory card interface on the V5 recorders and from Compact Flash and USB key on the X
390. sed in the event markers When the recorder sends an e mail message that includes a message body the recorder name recorder number and the time date will be appended to the end of the message body text This is to allow easy identification of when the message was send and by which recorder Any e mail message is sent as an action within the recorder events system so anything that can be configured to act as an event cause may be configured to send an e mail message Any e mail message may be sent to up to 8 of the recipients If the e mail server supports named groups of e mail addresses an e mail message may be sent to a combination of e mail addresses and e mail group Mail Server _y Ethernet Recorder g LAN Local Area Network 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Appendix F Function Codes and Memory Maps X amp GR Series Modbus Memory Map Supplement Refer to document Modbus Serial Communications User manual 51 52 25 66Q April 2007 Start End See Address Address Description Appendix Hex Hex 51 52 25 66Q 1800 185F Analogue Input Value 48 inputs max A 5 1880 18BF Communications Inputs 32 comms values max A 6 2400 24BF Extended Comms Inputs 96 comms values max A 6 18C0 197F Pen Values 96 pens max A 7 1B00 1B7F Totalisers 64 totalisers max A 9 Communications Inputs can be set by using Modbus function code 16
391. sed as a Cause to trigger an Event Effect The User Counter information must be setup be fore it can be used as a part of the event system See Counters on page 105 For a User Counter to be used as a Cause a User Counter must already be set up and be counting something eg a User Counter as an Effect of another Event An example of this could be First setup your counter in the Counters menu Enable it Name it enter what number it will Start At and enter at what number it will Rollover and start again Event 1 has been set up with Cause 1 as a Scheduled interval every 30 seconds The Effect is that User Counter 1 is set to increment by 1 When the scheduled interval occurs every 30 seconds Counter 1 will incre ment by 1 A second Event can then be set up using the User Counter Effect in Event 1 as the Cause for Event 2 In this example the Cause will be triggered by User Counter 1 in Event 1 reaching an increment of 50 The Effect of this will be a Mark on Chart In summary what will occur from the two Events is every 30 seconds a scheduled interval will cause a counter to increment by 1 When the increments reach 50 a mark will be placed on the Chart Event Effects Click in Effect and select the Set button and choose the effect of the event from the list provided e Enabled Tick to enable e Type Choose from Mark on Chart Logging Totaliser Digital Outputs Alarm Ack Email Screen Change Print Screen Counters
392. separate comms card fitted with an Ethernet and the FTP option installed Many communication protocols are now available including RS485 Trendbus including web browser Ethernet using FTP RS232 web browser Plus RS485 Modbus and Profibus options on the recorder For a standard barcode reader that provides an ASCII output use the standard Ethernet RS232 RS485 comms card On Minitrend V5 recorder and Multitrend Plus V5 an optional communication card is available featuring RS 485 trendbus in addition to ethernet Another optional commu nication card features RS 485 Modbus and Modbus X communications 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 5 Honeywell 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Chapter 3 Installation Installation 43 TV 25 11 InstallationTrendManager Suite Prerequisites e Close all the Windows applications before starting TrendManager Suite e It is not recommended to load multiple installation programs on the same PC e You must be a member of Administrators group to install uninstall TrendManager Suite NOTE Steps to check the Administrator rights for any user Please go to the Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Computer Management Select the Local Users and Groups Go to Groups Right Click on Administrators group Select Properties List of the users will be populated oa SF o NS Add any user for whom Administrative privileges are required in the below diagr
393. ser Name IE1FLTD2LTLV1 TMSUser Password Confirm Password Note The password must comply with the local security password policy The user name and password should be same on all machines when prompted by the installation lt Back Next Cancel 10 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell a The default user account TMSUser is shown If the TMSUser local user account already exists then provide a password for it if not enter a new password to create the user account b The default user account can also be changed You can provide either an existing or new local user account For new user account you need to enter a new password c When default user account are edited and a new account details are entered a warning message will popup User can press Yes to continue or press No to use the default user account details TELFLTD2LTLVI TMSUser is the default service user account for TMS A installation Do you want to proceed creating a new service account user Recommendation Use default service user account same new service account user on all the TMS installations which need data sharing d The password must comply with the local security password policy otherwise you will see the below message box a Unable to create the user Please ensure user name and password are ss compliant as per local security policies d If you have a domain you can also enter
394. shared or work group printers Shared or work group printers must contain the correct file path see Printer tab on page 62 e Username Enter your network Logon Username e Password Enter you Network Password For a local printer connected directly to the recorder via USB no domain is required Ensure the printer name is set to the default LPT1 see Printer tab on page 62 Domain For network printers enter your network domain No domain is required for Local printers connected directly to the recorder via USB If in doubt contact you IT Administrator for advice on entering Network Admin requirements FTP tab File Transfer Protocol This is a method of transferring data and setups to and from TrendManager Software Suite and the recorder Enabled Tick to enable FTP transfer Allow Upload Tick to allow FTP transfer and Secure Communication Interfacefrom TrendManager Software Suite to the recorder Allow Download Tick to allow FTP transfer and Secure Communication Interface from the recorder to TrendManager Software Suite e Log Messages Tick to add a message to the messages list when an FTP transfer is per formed e Mark Chart Can only be active when Log Messages is enabled Tick to mark the chart when an FTP transfer is performed Refer to the Communications section in the User manual and Importing via FTP or Secure Communications Interface on page 157 for setting up FTP transfer
395. signal must change to trigger a log Band B is a more specific band within Band A to give a more accurate trace Maths If the maths pen option has been purchased the recorder can be configured to carry out simple or com plex calculations Configuring the maths block is easier than it looks Type the formula you require as you would write it The formula s can include analogue inputs digital inputs and relay outputs Up to 16 extra pens are available for the Minitrend V5 recorders Up to 32 extra pens for the Multi trend Plus V5 recorder Up to 6 extra pens for the eZtrend V5 recorder Up to 64 integral soft alarm set points are available for the Minitrend V5 recorder These can be set by the user to announce selected out of limit conditions See Appendix A Maths Expressions for Honeywell V5 recorders on page 263 Only limited maths functions are available on the eZtrend V5 130 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell FIGURE 6 10 a General Scales Logging Maths Totals Alarms Expression P1 SGAT A1 42 m aaa Analogue In Digital In Relay Total vilAl Y x 01 x Analogues pt z Hils y LOfxy Test E Counter alarm P71 Alm1 x SO x Retransmit Afk Ox i i ROUND x SORT x LNE EASE DELAY xy 2 EVAL Lock OVER x y UNDER xy Ely INSIDE x y 2 Tisy QUTSIDE x y 2 P x C2F x ASIN x ACOS x ATAN s CICTx F2C x SINH x COSH x TANH
396. snssiondteatnnse 213 Alarm Damping actin oechcoannian 85 133 Alarm Rate assoc rs sisiintcestieiiatecavscessesas betes hecienes 79 Alarm Relay Card X Series iccccsicccsssssssesee 68 Alarm Digital IO Card Positions X Series 54 Alarm Digital IO X Series s 68 Alarms Setup sssri 132 Alarms X Series cieccecccccecsccsssssssssesssssssesessssssestsssens 84 AMS2750 Furnace Process and TUS 74 AMS2750 Furnace Stability Detection TUS MOLE e e E AE 75 AMS2750 Mode n n 56 AMS2750 Setpoint TUS mode icccscccccscee 75 AMS2750 Timer Event Causes ssns eenean ON 98 AMS2750 TUS Eyent Causes sracnenu aa 98 AMS2750 TUS report sssri 114 Analogue IN x scehaburstnciigauiebenbrcnnicied 134 Analogue In X Series scccccssscssssssssssssssssissssseeseees 65 Linearisation oe eeeeeseeseseeeeeseseeeseeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeesens 71 Analogue Out X Series eecsrccccsccccsseccssisesreecees 68 Analogue Output Setup or Re tranmsit 136 Analogue Scales scscsicictatnnisamdneentin 134 Engineering Scale o on 134 Input Scale s ea aE ESE 134 Pen Scales airar ann ee istics ovens 135 Analogue Scales X Series veces 78 Appendix G Modbus Communications and Modbus Profile Tool cececccccccscccsssveeeee 301 Appendix I Batch Report Tool we 313 Arranging Scales so srnscccssminrsriempiinncarniee 221 Audit Manager sssri 187 Auto Arrange scales ssis 221 Auto DNS TCP IP Se cacisitdiitonsesteuuitoaniod 93 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK
397. software package Click the type of software package you prefer then click Next TrendM anager Pro TrendServer Pro Advanced graphical data analysis package for use on a single PC or for distributed use across the network lt Back Cancel The TrendManager Suite has three different versions to install 1 TrendViewer This software is a free version that is part of the Recorder software 2 TrendManager Pro This can be purchased and has added features 3 TrendServer Pro This can be purchased and has a complete set of features Select the required version and depending on the version chosen the installation steps will be different TrendViewer Migration e Click Next The Start Copying Files window appears for reviewing the settings before it starts copying the files e Click Next Installation will progress during this process it creates TMSApplication AccessGroup The above groups can be checked only after completion of installation and restart of machine for more details please refer to TrendManager Suite User Groups after Migration on page 28 e The installation complete window appears with a message to restart the machine or not It is preferred to restart the machine before using the application e Click Finish TrendManager Pro and TrendServer Pro Migration e Click Next Migration Prerequisite window appears to follow the prerequisite to take the backup of the folders 43 TV 25 11 GLO I
398. sscsesssssssssscsssssessssssssseseesseseses Add an Archive Database sicscsssccsscsrrsssecersssscssrcssnccsecsnscesscencesssssecessescoeesaesseeeaees SOTVErGCCESS TADIE A uain a n E EE R ARO baad ants 12I a E t A AO EAE AE EEEO E E OTE E E Graph Folders hinen ia R E EEEE EREA ES Add GfOlde scievis Sid eteeies covsdccesissdecvenseatensiethlevcsveeuceteccicdsesdsSstabegdnatessbesbsceeestendebees Move a graph between folders sissscsersssrcssssssssssssesssssssesesssssssssscssssssessssssseesesseees Delete folder sicscsoaisizscececatsenccves cee vibscetiectes vudusbodccudetesdcbviandd cochas nid ceseestyesvbeeducs Copyafolder oeann E R o aae E E a eiie Rename folder sereni iiei E EE ATA TIMPOrtin lt csscisavsssccesesse seacennnssssbsusesunsssessesosenes E n a iii iis Importing Data from other Honeywell devices ssssssssssssresssssssssscscsessscsssssessssssees Importing via FTP or Secure Communications Interface 3 From Network Setup lt zevecsccvccercovecsinesescadsersicvacvorsed sivas esessveseteecenssessestevessndevavedserses Batch Set UP sssiatssscarerrsancsrsassssesseanedesanesucdsodecd sassebsaes dee se seens stesusesesieasesedesesteetevses Sched le Setup o anie scccdscsenssensousebsceseyees artce E E EA E T Realtime Communications Communications Server Communications Realtime Settings susssssecrcrscrscsresreesscssessercessersessessesscssessseeces Realtime Data Buffer Realtime Comms logging ssssssrsecssessessss
399. sssseiessssnseensees 160 Screen Change Event Effect Screen Saver Dim Saver sennissiiseniiesssis Screen Setup a NY 61 1 Ke Script Function Application Examples 281 Script Timers Event Effect oo cccccesesseceseeseeecseseseseeseseseees 104 Scripts USING COMMENTING sss 285 Searching in Help scccsrcseedssiissarnisstiiaaentaeacncn 52 Security Configuration Utility cccccccccccseee 36 Send Recorder Events Chart Controls o cccccccccesesssceseseseeseseseseeeeseseseees Server Add a Remote Server oo ceccccececcsesseseseetseeeeeseseees Change the Current Server is Server Button caccescccsecssesssessssssssecsesssecssesssessveen Server Name Email s Server Name SNTP sss Setup Chart Speed sisisisicitaciaica iii menciats 108 Counters ee Email oie cccccccccscsscsscsscsecssssecsscsessesssssesssseees Printing Recording sossirorsonneiro REPOTts ssesssrssesissrsssesessesosassrssreses Run a Report eessssseseeree SOTEER aiian Storage Alarm nesese Transfer Setup oo nist Setup Transfer ssis Setup Window X Series cecscccccssssssssssssssssssseeseees 327 Setup Importing ss Slave ID cscs sorsrmsemirtisieen SNTP Comms X Series Software Access Table Software License Software Options Square Root Extraction MATT UP orreri eani Start up COMMS Server vesveccsesccsvsscsvssssvessressesees 44 Storage Alarm s 109 System Event Causes System Button System Requirements oecssecsccssees
400. ssue 29 December 2014 UK 21 Honeywell e Click Next The below User Account Information Window appears and then follow the on screen instructions User Account Information Enter the Windows User Account details to use TMS Application TMS will use this windows user account to enable the communications across machines In case you want to use a Domain user account please enter as Domain name User name User Account Information Domain Name User Name IETFLTD2LTLV1I TMSUser Password Confirm Password Note The password must comply with the local security password policy The user name and password should be same on all machines when prompted by the installation a The default user account TMSUser is shown If the TMSUser local user account already exists then provide a password for it if not enter a new password to create the user account b The default user account can also be changed You can provide either an existing or new local user account For new user account you need to enter a new password It s recom mended to have the default user account on all the TSP s which are being installed on the site plant for data sharing c When the default user account is edited and a new account details are entered a warn ing message will popup User can press Yes to continue or press No to use the default user account details TELFLTD2LTLVI TMSUser is the default service user account for TMS
401. st and press OK and details of that event will be displayed on the graph Realtime and Logged data via Modbus will not display Events on the X Series recorders Single event icons displayed in the events bar represent different events iD Recorder with a green screen A normal system message m Recorder with an orange screen A system warning p Recorder with a red screen A system problem A Bell An alarm yellow if the alarm is active A Flag A marker f Person User generated text Batch Event icons Light bulb Digital input or relay illuminated when active Red square End of batch Le Green arrow Start of batch i Two red vertical line Pause batch 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 223 224 Honeywell OL Green line and an arrow Resume batch 2 Red cross Abort batch A Blue pin Comment or other batch events eg User ID Lot number Event Interaction Be careful when adding Batch events Starting a second batch before the first batch has ended will cause the first batch to end where the second batch starts However in the latest version of software June 07 onwards concurrent batches are possible so batches can overlap In this example batch 002 has been started before batch 001 has ended this will make batch 001 end where batch 002 starts and batch 002 will end at the next available End command which is the marker to end batch 001 Start 001 Start 002 En
402. stem eve Starte S Task Scheduler Enables a user to con Starte S TCP IP NetBIOS Helper Provides supportfor Starte Gh Themes Provides user experie Starte TMS Communications S Jaalasliialia l le 4 User Profile Service This service is respon Starte Sh VMware Tools Service Provides supportfor Starte Sh Windows Audio Manages audio for Starte G Windows Audio Endpoint Bui Manages audio devic Starte Si Windows Event Log This service manages Starte Si Windows Firewall Windows Firewall hel Starte Sh Windows Management Instru Provides a common i Starte S Workstation Creates and maintain Starte S Security Center The WSCSVC Windo Starte GA Software Protection Enables the downloa Starte S Windows Defender Protection against sp Starte Provides content ind Starte Gh Windows Search a Window ndate he detectin 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell About Security Configuration Utility 1 The TrendManager Suite Security Configuration Utility TMSSecurityCfg exe is a standalone application intended to reset an existing account in case the password has been changed or another account needs to be set for TrendManager Suite Application or Trend View Historian The Security Configuration Utility is shown below c C Program Files TrendManager Suite TMSSecurityCfg exe O x IMS Securtiy Configuration Utility is meant for resetting User account to use
403. successive register retrieved starting from 1 The Modbus master can be used in conjunction with the Modbus slave functionality of the recorder or OPC to enable the recorder to act as a communications bridge Data from the slaves connected to a Modbus master is made available as a map on the slave side of the Modbus master this allows another master to get access directly to another master s slaves data without the master having to re process that information Or a Modbus master can process the data and expose it to the network as its own pens in Modbus or OPC Modbus master must be enabled as a firmware option and requires Full Maths or Scripting to assign values to a pen see See Credits tab on page 62 Refer to Modbus communication application notes on your CD or on our website 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 87 88 Honeywell Other Master Master RS485 to TCP IP Slave network TCP IP ee Slave Refer to the Modbus Master Installation Instructions that are on the CD to help set up various Honeywell devices to talk to the recorder 43 TV 33 89 43 TV 33 102 Master e Enabled Toggle On to make this recorder a Master device e Poll Rate Enter a time period in seconds of how often there is a request for data e Legacy Ethernet Tick this to connect to Honeywell V5 recorders Slave 1 32 Up to 32 slaves can be setup per master device Setup each Slave in turn starting with number 1 e Enabled To
404. system addresses such as the 32 bit addresses used in the current version of IP The high level IP based networking software in a device is aware of its own 32 bit IP address and can read the 48 bit Ethernet address of its own network interface but it doesn t know the Ethernet addresses of the other devices on the network To discover the Ethernet addresses of other IP based devices on the network another high level protocol is used For TCP IP this is done using a protocol called Address Resolution Protocol ARP Example Device X has an IP address of 195 23 37 1 and sends data over the Ethernet channel to another IP based device Device Y with IP address 195 23 37 2 Device X sends the packets of information containing an ARP request The ARP request is asking the device with the IP address of 195 23 37 2 to identify the address of the Ethernet Inter face Only Device Y with the IP address of 195 23 37 2 will respond sending a packet with the Ethernet address of device Y back to device X Now device X and Y have each oth ers Ethernet addresses to which data can be sent 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 295 E mail 296 Honeywell General operation of the e mail system The recorder sends messages for distribution by an e mail server The e mail server is located by its IP address as set up in the communications set up options When the recorder sends an e mail message it locates the e mail server and uses SMTP Simp
405. t button in Remote Server Dialog the dialog will close and HCi TrendView Historian will show under remote computer name FIGURE 10 7 OPC TrendView Historian server added under Remote system n MatrikonOPC HDA Explorer 215 x Ele Server Function View Help Advosol HDA SampleF W2 Jesel om v IE D 5 Sele J WES7OTCS35285 7 To Add Item right click on HCi Trendview Historian and click Add Items or add by clicking on l Add Items button on screen Insert Item dialog will open FIGURE 10 8 Add Items dialog D MatrikonOPC HDA Explorer 5 xj File Server Function View Help Hci TrendView Historian gt tall mlm E Localhost lt Hci TrendView Historia INSI EPL UR ort 8 e8 8 fesi 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 243 Honeywell 8 Once the Insert Dialog is open use the Browse window to navigae to the required Pen location List of pens will show at lower left corner of dialog FIGURE 10 9 Insert Item Dialog Browse tree to reach required Pen MatrikonOPC HDA Explorer File Server Function View Help 244 well ied Aled oo Hei Tre Item Id item ID r Browse FIP B Initial Database Ely FPC GY TS 150T_P amp FTP mported Data LOCAL TIF Multitrend SX 3M testFtp NOTE Historical data may come from multiple sources like Real time logging FTP or be imported from USB SD card or GR1Co
406. t lt Pen 1 gt gt P1 Z will embed the Zero point of P1 lt lt 0 gt gt P1 S will embed the span point of P1 lt lt 100 gt gt P1 U will embed the Unit text of P1 lt lt deg C gt gt time v will embed the current time lt lt 11 51 23 gt gt date v will embed the current date lt lt 10 11 06 gt gt td v will embed the current time and lt lt 11 51 23 10 11 0 gt gt date name v will embed the current recorder lt lt Furnace1 gt gt name id v will embed the current recorder ID lt lt 21 gt gt serial v will embed the recorder serial 200034 number BATMD1 v will embed the batch mode 1 lt lt Batch 1 0001234 Stopped Running 2 Stopped 3 Paused gt gt BATMD1 t will embed the batch name lt lt Batch 1 0001234 Group 1 gt gt Batch mode is for each group BATMD1 to BATMD6 Used in embedded variables as BATMD1 v will also allow the current batch name to be embedded using BATMD t Table 6 6 more embedded variables Syntax Syntax Syntax An GLBVn HPULn BATMDn HPC1 LPULn BLKVn INTHRS RAn 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 101 Honeywell Table 6 6 more embedded variables Syntax Syntax Syntax CFFREE IOC1 RTCOMPn CJCn LPC1 RTCALn CJCnC Pn Tn CVn PnAnL UC1 Dn PnMINU USB1FREE DIOn PnMAXU USB2FREE EC1 PSTVn UV1 FTPHRS PRC This example shows pen information can be used as a
407. t Start Time 9 26 2014 14 41 56 Reset Generate Graph Generate Report Close 2 Select a golden batch from the list and enter details for the following Upper Tolerance and Lower Tolerance Enter an acceptable upper and lower tolerance values Any pen value outside the tolerance value is recorded as a deviation in the graph and the report NOTE The Upper Tolerance and Lower Tolerance property is disabled for Max Min Golden Batch type e Change Color Select a color to denote the golden reference traces Time Adjustment Settings This option allows you to adjust the time shifts in Golden pen trace and the batch in comparison Time adjustment helps to align the Golden Pen trace start time with the start time of the batch in comparison e None No changes 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 173 Honeywell e e Right Shifts the origin of the Golden Graph to the right and then compares with the Pens For example consider a Golden Batch sample available for 30mins which needs to be compared with last 30mins of 1 hour 30mins data In this case select Right by thr e e Left Shifts the origin of the Golden Graph to the left and then compares with the Pens Days Hrs Enabled only if you want to adjust the time Enter the number of days time the origin of the Golden Graph to be shifted The maximum offset time allowed is equal to either the time duration of the source batch or gol
408. t Time End time Golden 32 pens allsame Fri Sep 26 14 41 56 Fri Sep 26 15 55 35 Single v Column Config Delete Golden Batch Close 2 Double click on a Golden Batch from the list The associated standard graph appears on the screen Column Config Additional details can be viewed by adding appropriate items Delete Golden Batch Deletes a Golden Batch The option does not allow you to delete the Golden batch unless all the open graph windows are closed NOTE If the Golden batch is created manually the Source Batch Name does not contain any informa tion 172 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Compare Batch Data This section describes the steps to compare a batch with one of the avail able golden batches Compare with 3 Golden Batch NOTE The batch in comparison and the Golden batch must have the same log rate and span The steps to generate a comparison graph and a comparison report are detailed below 1 Select a Batch from the Batch View for Initial Database window and click Compare Golden Batches which has the same span and logging rate as that of selected batch are shown in the Golden Batch List window Golden Batch List _ e gt u s i a oo oe oes gt i a _ Batch Name Description Source Batch Start Time End time Golden 32 pens all same Fri Sep 26 14 41 56 Fri Sep 261 Upper Tolerance Eng Unit Report Settings Repor
409. t a i enas ia rsen TE aar T E ena iaia 226 Add User Text Event sorre iE RE A RE RERE RAES 226 Graphing a Batch cd evscatcavicnce disses eusdtcbensteschsdeetcavisteostbecesisUstaegesalecoulstd anii 226 Retrospectively Graphing a Batch siscssssssscsessssscsesessecssssssscssssssssssessesescesssseseees 229 Realtime Graphing s 230 Graphing Realtime Data mersininin annn a a 231 Pause buton sencera na E aR E aiae 232 Realtime graphing across Time Zones sessssssessssscsesscsesssssssesessessesssssessessssssssseseees 232 Graph Pen Data Source Viewer e 233 Graph Data VIEWED rsssscscseassscsvnsnssesvosvovesooasseavesvesasontonsaseseosesvseessotesessocsoess 233 Printing graphs sscersecsseasesasseseosdsessecsovaseersvcsveserdensecsaserscasvessoesocavenssvessessecaseds 235 TrendView Historian Server Client Software 237 Software License Agreement sssssrsesscsscsserscsscsscsscssessessssssseesssssesesssessessessesseesensers 237 TrendView Historian Support Information sssssssssessssssscresssssssssscssssssscsesesessssssseees 237 Trend View Historian Installation sssini aa 238 OPC Client Access to Trend View OPC Historian Server ssssesssessssscesersssseseseees 239 Retrieving Data from TrendView Historian Server ssssssssseressssssesssesessssseessssessens 240 Retrieving Aggregate values sssesessesorsreserorosesenoseseseesosssososesonseesororosesesoseseeseeesse 253 Glossary 259 Explanation of terms relating to the TrendManager Suite _
410. t column and the Engi neering units Y in the second column To add more lines click on a line and use the Insert Above and Insert Below buttons To add a line at the bottom click on Add To delete a line click in the line and select Delete When you have finished your table it will be saved automatically Data Error box If there is a mistake in the table a Data Error box will appear saying Data line is invalid This will appear when you select another table or another function The error box will indicate which line has the error There may be more than one error in the table if so the data error message box will appear for each error starting from the top line down going to the next as each error is fixed Linearisation Table examples Figure 6 1 shows an example of a set of non linear signal inputs X and the required values in engineering units Y that have been entered into a linearisation table They would produce the following curve 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 71 Honeywell Figure 6 1 Example of a 0 10V non linear input signal 10 1 4 8 a Y i Eng Units 4 1 2 pft 0 a_ _ KX gt Input Signal A straight line is drawn between each point as shown by the continuous red line in Figure 6 1 For a more accurate curve as shown by the dotted line blue add more data points into the linearisation table If the full input range is grea
411. t practice this can be done at regular maintenance intervals along with data backup activity GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 199 Honeywell Comms Server Setup The comms server software can be run independently of the main application software by cre ating a shortcut to the Startup folder If over writing a previous version of X amp GR Series Comms server only the local server will retain the database information and load all the de vices and settings from the databases Any other remote database servers will have to be added manually Comms Server new user Using the comms server from scratch requires 1 Add a new device to a Communications port Devices will appear under the Communica tions Port when selected in the left window and will appear in the initial database on the local comms server See Add a Device on page 201 2 Click on Communication Ports in the left window to display a list of the ports in the main window Tick the port that the device has been added to See Communication Ports on page 198 3 For a realtime connection check device connection status by clicking on the device under its comms port in the left window to display the device status in the top main win dow Green LED s will show a realtime connection is made If grey LED s are showing and the device displays Unconnected and if Red LED s display then there is a problem with connection 4 The data from this device can n
412. t up for the recorder and click on the Finish button 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Recorder Setup General recorder setup Go through each tab entering or editing the recorder details Click in any area on the screen and press F1 on the keyboard to display the related help files General Setup tab Check recorder details are correct Pen Summary tab The Pen Summary tab shows the setup of each pen e Pen Shows pen status e Destination Data to be logged to Disk PC card Compact Flash SD card or USB key e Mode Normal or Alarm logging e Log Normal Continuous or Fuzzy types of logging e Rate Specify the logging rate in days hours minutes seconds or milliseconds e Method Choose sample or min max logging Continuous logging only e Units Units of measure for that pen Use Percentage of disk space used logging to disk or PC card This window displays the Disk Life Calculator which shows how much space is left based on the log ging rate of the fastest pen Readings are displayed in years days hours minutes and seconds This screen will update as pen details are completed See next button Pens Communications tab For Honeywell V5 recorders with a comms card fitted the correct comms card must be set up in the Hardware Configuration Wizard See Add New Recorder on page 123 Only the Ethernet option is available on the eZtrend V5 Serial port RS232 Honeywell V5
413. tab to suit each option ee Transfer ry 2 Unit Text Enter information about the scale by filling in the unit of measurement from the Unit Text drop down menu or entry the text or symbol manually For a linear scale set the Zero and Span details for the bottom and top scale limits which can be up to 7 digits in length The scale displayed in this window will incorporate zero span and division changes according to information entered For a logarithmic scale the headings will read Starting power of 10 eg 4 will represent 10 to the power of 4 The other piece of information required for a log scale is the Number of Decades which is limited to a maximum of 9 decades A negative scale cannot be entered for a Log scale Divisions The Divisions within the scale will be automatically worked out and entered by the software depending on the scale limits Un tick this box and divisions can be manually entered for both Major and Minor divisions not available for Logarithmic scales 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 129 Honeywell Scale Factor is for user entered text that displays on the scale if required Used for displaying scales with large values eg if you have a scale that is 0 to 10 000 you can display it as 0 to 1000 with a scale factor of x10 There is no change to the scale shown in the tab Format The Format button defaults to automatic scale labelling or select Specify to define the number of deci mal pl
414. tandard address 0004 can be used to send Supplemental to Function code 17 Report Device ID e Page 23 Slave ID for X Series and GR recorders is always 05 e Page 24 Device description 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue29 December 2014 UK 43 TV 25 11 Honeywell Item Size in bytes Contents Recorder type space software version The length is extended to exactly 16 bytes by trailing 0x00 characters Device Description 16d 0x10 Recorder type is a combination of the OEM series name followed by the OEM device name truncated to 16 characters Software version is of the form nn XX eg 00 FQ Page 25 Number of data block records byte 23 always equals 05 for the Trendview range data blocks are always in order 00 Analogue inputs 02 Digital inputs 03 Digital outputs 06 Pens 09 Totalisers Page numbers refer to document Modbus Serial Communications User manual 51 52 25 66Q April 2007 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 299 300 Honeywell 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Appendix G Modbus Communications and Modbus Profile Tool TrendManager Suite and Modbus communications The X Series and GRrecorders implement the industry standard Modbus protocol to enable the retrieval of Realtime data into the TrendManager Software Suite The Modbus protocol defines a standard for communicating groups of registers which are 2 byte values to and from a master and a slave t
415. te set of features Select the required version and depending on the version chosen the installation steps will be different TrendViewer Installation e Click Next The Start Copying Files window appears for reviewing the settings before it starts copying the files e Click Next Installation will progress during this process it creates TMSApplica tionAccessGroup The above groups can be checked only after completion of installation and restart of machine for more details please refer to TrendManager Suite User Groups after Installation on page 15 The installation complete window appears with a message to restart the machine or not It is preferred to restart the machine before using the application e Click Finish License code is not required for Trend Viewer lnstallation TrendManager Pro and TrendServer Pro Installation e Click Next The License window appears enter the code and organization as sup plied with each specific version of software The code can be found inside the DVD case e Click Next The below User Account Information Window appears and then follow the on screen instructions User Account Information Enter the Windows User Account details to use TMS Application TMS will use this windows user account to enable the communications across machines In case you want to use a Domain user account please enter as Domain name User name User Account Information Domain Name U
416. ted pen s to the scale or trace areas of the graph e Traces can be deleted easily by dragging and dropping the pen scale over a Trash can This does not delete any data only removes the trace from the graph e Traces can also be added by double clicking on them Copy a graph e Go to the Graphs list under the Graphs slide out pane e Either drag the selected graph onto a blank section of the Graphs list or right click and select copy For moving graphs between folders see Move a graph between folders on page 154 Graph with Events See Graphing Events on page 223 Graph a Batch See Graphing a Batch on page 226 Save a Graph e When the graph is closed a prompt will appear to save the graph Enter a name for iden tification and click on Yes and the graph will be saved and appear in the Graphs List e The graph can be saved directly by clicking on the Save icon on the left side of the graph area or from the Graph Menu by clicking on the Save Ctrl S also will save a graph e The graph is saved exactly as it is displayed at the time of closure e Just the graph is saved not the data Save As a Graph e Save As feature allows the graph to be saved with a different name Rename a graph Graphs can only be renamed when none are open or the first time it is saved e Go to Graphs list under the Graphs slide out pane e right click on the graph icon and select rename e enter the new name in the box provided an
417. tem that is above OPCHDA_HIGH_ENTRY_LIMIT cannot be entered into history This is the top of the span OPCHDA_LOW_ENTRY_LIMIT Low Entry Limit Specifies the lowest valid value for the item A value for the item that is below OPCHDA_LOW_ENTRY_LIMIT cannot be entered into history This is the zero for the span 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 251 Honeywell FIGURE 10 17 Read Attribute Select MatrikonOPC HDA Explorer File Server Function View Help Hci TrendView Historian Jeax wll TRESS AAEH ott Dit x s Hei Trendview His Attributes Ti Select HDA Attributes to Read OPCHDA_DATA_TYPE OPCHDA_DESCRIPTION OPCHDA_ENG_UNITS OPCHDA_SOURCE_NAME OPCHDA_ITEMID OPCHDA_HIGH_ENTRY_LIMIT POONA AA FAA T ood Non specific od Non specific od Non specific od Non specific ood Non specific od Non specific od Non specific od Non specific ood Non specific od Non specific ood Non specific ood Non specific ood Non specific od Non specific od Non specific od Non specific ood Non specific od Non specific ood Non specific w gt 4 Click the Read Attribute button to close Read Attribute Dialog All the information will be shown in the right side view ee catia OPCHDA_DATA Specifies the data type for the item S OPCHDA_DESC Describes the item OPCHDA_ENG_ Specifies the label to use in displays to OPCHDA_SOU pecifies the n
418. tems 308 Exporting Modbus Profile s Select Export Profiles s from the File drop down list to produce the Export Profiles win dow Select the profile you wish to export from the Available Profiles list and click on the right pointing arrow in the middle to transfer the profile to the window on the right Next you must designate the target location of where you want the profile to be exported to Select the button to the right of the Target File window and browse to desired location You can enter the same file name as your profile or a new name if you are exporting several profiles The xml file extension will be automatically added to the file name by the Modbus Profile Tool Click on the Save button to and to enter the entire file path into the Target File window Select the Export button to send the profile s to the target file Export Profiles Available Profiles Chosen Profiles Recorder Name Type ID Henry2 XX D1 i R200 ID 05 CE Furnace 4 ST300 ID 112 Station 2 XX ID 21 lt v Target File HiRingwood THP Software Modbus Profiles Henry 2 XX ID 1 xml VO Cn Importing Modbus Profile s The chosen profiles can now be imported into another system Run the Modbus Profile Tool on the system where the profiles are required Select File gt Import Profile s gt Profile name A browser dialog will be displayed for selecting the target xml file to import modbus profiles on One the target
419. ten notice to the other party and Licensee will pay Honeywell for products delivered and services performed prior to termination Force majeure events may include but are not lim ited to 1 government embargoes 2 blockades 3 seizure or freeze of assets 4 delays or refusals to grant an export license or the suspension or revocation thereof 5 any other acts of any government that would limit the ability for contract performance 6 fires earth quakes floods severe weather conditions 7 any other acts of God 8 quarantines or regional medical crises 9 labour strikes or lockouts 10 riots strife insurrection civil dis obedience armed conflict terrorism or war declared or not or impending threat of any of the foregoing if such threat might reasonably be expected to cause injury to people or prop erty 11 shortages or inability to obtain materials or components and 12 inability or refusal by Licensee s directed third party suppliers to provide Honeywell parts services manuals or other information necessary to the goods or services to be provided by Honey well under this Agreement 12 6 Waiver The failure of either party to enforce at any time any of the provisions of this agreement shall not be construed to be a continuing waiver of any provisions hereunder nor shall any such failure prejudice the right of such party to take any action in the future to enforce any provisions hereunder 12 7 Severability In the eve
420. ter than the range used in the linearisation tables then the signal will carry on following the slope of the last two inputs For example if we had a 50 to 50V range and just used the 0 to 10V linearisation table then the signal would look like Figure 6 2 72 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Figure 6 2 Linearisation table used for part of the range 50 po eae ee The last two points are used to i oe ee ee eee ee LoL follow the slope for the rest of 40 o the signal 30 EEEE eee 4 t r r r r At the bottom of the 0 10V table l the last two inputs are X 0 Y 0 20 pie nee tink ais cee cae e and X 2 Y 6 At the top of the 10 E ee ere E RE S ap ee 0 10V table the last two points i are X 8 Y 9 8 and X 10 Y 0 ERS PE OR ee Ee Ne Ee Y 10 Figure 6 2 shows these last two inputs at the top and 10 EA PETE UTEE OEE ls cell Se opt E bottom of the 0 10V signal Hooi 20 SS h ON EAEE EEEE TAE ek EEEE l 2003 SE a E eee ea E E l AQ bochJt 14 ee eee 50 l 50 40 30 20 10 O 10 20 30 40 50 X gt 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 73 74 Honeywell AMS2750 Furnace Process and TUS Up to 6 furnaces or ovens can be configured and fed into one recorder Furnaces 1 to 6 relate directly to Groups 1 to 6 configured in the recorder Select each furnace in turn and configure as required For Process Furnace set up and TUS Furnace set up the scr
421. the start value of the first decade No Decades Only available when the Scale Type is set to Log Select and enter the number of decades required Max 99 decades although not all will be displayed Number Format Displays the Notation of the number format Scientific or Normal Notation Toggle between Scientific or Normal number format Auto Toggle between Auto and User Defined After Decimal Only available when User Defined is selected Select and enter the number of decimal places up to 15 decimal places 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Logging tab Click on Logging to set up each logging profile per pen Setup Window General Scales Logging maths Totais Alarms RAV Enabled iv Type Contrusus Rate Units Seconds v Rate Sec Alarm Rate Units Miliseconds vj Alarm Rate zi mea a Events Counters pen 14 irid None zi iv e Enabled Tick to activate or de activate logging for this pen Type Toggles between Continuous or Fuzzy logging e e Continuous logs every value based on the Method chosen Sample Average or Max Min e e Fuzzy Logging has been developed as a secure data storage technique which has a self teaching data storage algorithm so the recorder stores data at a variable rate to match the process being monitored Fuzzy Logging has intelligent resources to enable the most effective and efficient way of using the scan rate storage capacity and record
422. the backflow level is exceeded Backflow Level Only active when No Blackflow is set Set the level at which totalising will stop if the signal flow goes below this limit and if the No Backflow option is active Restrict Range Normal Totaliser only Toggles On and Off When active this will allow access to the Min and Max Ranges to be set Min Range Normal Totaliser only Only available when Restrict Range is active Select and enter the minimum limit for the totals to range from Max Range Normal Totaliser only Only available when Restrict Range is active Select and enter the maximum limit for the totals to range from Notation Toggle between Scientific or Normal number format Auto Toggle Between Automatic number formatting and User Defined Use Remainder If the total exceeds the maximum scale limit the total will reset to the minimum limit When Use Remainder is active it will carry over any amount in excess of the maximum scale limit After Decimal Only available when User Defined is selected Select and enter the number of decimal places up to 15 decimal places Sterilisation variations Temp Input Units For Sterilisation Type select the temperature input units Start Temperature For Sterilisation select the Start Temperature Reference Temp For Sterilisation select the Reference Temperature Z Factor Temp For Sterilisation select the Z factor temperature Include Cooling For Sterilisation In
423. tion can take up many pages If this is required select Landscape mode to cut down the page count The Font type can be changed if desired e Print All This will select all the areas shown and print them e Print Selection Select the areas to print e Clear All This will clear all print selections Done Hit this to cancel this screen or when you are finished printing 118 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Peer Services In the top left will be an Edit button that takes you to Preferences Select Preferences to produce the Peer Services dialog and the Batch Settings dialog Peer services Batch Settings Peer Services Start Port 8955 Reset to default Peer Services End Port 8970 Peer Services is used to find other recorders on the network The default port settings should only be changed in consultation with your network security administrator and must be kept consistent with recorder settings in order to work Peers services is used to find other recorders on the network The default port settings should only be changed in consultation with your network security administrator and must be kept consistent with recorder settings in order to work Start Port Default port number 8955 End Port Default port number 8970 Batch Settings Concurrent Batch Mode Batch mode has changed to allow concurrent batches where each batch is associated with a group so all pens within Group 1 will b
424. to be reset 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 103 104 Honeywell e User Counters only available when Sub Type is set to User Select the User Counter number to be used from the available list Counters will only be available if they have first been set up in the User Counters Menu Increment By only available when Increment is selected as the Event Action Enter the number at which you want the counter to increment by when the event cause is triggered Reset To only available when Reset is selected as the Event Action and Sub Type is set to User Enter the number at which you want the counter to reset to when the event cause is triggered Max Mins Reset Use this as an effect of an event to reset all Max Min values e Chart Control The chart activity can be controlled as an effect of an event The chart control options are Pause Stop Resume Clear and Prefill e Pause this will pause the chart until it is resumed Resuming a paused chart will display continuous chart data from when it had been paused The chart can be stopped if in a paused state ee Stop this will stop the chart and no chart data will be displayed for the length of time the chart is stopped If a stopped chart is resumed there will be a gap in the displayed chart data ee Resume this can be used after the chart has been stopped or paused The chart data will continue from where it has been paused with no gaps displayed But
425. to graph Both scale will arrange them self into Tile view Now change the default preference to Stretch and added pen 3 to graph then all three pens i e Pen 1 Pen 2 and Pen 3 rearrange themselves to Stretch scale view manually change the scale setting from scale arrangement option for any Graph opened then these Default settings as shown in figure above will not be applied on pens which are added afterwards 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 121 122 Honeywell Show Events Yes or No For Showing events Zoom Level Show Last X hours Parameters are 1Min 5Min 15Min 30Min 1Hour 2 Hour 6 Hour 12Hour 1Day 5Day 7Day default and All It shows data of specific duration in a graph Real Time Speed Setting speed for real time charting the graph Options provided are 1 Seconds 2 Seconds 5 Seconds 10 Seconds 1 Minutes 2 Minutes 5 Minutes and 1 Hour Reset to Default will reset all settings to default 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Honeywell V5 Recorders TrendManager Suite allows you to set up a recorder from your PC NB If any function is denied by a flashing padlock this is because a password is required to be entered to proceed any further see Passwords on page 184 All areas are covered in the TrendManager Suite Help Click in any area on the screen and press F1 on the keyboard to display the related help files NOTE Honeywell V5 Recorders are not supported for
426. ty without confidential limitations c independently developed by Licensee as evidenced by appropriate records or d known to Licensee prior to its first receipt of same from Honeywell as evidenced by appropriate records If any Confidential Information must be disclosed to any third party by reason of legal accounting or regulatory requirements beyond the reasonable control of Licensee Licensee shall promptly notify Honeywell of the order or request and permit Honeywell at its own expense to seek an appropriate protective order 1 3 Documentation shall mean Honeywell published user documentation for the Licensed Software which may be in the form of user manuals and or other related docu mentation in written or electronic object code form 1 4 Intellectual Property Rights means all copyrights trademarks trade secrets pat ents mask works and other intellectual property rights recognized in any jurisdiction world wide including all applications and registrations with respect thereto 1 5 Licensee means the entity that purchased the license to the Licensed Software solely for use of the Licensed Software at the Licensed Site 1 6 Licensed Processor means a Honeywell approved processor which may be a con trol system or product a computer or a specific number of computing devices in a network environment which processor is owned leased or otherwise controlled by Licensee and on which Licensee is authorized to inst
427. ued by Licensee in connection with this Agreement shall be of no force or effect This Agreement may only be amended or supplemented by a writing that refers explicitly to this Agreement and that is signed by duly authorized representatives of Licensee and Honeywell THE LICENSED SOFTWARE AND ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTATION ARE PRO TECTED BY UNITED STATES COPYRIGHT LAW AND INTERNATIONAL TREATY UNAU THORIZED REPRODUCTION OR DISTRIBUTION IS SUBJECT TO CIVIL AND CRIMINAL PENALTIES BY INSTALLING OR USING THE LICENSED SOFTWARE YOU ACKNOWL EDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS AGREEMENT UNDERSTAND IT AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK XV Honeywell Year 2000 Compliance Statement The TrendManager Suite is Year 2000 compliant in accordance with the BSI DISC PD2000 1 definition provided that the host PC its BIOS operating system and any other active appli cations are also Year 2000 compliant 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Chapter 1 Welcome to the TrendManager Suite Honeywell Features Features TrendViewer TrendManager TrendServer Data Conversion Tool to import graph save and export data from other Honeywell devices into the TrendManager Software y no export mode v Full Configuration of TrendView recorders Import data from removable media v Print all graph data and recorder configurations Operates in Windows 8 32 and 64
428. ultitrend SX 3M 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 245 Honeywell 10 Click to enter the pen into the selected item list Follow the same procedure for adding multi ple pens Click OK to close the dialog FIGURE 10 11 Insert Item Dialog OMatrikonOPC HDA Explorer 5 xj 4 File Server Function View Help wlas d i edariari rner re pe i5 Hei Tre Insert Item x edd bd Dd J Browse Item q initial Dat PC GV TS 150T_PIFTP Imported D stal36o fg Item Id Miniial DatabaselFPC GV TS Spee smal aie rk FIP S E Initial Database E e FPC GV TS 150T_P amp FTP mported Data LOCAL TIF Multitrend Sx 3M B testFtp Select the pen with the historical data you want to retrieve 246 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell 11 The selected pen will be shown in the list present at the lower left corner FIGURE 10 12 Selected pens shown MatrikonOPC HDA Explorer 5 x Eile Server Function View Help Hei TrendView Historian b S z x Ba lt lt Hci TrendView Historian 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 247 Honeywell 12 Right click on the pen to retrieve associated historical data associated The context menu will be shown click on Read Raw It will open theRead Raw Dialog Multiple pens can be selected for retrieving associated historical data FIGURE 10 13 Selecting Read Raw to retrieve historical data ww MatrikonOPC HDA Explore
429. underground com 2 amanda hugenkis parismetro co gerry rickman co uk Recording Transfer Hardware Reports 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell e Server Name Enter your server name that will handle the transfer of the emails Ask your IT Admin for the server details One method of finding this information is to go to Microsoft Outlook Tools Email Accounts select View or change existing email accounts Select your email server from the box eg Microsoft Exchange Server and click on the Change button The server name you require is displayed in the Exchange Server Settings dialog Enter this name exactly using the on screen keyboard If in doubt contact you IT Administrator for advice on entering Server name requirements e Authentication Enables Disables the Username and Password which may or may not be required by the server Check with your IT Admin For network printers and drivers if you intend to connect the recorder on a Micro soft network administered as a domain you may have to authenticate the recorder as a user with sufficient permissions to use the resources that you want network printer network drive Usually several devices computers or record ers can be authenticated on the same network with the same name e Username Enter your Network Logon Username this may include your Domain Name e Password Enter your Password associated with your user name If you have a
430. ups can be configured by specifying the number of channels in the group and the register address of the first channel in that group e Channel group number Once the number of groups has been set the groups can be configured by specifying the number of channels in the group and the regis ter address of the first channel in that group The remaining channel registers addresses in a group are derived from the address of the first channel in the group If you have two groups the drop down menu will give you the option to view details for group 1 or 2 Select each group and configure the Modbus profile for all channels in each group Input Registers Number of channel groups Channel group number Group 1 of 2 First channels register address Number of channels in group Group 1 of 2 depending on how many groups you have e First channel register number This number can be found in the Modbus Mem ory Map information found in the instruction manual of your device All Honeywell devices state their register number in hex this must be converted into decimal before entering it into the profile tool e Number of channels in group Enter the number of channels for the device Channel Number Select which channels to view or configure from the drop down menu Channel 1 of 16 in Group 1 depending on what channel number and group has been selected Once a group has been configured with the appropriate number of channels each channe
431. urn messages to the device If you are using the Communication Server on TrendServer Pro the same Slave ID number must be entered 1 254 Modbus X Modbus X protocol differs from standard Modbus by the 4 floating point order that is reversed for application compatibility RS485 Baud Rate Only available when the RS485 port in selected Select this for a list of available Baud Rates This is the speed in bps bits per second at which data is trans ferred e Byte Options Only available when the RS485 port is selected Select this button for a list of available Byte Options The Byte Options consist of 3 digits comprising of Parity set to None N Even E or Odd O 8 Data Bits and Stop Bits signifying the end of the charac ter string 1 or 2 The default is N 8 1 which means no parity 8 data bits and 1 stop bit This is currently the only byte option supported by Comms Server e Line Turn Around Only available when the RS485 port in selected This is for a 2 wire line type Data has to be fully transmitted before the line can be turned around and data can be received or vice versa e Reply Delay Only available when the RS485 port in selected Enter a delay time in milli seconds before the recorder sends a reply Recommended delay should be set to 12mS min if using the Comms Server To check communications connections and trouble shooting network settings versus SCV parameters go to the recorder menu Status gt
432. us V5 FIGURE 6 6 Hardware Wizard Hardware Configuration Wizard Build your recorder x HMM Shta Universal xj coah B ShtB Universal cadaun 8 t C i Yd Shtat FostScamng Cadwh i ShtB1 Fost Scaring F Cadwh Bi Slt D1JNone cadwh Ot C S YS Sht p2fNane xj Card with fo 7 SbtC JAS 485 wilh 2 wile Y Shi D alain 7 Card w h 16 Relay 16 Digtal 7 Channels VPens It you have bought addtional maths pens you con specily them heie cet neo _ Slots A B A1 and B1 are for analogue inputs select either Universal Fast Scanning Linear and Output cards depending on the options fitted into the recorder When the analogue input cards are selected ensure the corresponding number of channels is displayed in the associated box on the Hardware Con figuration Wizard Slot C is for the Communications card choose either Ethernet RS485 Trendbus or RS232 The associated comms box will show further options for the type on communication selected Slot D is for the alarm card this is an option card so check to see if this is included in your recorder If so select Alarm and remember to set the number of channels in the associated box Slot D2 is to fit an extra alarm card do not use D1 VPens or Virtual pens are available with each type of recorder These virtual pens are used mainly for displaying maths functions and the totaliser A virtual pen can also be setup as an identical copy if the data from one pen
433. user in the Users Tab or a group in the Groups Tab and click on the right fac ing arrows to add the user group TMSApplicationAccessGroup Group dow Click on left facing arrows to remove the user group from TMSApplicationAccess A user can also be added by using the Add button After adding the users groups click on Close button to exit User Configuration win Installation will progress For TrendServer Pro it creates TMSApplicationAc cessGroup and TMServiceAccessGroup groups and for TrendManager Pro it creates only TMSApplicationAccessGroup These groups can be checked only after completion of installation and restart of machine for more details please refer to TrendManager Suite User Groups after Installation on page 15 The installation complete window appears with message to restart the machine or not It is mandatory to restart the machine before using the application e Click Finish 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Post installation checks for using TrendServer Pro 1 Ensure that Communications Service has started Steps to check for Communications Service 1 Please go to Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Services 2 You will see below window File Action View Help gt DE cA Services Local G a B m gt au p Communications Service Description Communications Service Name 4 Power S Print Spooler Remote Procedure Call
434. ut signal Select and enter a value Fuzzy Band 2 Only available if the logging Type is set to Fuzzy Toggles On and Off This is to enable a second tolerance to be set configure it to be On to activate Only used in conjunction with Autofit On to specify the Band 2 Band 2 Only available if the logging Type is set to Fuzzy This is where a tighter toler ance can be specified which must be set within the limits of Band 1 Specify as a percent age of the scale range the tolerance band allowed above and below the input signal Select and enter a value Maths tab Analogue signals may have a mathematical calculation performed on them before they are represented as a pen Basic Maths is standard in all recorders Full Maths or Scripting are options that must be activated in the recorder Maths Type Analogue signals may have a mathematical calculation performed on them before they are represented as a pen Basic Maths is standard in all recorders Full Maths and Scripting are Firmware credit options that must be activated in the recorder If your recorder setup has Full Math or Scripting enabled basic maths is disabled Edit Maths Edit the Maths for this particular pen If a Pulse input card is fitted the first 4 pens will display the maths function of HPULn as default to display the pulse reading For details see Appendix B Maths Expressions for X amp GR Series Recorders on page 271 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 20
435. vailable when not using Use Pen Scale option This is the bottom of the engineering scale and represents the bottom of the input scale Select and enter a value using the on screen keyboard 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 67 Honeywell Analogue Out tab Only available when a Analogue Output card is a part of the Setup Press the Analogue Out button to display all the analogue outputs available Click on individual Analogue Out number to set up each channel profile Not available on the eZtrend Enabled Tick to enable e Overrange Tick to enable enabled as default This will allow the output signal to go overrange to 21mA if disabled the maximum is 20mA e Transmit Select a pen to output 4 20mA loop This will take the scale value from the pen it is transmitting and convert to 4 20mA output signal eg if the scale is 0 50 this signal will fit the scale so 4mA 0 and 20mA 50 e Output Select either 4 20mA or 0 20mA e Label Select and enter an identification label Select and use the on screen keyboard Up to 16 characters Pulse In tab Only available when a Pulse Input card is part of the Setup The Pulse Input card operates up to a fre quency of 25kHz max Not available on the eZtrend If a Pulse input card is fitted the first 4 pens will display the maths function of HPULn in the Maths tab in the Pens section as default to display the pulse reading Click on individual Pulse Input number t
436. ved Data Andy FTP Junes 2 9 Communication Ports List of Database Servers x COM1 x COM2 x COM3 com4 ei Coms Destination Source Rate Type L wr coM Local Client 1 Pen 1 Temp lsec Sample e COM Local Client 1 Pen 2 1sec Sample aw coms Local Client 1 Pen 3 1sec Sample 3 Local Client 1 Pen 4 lsec Sample Ethernet Local Client 1 Pen 5 1sec Sample o i Local Client 1 Pen 6 1 sec Sample Local Client 1 Pen7 i sec Sample Local Client 1 Pen 8 1sec Sample Client connections Database logging ns Destination Source Local Server Pen 1 Temp Local Server Pen 2 lsec Sample Local Server Pen 3 1sec Sample Local Server Pen4 1sec Sample Local Server Pen 5 1sec Sample Local Server Pen 6 1sec Sample Local Server Pen7 1sec Sample Local Server Pens lsec Sample Client Connections tab displays any Pens being graphed N Database Logging tab displays any Pens being logged Database logging Comms Server can be minimised now it will continue to run in the background Client connections Client Connections Realtime comms data from the device will only display on the comms server communications status screen when realtime data is active on either the server software or by using an OPC client Once data is active on a client connection this window will display details of the device selected in the top window its Destination or where the informatio
437. vel must be set e e Media Missing External media is missing so a scheduled export is not possible e FTP Memory Low Display when internal memory is going to start overwriting non FTP d data within a defined period of time Storage Alarm level must be set ee CJC Missing CJC Sensor is not plugged into Al Card ee TC Burnout A TC burnout has been detected Storage Alarm Levels need to be set as to when the system is alerted that the three differ ent memory areas as low See Storage Alarm on page 109 Setup Window General Pens Groups Batch Credits Printer Error Alert Pa c RE a Error Types E Int Mem Alarm Media Missing Comms FTP Mem Lo CJC Missing Events Counters TC Burnout A i T he bt q Recording Bkg Colour Change Auto Clear v Transfer Enable Reflash g Hardware Reflash Time Reports 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Border Colour Use the on screen colour palette to change the message border colour Background Colour Use the on screen colour palette to change the message back ground colour Auto Clear When Auto clear is switched on the recorder will automatically detect if something has been done to rectify the problem and the message will disappear Eg if the removable external storage media being used for a scheduled export is full and is replaced with media that has sufficient memory available then the error alert box will dis
438. visions of this Agreement by Licensee may cause Honeywell irreparable damage for which recovery of money damages would be inadequate and that Honeywell shall therefore be entitled to obtain timely injunctive relief to protect Honeywell s rights under this Agreement in addition to any and all remedies available at law 12 3 Notices All notices to Honeywell shall be in writing and shall be directed to Honeywell International Inc Honeywell Process Solutions 2500 West Union Hills Drive Phoenix AZ 85027 5139 Attn General Counsel 12 4 No Agency Nothing contained herein shall be construed as creating any agency employment relationship partnership principal agent or other form of joint enterprise between the parties 12 5 Force Majeure Neither party shall be liable hereunder by reason of any failure or delay in the performance of its obligations hereunder except for the payment of money on account of strikes shortages riots insurrection fires flood storm explosions acts of God war governmental action labour conditions earthquakes material shortages or any other cause which is beyond the reasonable control of such party Except for payment obliga tions neither party will be liable to the other for any failure to meet its obligations due to any cause beyond the non performing party s reasonable control If the inability to perform con tinues for longer than 90 days either party may terminate this Agreement by providing writ
439. w e Show id List Enable this to allow any addition list item id s to appear in a drop down list in the Batch Control screen See below e Show Field 1 List Enable this to allow any addition list item for Field 1 to appear in a drop down list in the Batch Control screen See below e Show Field 2 List Enable this to allow any addition list item for Field 2 to appear ina drop down list in the Batch Control screen See below e Show Field 3 List Enable this to allow any addition list item for Field 3 to appear in a drop down list in the Batch Control screen See below Additional list items are entered in General Batch Properties General on page 59 Ensure you have the pens you require assigned to a group see Pens tab on page 58 At the bottom of the screen is the Ctr Reset button this will produce a warning dialog asking if you want to reset group counters When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu Batch mode state and count in scripts see Maths Variable and Function Tables on page 272 Batch mode state and count in embedded variables Table 6 6 on page 107 Note batch mode no longer operates on pens that do not belong in a group so when upgrading to the new version existing users need to add pens to a group to use the batch functionality 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 61
440. when an alarm becomes inactive Select and enter a label Not available for Pulse Input Up to 12 charac ters e Reports To This will acknowledge the Alarm Digital IO to a selected destination Select User message to add the Digital IO occurrence to the messages list only Select Mark On Chart to display the occurrence on a chart and to the messages list 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Linearisation tab The Linearisation tab can be located as part of the Analogue In setup Linearisation Tables To be used with Analogue Input type Volts Amps or Ohms These are user defined tables that can be set up to allow a non linear input signal to be dis played on the recorder By entering a set of non linear signal input values X into the lineari sation table the recorder will use the table to generate linear output Y in engineering units to be displayed and or log on the recorder Setup Window i Linearisation itty Cursed Analogue In Alarm Dig IO Lin Table Table 2 Table Name Ins Del X Signal inp _Y Eng units Insert Above 0 0000 0 0000 2 0000 ee _ Insert Below Cu D e e Select the next available table and rename it for ease of identification e Click on the Add button to insert the first line e Click into the text entry boxes under the X and Y boxes and enter the required values or leave if your table starts at 0 The Signal Input X goes in the firs
441. x Set the Tag or name of the Event for identification Events are credit controlled Eventi Changes here may not be reflected on the recorder SARIE Enabled V ae Toe eaa i Interval 1h 00m 00s Hardware i Day v Transfer A a Mark Chart Set Event Causes Click in Cause and select the Set button and choose the cause of the event from the list provided e Alarms Set to cause an event when a pen goes Into Alarm Out of Alarm or an Alarm is Acknowledged Set the pen number and the Alarm that will trigger this event e Totalisers Set to cause an event when a totaliser Starts Stops is Reset or a Rollover is required Select which pen has been set up as a totalise pen to trigger this event The upper limit for the totaliser count is fixed to 16777215 to prevent an inaccuracy in the calculation above this upper limit The Totaliser Rollover occurs automatically once the count reaches the accuracy limit and totalizser starts counting from zero If user fails to configure the event totaliser will auto reset The Rollover cause gets triggered each time the totaliser rollover occurs above the accu racy limit Digital Inputs Set to cause an event when a Digital Input is turned On Off or has a State Change Select the Digital to trigger this event e TC Burn Out Click in the text box to select which analogue input has a thermocouple on that will trigger this event when it goes into a burnout st
442. x CE x FL x ASINH x ACOSH x ATANH x EXP x Complex Variables in able dg example shown is fora Minitrend V5 configuration Maths examples Here are some maths expression examples The first example is simple with Pen 2 selected it will General Scales Logging Maths show the sum of analogue input 1 A1 plus analogue Erunt input 2 A2 The second example shows Pen 1 selected this will show the square root of analogue input A1 then added to analogue input A2 Here Pen 3 is selected showing a Quadratic Fit for a Type B Thermocouple General Scales Logging Maths Expression P3 1415 4322 9129 0799 A1 2 07391 16 SQIA1 For use of maths with the fail safe option see Boolean Expressions on page 270 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 131 132 Honeywell Totals A Totaliser is normally associated with flow monitoring applications where the input to the recorder would be a measure of flow rate e g in litres per minute The Totaliser can then measure the total amount that has flowed over a certain period of time Totalisers are assigned to individual pens Tick to Enable enter the Pen Units which are the same at the units label on the pen scales page repre senting the label applied to any scale Enter the Total Units which are the units the totaliser is collect ing in Eg if the input is mA a likely totaliser units would be kAh The Factor will convert the un
443. xes Select the required E mail recipient s by highlighting the E mail address and selecting the Add button Note that up to 12 recipients may be used for each E mail message see Email tab on page 90 146 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Importing and Exporting of Set ups The Transfer button is where the Setup can be imported from other recorders or exported to other recorders via removable media Click on the transfer button to either Import or Export identify the setup to import or the location to export to using the Change button If you are importing data from a disk and there are multiple sub directories one for each recorder point at a specific sub directory to import just that recorder or the root to import all the recorders Choose a folder to import from or export to e g A drive for a floppy disk ee Transfer Ti For more information on importing data and setups see mporting on page 155 For importing via FTP see Importing via FTP or Secure Communications Interface on page 157 ome Hardware Related Set ups Hardware o This will only be used there are changes to the hardware fitted to the recorder For example when adding options cards such as an Relay Alarm card Digital Input Output card or Pulse card Minitrend QX and Multitrend SX Comms card option Minitrend and Multitrend V5 Recorder configuration complete When all setups are complete press OK a
444. xml file for import has been specified the Modbus Profile Tool will Import the profiles If any modbus profiles found in the xml file have the same name as an existing profile on the system the user is asked if they wish to overwrite the existing pro file or skip There are Overwrite All and Skip All options When the import is complete the Modbus Profile Tool provides a summary list of the pro files that were imported into the system These profiles will immediately be available for use the Comms Server when adding or editing a device for Realtime comms 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell Comms Server and Modbus profile s When Comms Server is first started up and if no data or setups have been imported into a database in TrendServer then no Modbus profiles will be available for selection when adding a device The only exception to this is if some standard Modbus profiles for Honeywell devices have been imported into the system Once data has been imported into TrendManager Software Suite Modbus profiles will be available for selection in Comms Server for setting up realtime data acquisition The Modbus profile names are based on the given name of the recorder it s ID number and the type of the recorder eZtrend Multitrend and Minitrend See Figure 18 2 FIGURE 18 2 Comms Server Select a profile Device Details Add Device Details Protocol Modbus Profile Communications Port IP Address xxxxxx N
445. xtended Less hard disk memory required for archiving on the PC Quicker graphing of data oa FB wn Smaller data files for remote collection OK How does it work Fuzzy Logging does not log data points that form part of a straight line The technique is best illustrated by the diagram below 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 287 Honeywell Input Signal Continuously Sampled data Fuzzy Logged data 12 points only Changing slope requires more data points to be logged to capture the shape correctly Diagram 1 Points marked O are NOT logged as they lie on an imaginary straight line between points marked The graph of the Fuzzy Logged data looks identical to the graph of the sampled data but has taken less than half the points to build it Sounds Great But what about Spikes on my trend line Won t it miss them 288 NO you will not miss any Spikes Glitches or Transients these are what you need to see As Fuzzy Logging is an adaptive technique it will log as fast as it needs to in order to cap ture everything Although not all points are logged the base Scan Rate of the input is the same as if you were using a standard logging technique 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK Honeywell OK but what about slowly drifting inputs Again No Problem The algorithm is processed in Real Time i e as the reading is taken As
446. y are added Click on any of the database servers or the database within and details of that item are displayed in the main window The main window will split to give additional information for databases showing comms port and device details Devices are added to the comms server through the Communications port the device can then be configured for logging The devices appear in the database and these databases are held within database servers Figure 8 11 on page 196 shows the comms status screen in the left window from the top is displayed Database Server Local and remote database and devices held on the Local database Connected databases are displayed with a green icon If the database is in red it is not con nected check the IP Address and Device ID are correct and a protocol has been selected on the device Un tick and then tick the active box on the comms server to restart the data base connection This section looks at the Comms Server s main elements displayed in the Status Screen Da tabase Servers Local and Remote Servers Databases Communication Ports Database log ging and Client connections Remote database servers can be added to the list to enable access to devices held in other databases on a remote database server in another location To connect to a remote database server the IP address must be known of the PC where the databases server is held Items with a sign signifies there are items within Click on the
447. y once the scheduler is active Close the External Import box If the FTP Secure Communication Interface related services do not start this error message below will appear while opening TrendServer Pro when scheduler is enabled Could not establish connection to FTPScheduler Server Please check if TMSService is running Open Comms UI with administrative privilege and restart servers OK NB If the FTP scheduler icon is enabled Connection to TMSFtpScheduler is lost message will be dis played in FTPstatus bar See General options on page 155 43 TV 25 11 GLO Issue 29 December 2014 UK 161 Honeywell Realtime Communications 162 Only available with TrendServer software Ensure the hardware for the communications card is connected correctly refer to the Honeywell V5 Communications manual for Minitrend and Multitrend Plus and eZtrend V5 recorders For X Series amp GR recorders refer to the Comms section in the User manual Realtime Realtime Comms can be made via Ethernet Modbus TCP IP or Modbus RS485 connections Trend bus RS485 is available on Minitrend and Multitrend Plus V5 recorders only Only data can be sent via Modbus so no recorder configurations or events are sent via Realtime and Logged data Due to the potential of large amounts of data that may be available it is not recommended to use FTP and Realtime at the same time Note Please note that data logging continues even when user is log
448. y pen groups e Reset Counter Alarms by pen groups e Start Stop or Reset Totals by groups Batch tab Batch is a firmware option is a firmware option that needs to be activated in the recorder The Batch function allows the user to segment portions of data for further analysis Setting up a batch requires information to identify and control batches of data Batch data can also be paused for viewing and resumed A batch can be aborted at any time if so this will not register as a batch a batch is only complete when it has been stopped This Batch menu is the setup menu where you can configure all the Batch and Group properties before starting a batch Concurrent Batch Mode Batch mode allows concurrent batches where each batch is associated with a group so all pens within Group 1 will belong to the batch that is controlled by Group 1 Screens can now be set to display groups in this mode only messages associated with that group i e pens within that group or batch messages for that group will be shown on the chart Remember when you have set up your batch requirements you need to assign pens to the batch group General Batch Properties General e Pause Chart Finish Enable this if you require the chart to be paused at the end of the batch The chart will restart when another batch is started for that group Start Log Start Enable this if you require logging to start when the batch starts e Batch logging control Pen

43-TV-25-11 TrendManager Suite User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents